Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Chevron U.S.A. Inc. Western Region EL & P
Chevron
STORAGE TANKS
TANK SELECTION - (JAC) A, GENERAL B , BASIC DATA
REQUIRED CAPACITY SEEVICE AND USE LIQUID PROPERTIES SITE CONDITIONS FIRE PROTECTION REQUI~EMENTS GOY ERNMENTAL REGULATIONS
C, TANK DIMENSIONS CONE ROOF TANKS SHELL THICKNESS LIMITATIONS SEISMIC DESIGN LIMITATIONS
D, ROOF SELECTION GENERAL VAPOR EMI ss I ON CONTROL (EVAPORATION LOSSES) FIRE PROTECTION EXPLOSION H A Z A ~ B
VAPOR SPACE CORROSION E, GONE WOOFS F , BOTTOM GONFIGU2ATI ON
11, TANK DESIGN - (JAC) A , GENERAL
BPI STANDARD 650
A$ I IBt4OGRkY SPEC IFHCATIBNS E6-967 AND E6-968
AVAILABLE COMPUTER PROGWMS
BASIC DATA
DESZGPJ METAL TEHPEXATURE M ~ x z i d u n FILLIHG AND EHPTYING RATES
DESIGN ~ H N D VELQCISY %ARTHQUAKE ZONE ROOF LOADING
OVERALL DESHGfl CONSIDERATIONS C ~ ~ R O S I O N A L L O ~ ~ A N C E
BRITTLE FRACTURE AND QUALITY OF STEEL
SULFIDE CRACKING AND TANKS STEELS
BOWOPI DESIGN
! ~ A T E R ~ A L S
ANF~ULWR BOTTOM PLATES AND SKETCH PLATES
PERHISSHBLE SETVLEHENT
CATHODIC PROTECT ION
SHELL DESIGN
SELECTIO~I OF DESIGN BASIS W I N D Ssas r~~rv OF BANK SHELLS
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE OF TANKS CONE ROOF DESIGN
\ A T E ~ I A L S
FRANG 1 BLE ROOF JOINT
K MISCELLANEOUS
PREPRIMING OF TANK STEEL
111, SELECTION O f APPURTENANCES - (JRS)
A , IrdTRODUCTHBa
B, FORMS EF-33C3 AND EF-3SFR
C , COMPA!iY DRAW I IGS
D, API STWblDAWDS
E , MAtiUFACTURERS' STANDARDS
F , ECOtiOMY I M SELECTIOj
I V , TAMK OPENINGS - (JRS)
A . BPI SHELL 14AflWOLES
B , LARGER ACCESSWAY
C, SMELL NOZZLES
D, SWELL CLEANOUTS
FLUSH-TYPE CLEANOUTS
3oow SWEET CLEANBUTS
E, ELBOW 6UTiEB F, SIPHOf4-TYPE WATER DRAWOFF G , WATER DRAWOFF SUF4PS
H , UtiDER-BO$TOH COliFiECT I Or4
HATER D ~ A H O F F ELBOWS COMB I ~ ~ A T I O M CLEANOUT AND WATER DRAW
LARGE BOTTOM ? ~ Q Z Z L E S
BQTTOW SUMP
I, ROOF MANHOLES
FUNCTION
STANDARD API ROOF ~YANHOLE
RECTANGULAR WOOF ?!ANHOLE
J, WINDOW SHEETS
K , GAGE FLOAT I N INSPECTION HATCH
L, API ROOF NOZZLES
V , GAGING AND SAPIPLING DEVICES - (JRS)
A , VAPOR-TIGHT GAGE HATCH
8, FUMNEL-TYPE THIEF AND GAGE HATCH
C, MULTIPLE USE HATCH
D, GAGE WELLS
FIXED RQOF TANKS
E , TANK GAGING
V I , OPERATING DEVICES - (JRS)
A, SWING PIPES
GENERAL
ELBOW SY I MG $0 I NTS
CABLES
W ~ ~ c t s ~ s
CABLE SHEAVES FOR COME ROOF TANKS
B , TANK HEATERS AND HEAT LOSSES
GENERAL
INTERNAL HEATERS
EXTERNAL HEATERS TANK MIXERS
PROPELLER TYPE
TANK 1 4 1 x 1 ~ ~ YOZZLES
THEUIAL C t O S i NG HANK VALVES
G E N E ~ A L
U S E S MA 1 NTENANCE
TYPES OF VALVES
VII, VAPOR RELIEF - FIXED ROOF - (JWSI
A , GENERAL
B , VEMTIYG CAPACITY At49 PRESSURES
OPEN VEHTS BREATHER VALYES EMERGENCY VENTS
VIII, ACCESS - (JRS)
A , LADDERS
B , STAIRS C, HANDRAILS
D , SPEC I A t NALKYAY %
I X , ORDERING DATA - (JWC)
A, GENERAL
B, TANK 8 APPURTENANCE SCHEDULE
C , REFERENCE DRAidIdGS
D, TANK SPECIFICATIBHS
E n PLANT REGULATIONS
F, OTHER DOCUIENTS
G , L I S T SHEETS
TANK LOCATIOM - (JAC)
A, CONSIDERATIONS
OPERATING REQUIRE~IENTS
TOPOGZAPHY
FIRE PRBTECTHON REQUI REPENTS
UTILIZATION OF PROPERTY
B , LOCAT I Of4 AdD SPAC I MG
GENERAL
DISTANCE FWO:4 ~ % ? O P E ~ T Y LINES AND PUBLIC
Ways
SHELL-TO-SWELL SPACING
SPACING FROM OPERATING FACILITIES
C , IMPOUNDING AND D R A I ~ A G E
DRAINAGE
TAMK YARD WALLS
DIKE ENCLOSURE CAPACITY
INTERMEDIATE CURBS OR DRAINAGE CHANNELS
TANK FOUNDATIONS - (JAC)
A , SCOPE
B, PURPOSE
C , INTRODUCTIOII
D. BACMGROUl\aT)
SOIL PROPERTIES
SETTLEMNT
EDGE SETTLEWENT
E, BES I Gi4 GUIDELINES
F, SITE COiiDITIO3IS
SOIL TYPE
SMALL TANKS
6, CORROSION
H, ENVIRONMENTAL RISK
I, APPURTE?iANCES
J, ADDITIONAL IMFORl4ATION
X I I , CONNECTING LINES (JAC)
A , PURPOSE AND SCOPE
B , REQU IZEFIEflTS FOR FLEXIBILITY
C, METHODS OF PROVIDING FLEXIBILITY
D , PIPING BENDS
E, VALVES AND FITTINGS
F, FLEXIBLE JOINTS
G, FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE
H, FLEXIBLE RUBBER HOSE
X I I I , TANK MAINTEMANCE - (MWM)
A, SCOPE
B , CLEAN I NG
GENERAL
ACCESS DOOR SHEETS AND ROOF ~ I N D O W S
@, SHELL
GENERAL
RERATING AND RETIRING STRESSES
FREQUENCY OF INSPECTI ON
INSPECTION OF SHELL
LAMINATED PLATE
REFERENCES
D, BOT'TOPIS
GENERAL
STRESSES
EVIDENCE OF FAILURE
INSPECTION AFTER CLEANING
SANPLES
SHELL TO BOTTOM CONNECTION
UPPER SURFACE CORROSION
REPAIR OF DEFECTS BY WELDING
NAJQR BOTTOM REPAIR HETHQBS
REFERENCES
FIBERGLASS WE INFORCED POLYESTER COATINGS
UNREINFORCED PLASTIC COATINGS
METAL-BEAR ING COAT I NGS
CONCRETE FILL
GEL^ MUD FILLS CATHODIC PROTECTION
ROOF
GENERAL
FOUIiDAY ION PAD
SETTLEHENT DUE TO CO~I!PRESSION
PROTECTIVE COATI iVGS
INTERNAL PROTECTION
USE OF GUWITE
?LAST 1 c COAT 1 MG AND PATCH 1 NG
REFERENCES PAINTING
REFERENCE H , APROMS ANII GUTTERS
GENERAL
X I V HOT TAPPING OF TAHKS IN SERVICE - (JAC) A, GENERAL B , SAFETY PRECAUTIBfiS
C, EQUIPMENT D 8 I NSPECTIOf4 E , STAHDARDS
F 8 PROCEDURE
SMALL COMNECTIONS UP TO 2 INCHES
PIPE CONNECTIONS OVER 2 INCHE S G , FIRE PROTECTION
XV DETERMINATION OF INSPECTION INTERVALS - (NWM)
A, SCOPE B , OBJECTIVE C , DEFINITIONS B , INSPECTIONS E, I MSPECTIBN INTERVAL F, OTHER FACTORS G, CORROSION H, CORRECTIVE WORK I , REPORTS
XVI , PRODUCTION TANKS - (JRS) A , I NTRODUCTION B, CODE AND STAPdDARDS
API STANDARES O S j A ~ E G U L A T I O M S
OTHER REGULATIONS C , DESI GM COiiSSDERATIOfiS
SCOPE GENERAL
COLD ~ I E W T H E R SERVICE W I N D STABILITY EARTHQUAKE STABILITY
I, TANK SELECTIOM
A, GENERAL
THE PURCHASE OF A TANK OR GROUP OF TANKS INVOLVES THREE
PRIMARY PHASES OF ENGINEERING WORM BEFORE A CONTRACT
COVERING F A 3 R I C A T I O N AND ERECTION CAN BE COMPLETED,
THESE PHASES ARE: SELECT THE TANK DIMENSIONS AND TYPE
OF ROOF APPROPRIATE FOR THE SERVICE CONDIT IONS AND
, LOCATION, DESIGN THE TANK, AND F I N A L L Y , SELECT THE
PROPER APPURTENANCES, THIS WORK I S NECESSARY FOR THE
PREPARATION OF THE TANK AND APPURTENANCE SCHEDULE
FORMS, EF-33CR FOR CONE-ROOF TANKS AND EF-33FW FOR
FLOATING-ROOF TANKS, WHICH ARE THE B A S I C DOCUMENTS FO2
DESCRIBING AND SPECIFYING A TANK, FULL SIZE
TRANSPARENC I ES OF EF-33CR AND EF-333 ARE AVAILABLE
FROM CORPOWATIOPI ENGINEERING,
THE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE PROVIDED I S D IRECTED
TOWARD V E R T I C A L ABOVE-GROUND WELDED S T E E L TANKS FOR
ATMOSPHERIC STORAGE S I N C E THEY REPRESENT THE MAJORITY
OF TANKS USED WITHIN THE COMPANY,
THE FOLLOWING BIANUALS OF THE CORPORATION ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT MUST BE CONSULTED I N SELECTING AND DESIGN I N S
TANKS :
IN ADDITION, THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PRACTICES OF THE
CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROVIDE USEFUL TOOLS ,. AND INFORMATION:
1, D-131-8 FIRE PROTECTION FOR LARGE TANKS 2, D-131-9 COHPUTEW PROGRAMS, WIND 1" AND WIND 2%
3 , D-131-10 COMPUTER PROGRAM, AP165" "4. D-131-15 COMPUTER PROGRAN, TANKE
B , BASIC DATA
THE NOMINAL CAPACITY IS THE TOTAL VOLUME TO THE TOP OF
THE SHELL EXPRESSED IN ROUND NUHBERS; THE GROSS
CAPACITY IS THE SAME VOLUME ACCURATE STATED, THE OPERATING CAPACITY IS USABLE VOLUME, THE DIFFERENCE REPRESENTS DEAD STORAGE WHICH IS UNAVAILABLE BECAUSE OF
LIMITATIONS ON BOTH THE MAXIMUM FILLING HEIGHT AND THE
MI N I MUM w I THDRAWAL LEVEL. UNAVAILABLE I NVENTORY SHOULD
HOLD TO A MIN IMUM AND SHOULD NOT BE OVERLOOKED I N
S I Z I N G A TANK,
ROST OPERATING ORGANIZATIONS HAVE STANDARDS WHIC51
S P E C I F Y THE SAFE F I L L I N G H E I G H T FOR NEW TANKS, AND
T H I S WILL F I X THE UNUSED STORAGE VOLUME AT THE TOP
OF THE TANK,
FOR CONE ROOF TANKS, T H I S STOWAGE WILL GENERALLY ,. 5:
BE 6" TO 12" OF SHELL HEIGHT,
FOR TANKS LOCATED IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES 3 AND 4,
CONSIDERATION SHOULD B E G I V E N TO INCREASING THE
UNUSED VOLUME A T THE TOP OF THE TANK TO ALLOW FOR
SLOSHING OF THE CONTENTS THAT MAY OCCUR DURING Afd
EARTHQUAKE I M ORDER TO A V O I D STOCK S P I L L A G E AND
DANAGE TO THE ROOF AND UPPER SHELL. GENERALLY, A
FREEBOARD OF 2 FEET W I L L B E S U F F I C I E N T , IN
CONSIDERING WHETHER TO PROVIDE T H I S FREEBOARD, THE
P R O B A B I L I T Y OF OCCURRENCE OF AN EARTHQUAKE W I T H A
F U L L TANK AND THE PROBABLE LOSS DUE TO SLOSHING I F
FREEBOARD I S NOT PROVIDED SHOULD BE WEIGHED
AGAINST THE VALUE OF THE UNUSED STORAGE C A P A C I T Y ,
IN THE FINAL DESIGNS EVERY REASONABLE AND ECONOMIC
CONSIDERATION SHOULD BE G I V E N TO MINI rUI IZ IMG T H I S
INVENTORY,
THE MINIMUM OPERATING LEVEL FOR A CONE ROOF TANK
MUST S A T I S F Y THE SUCTION REQUIREMENTS OF THE
L I Q U I D WITHDRAWAL PUMPS,
THERE ARE SITUATIONS IN NHICH SERVICE AND USE CONDITIONS.
BOTH PRESENT AND FUTURE8 WILL D I C T A T E TANK SELECTION RATHER
THAN THE L I Q U I D PROPERTIES AND REQUIRED C A P A C I T Y OF THE
F I R S T STOCK TO BE STBREE). MOST OFTEN THESE WILL RELATE TO
THE TYPE OF ROOF SELECTED, FOR EXAMPLE, STORAGE OF FINISHED
J E T FUEL MAY REQUIRE A CONE WOOF TANK EQUIPPED W I T H AM
I N T E R N A L F L O A T I N G ROOF I N ORDER TO M A I N T A I N PRODUCT
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S W I T H RESPECT 80 WATER CONTENT,
DATA ON THE FOLLOWING LIQUID PROPERTIES IS REQUIRED FOR BOTH
TANK SELECTION AND TANK DESIGN:
1, SPECIFIC GRAVITY
2, TRUE VAPOR PRESSURE, P S I A
3, CORROSIVITY
4, FLASHPOINT
KNOWLEDGE OF THE SITE CONDITIONS WILL BE REQUI~ED, THE
ALLOWABLE S O I L BEARING PRESSURE MAY BE THE CONTROLLING
FACTOR I N SELECTING THE TANK H E I G H T , SOME D I F F E R E N T I A L
SETTLEMENT BETWEEN THE TANK PERIPHERY AND THE CENTER OF THE
TANK CAN NORMALLY BE ACCOMMODATED, AND UNIFORM SETTLEMENT
OVER THE E N T I R E AREA I S SELDOM A PROBLEM EXCEPT I N THE
D E S I G N OF TANK L I N E S ,
IN S E I S M I C A L L Y A C T I V E AREAS, THE S I T E SHOULD B E I N V E S T I G A T E D
TO DETERMINE THE P O T E N T I A L FOR L I Q U E F A C T I O N DURING AM
EARTHQUAKE,
OTHER SITE CONDITIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT TANK DIMENSIONS
INCLUDE :
1, SPACE AVAILABLE MAY BE RESTRICTED REQUIRING HIGHER
TANKS THAN MIGHT OTHERWISE TO ECONOMICAL,
2, TOPOGRAPHY AND REQUIRED EARTHWORK MAY BE SUCH AS TO
L I M I T THE DIAMETER OF THE TANK AND CORRESPONDINGLY
INCREASE THE H E I G H T ,
3 , PREVAILING HEIGHT IN AN ESTABLISHED TANK AREA MAY LIMIT
D E V I A T I O N THEREFROM I N ORDER TO M A I N T A I N l l N I FORM ACCESS
BETWEEN TANKS, GENERAL APPEARANCE OF THE GROUP, OR FOR
OTHER REASONS,
THE FIRE PROTECTION MANUAL DEFINES COMPANY, INDUSTRY AND
GOVERNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS THAT w ILL AFFECT THE DETERHINAT ION
OF TANK D IMENSIONS AND THE S E L E C T I O N OF THE TYPE OF ROOF,
THESE INCLUDE :
1. SPACING OF TANKS AND MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM PROPERTY
L I N E S ,
2, THE TYPE OF ROOF REQUIRED FOR CERTAIN SERVICES, FOR
EXAMPLE, FLOATING ROOFS ARE REQUIRED ON TANKS OVER 120
FEET D IANETER THAT ARE USED FOR THE STORAGE OF ANY
STOCK HAVING A FLASH P O I N T LOWER THAN 100oF,
ASIDE FROM THE FIRE PROTECTION THE MAIN THRUST OF
GOVERNMENTAL REGULATIONS RELATED TO TANK SELECTION I S I N THE
AREA OF A I R QUALITY CONTROL,
FOR ANY GIVEN CAPACITY THERE WILL BE SEVERAL PRACTICAL
COMBINATIONS OF DIAMETER AND HEIGHT, SITE CONDITIONS
THAT MAY AFFECT TANK DIMENSIONS HAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY
DISCUSSED, OTHERS ARE : LAND VALUE, FOUNDATIONS COSTS
AND, TO A MINOR EXTENT, TANK P A I N T I N G COSTSm
MINIMIZING DEAD STORAGE FAVORS A SMALLER DIAMETER,
HIGHER TANK,
WITH FEW EXCEPTIONS, TANK HEIGHTS ARE MULTIPLES OF 6 OR
8 FEET, THE LATTER COURSE HEIGHT IS GENERALLY
PREFERRED BY TANK FABRICATORS SINCE I T REDUCES THE
NUMBER OF F I E L D CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELDS,
THE CAPACITY RANGE OF 25,000 TO lOO,OOO BBLS THE
ECONOMIC HEIGHT WILL GENERALLY BE 48 FEET, FOR LARGE
C A P A C I T Y TANKS, OVER 200,000 B B L S t THE ECONOMIC H E I G H T
WILL GENERALLY DROP TO 40 FEET, THIS IS DUE TO THE
EXCESSIVE COST OF P R O V I D I N G ADEQUATE ROOF SUPPORTS FOR
HIGHER TANKS,
THE. LIMITATION IN API-650 ON MAXIMUM SHELL THICKNESS
MAY ALSO L I M I T THE HEIGHT OF LARGE TANKS,
IN S E I S M I C A L L Y A C T I V E AREAS, EARTHQUAKE D E S I G N C R I T E R I A
MAY L I M I T TANKS TO HEIGHTS BELOW WHAT WOULD OTHERWISE
BE ECONOMIC, TANKS IN SEISMIC ZONE 4 WILL GENERALLY BE
LIMITED TO A HEIGHT TO DIAMETER RATIO OF ABOUT 0,5:1
FOR SMALL TANKS ON SOFT SOILS TO 0.6: 1 FOR LARGE TANKS
ON FIRM SOILS. FOR SMALL TAIVKS (UNDER ABOUT 3000 BBL,
CAPACITY) GREATER HEIGHT TO DIAMETER R A T I O S CAN B E USED
B Y ANCHOR I FIG THE T,1NK HOWEVER, ANCHOR I NG I S GENERALLY
NOT P R A C T I C A L FOR LARGER TANKS AND NOT RECOMMENDED
BECAUSE OF THE LARGE LOCAL LOADING IMPOSED ON THE TANK
S H E L L B Y THE ANCHORS,
D . ROOF SELECTIOPJ
THE TYPES OF ROOFS TO BE CONSIDERED AIIE: 1) CONE, 2)
FLOATING, 3 ) A CONE ROOF TANK WITH AN INTERNAL ROOF,
AND 4) COME ROOF TANKS WITH VAPOR RECOVERY SYSTEMS,
FLOATING ROOFS CAN BE FURTHER CLASSIFIED AS PAN,
PONTOONS, AND DOUBLE DECK,
CONE ROOF TANKS FILLING LOSSES PROPORTIONAL TO THE
THROUGHPUT AND BREATHING LOSSES ROUGHLY PROPORTIONAL TO
THE VOLUME OF THE VAPOR SPACE IN THE TANK. FLOATING
TANKS WITH A T I G H T - F I T T I N G PRIWAliY AND SECONDARY SEALS
V IRTUALLY E L I M I N A T E THESE EVAPORATION LOOSES,
FIRE PROTECTIONS IS NOT A BASIC CONSIDERATION IN THE
SELECTION OF A ROOF EXCEPT FOR TANKS OVER 120 FEET I N
DIAMETER, FOR THESE LARGE TANKS FLOATING ROOFS ARE
REQUIRED FOR ANY STOCK HAYING A FLASH LOWER THAN lOOOF
AND, FOR HEAVIER STOCKS STORED AT TEMPERATURES W I T H I N
2OoF OF THEIR FLASH POINT,
A MORE D E T A I L E D D I S C U S S I O N OF F I R E PROTECTIOiV
CONS I DERATIONS IS CONTAINED IN THE FIRE PROTECTION
MANUAL AND THE ENGINEERING DEPARTPENT'S DESIGN PRACTICE
D-131-8,
ALL CONE ROOF TANKS C O N T A I N I N G V O L A T I L E STOCKS CONTAIN
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES AT T I M E S I N A PORTION OF THE VAPQZ
. SPACE, EVERY PRECAUTION IS TAKEN IN DEALING WITH SUCY
STOCKS I N CONE ROOF TANKAGE, BUT FLOATING ROOFS ARE
SOMETIMES PUT ON SUCH TANKS AS A SAFETY PRECAUTION,
EVEN THOUGH THEY MAY NOT BE WARRANTED B Y EVAPORATION
SAVINGS
SHELL CORROSION IN THE VAPOR SPACE OF A CONE ROOF TANK
USED FOR STORAGE OF SOUR CRUDE O I L S AND OTHER STOCKS
H A V I N G S I M I L A R CHARACTERIST ICS CAN BE A SERIOUS
PROBLEM, THE USE OF A FLOATING ROOF WHICH ELIMINATES
MOST OF THE VAPOR SPACE SHOULD BE CONSIDERED I N THESE
CIRCUMSTANCES,
E, CONE ROOFS
A COME ROOF IS THE LEAST EXPENSIVE AND MOST
MAINTENANCE-FREE METHOD FOR COVERING A TANK, THEY DO HAVE A HIGH POTENTIAL FOR INCURRING EVAPORATION LOSSES.
THIS CHARACTERISTIC GENERALLY LIMITS THEIR USE TO
RELATIVELY LOW VAPOR PRESSURE STOCKS WHERE THE SAVI 3iG
IN EVAPORATION LOSS IS NOT ENOUGH TO JUSTIFY THE HIGHER
INVESTMENT OF A FLOATING WOOF,
CONE ROOFS CAN EASILY BE DESIGNED TO SUPPORT
ANTICIPATED SNOW AND ICE LOADINGS, THUS SNOW REHOVAL IS MOT THE OPERATING CONCERN THAT 16 COULD BE WITH A
FLOATING ROOF, ROOF SUPPORT IS PROVIDED BY INTERIaR
COLUMNS AND ROOF RAFTERS,
THE HIGH POTENTIAL FOR EVAPORATION LOSS FROM A CONE
ROOF DOES NOT NECESSARILY PRECLUDE THEIR USE WHERE A
GROUP OF TANKS IS INVOLVED, IT MAY BE MORE ECONOMICAL TO INTERCONNECT THE VAPOR SPACES TO A COMMON VAPOR
RECOVERY SYSTEM THAN TO PROVIDE SEPARATE FLOATING
ROOFS,
F , BOTTOM CONFIGURATION
DRAW I NG GB-12474 1, ATTACHED, SUMMARIZES BASIC
CONFIGURATIONS FO3 TANK BOTTOMS AND ARRANGEMENTS FQQ
PlPING AND DRAIN COMNECTIOMSm ADVANTAGES AND
DISADVANTAGES OF THE DIFFERENT DESIGNS ARE LISTED,
CHOICE OF DESIGN BEST SUITED FOR A PARTICULAR SERVICE
IS INFLUENCED BY: (1) OPERATING REQUIREHENTS FOR THE
PRODUCT TO BE STORED: ( 2 ) MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS:
AND (3 ) CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUPPORTING SOIL,
TANK MANUAL TANK SELECTON
I I , TANK DESIGN
A , GENERAL
ONCE THE DIHENSIOHS AMD TYPE OF ROOF HAVE BEEN SELECTED
FOR A TANK, THE ENGINEER HUST DESSGId AND/OR SPECIFY
VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE TANK I N ORDER TO CQHPLETE THE
"TANK DATA" PORTION QF FORMS EF-33CR OR EF-33FR, TANK
AND APPURTENANCE SCHEDULE, REFERENCE COPIES OF THESE
FORMS ARE I N SECTION I X OF T H I S MANUAL,
THE REQUI~EMENTS AND DETAILS COVERED BY API-050
REPRESENT MINIHUM STANDARDS, THERE ARE AREAS WHERE THE
CO:~PANY ' S EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL JUDGMENT 2EQUIRES
THAT A P I STANDARDS BE MODIF IED OR EXCEEDED, THESE
AREAS ARE SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN SPECIFICATION EG-
967 AND €6-968,
THE INFORMATIQN IN THIS SECTION AND THE FOLLOWING
SECTION ON TANK APPURTENANCES WILL PERMIT THE ENGINEER
TO SPECIFY THE TANK ON FORM EF-33CR on EF-33FR m I o n TO
REQUESTING QUOTATIONS,
B , API STANDARD 550
I S THE RECOGNIZED INDUSTZY STANDARD USED THROUGHOUT THE
COMPANY, A COPY OF THE LATEST E D I T I O N AND 'SUP?LE#ENT
I S MAINTAINED I N SECTION 300 OF THE TANK MANUAL,
C I A Q I MONOGRAM
THE A Q I MONOGRAM FOR API-650 AND API-628 TANKS WAS
WITHDRAWN WITH REVISION 2 OF THE SIXTH EDITION OF BOT#
STANDARDS, IT WAS REPLACED B Y A REQUIREMENT THAT THE
MANUFACTFJRER SUBMIT A C E R T I F I C A T I O N THAT THE TANK HAS
BEEN FURNISHED I N ACCORDANCE W I T H THE A P P L I C A S L E
STANDARD,
D , . SPECIFICATIONS EG-967 AND EG-968
SPECIFICATION EG-967 COVERS CONE ROOF TANKS DESIGNED
AND FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH API-650 AND HAS BEEN
PREPARED TO ALLOW THE ENSINEER OR FABRICATOR TO SELECT
THE D E S I G N B A S I S AND SHELL M A T E R I A L BASED UPON ECONOMIC
CONSIDERATIONS, IT HAS BEEN PREPARED TO CLEARLY D E F I N E
WHERE MINI MUPI COMPANY STANDARDS EXCEED API -650, MOST
OF THESE ADDED REQUIREMENTS PROVIDE FOR INCREASED
PROTECTION AGAINST B R I T T L E FRACTURE AND REQUIRE THE USE
OF HIGHER Q U A L I T Y M A T E R I A L S AND WELDING PROCEDURES AS
WELL AS MORE E X T E N S I V E RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION,
E, AVAILABLE COMPUTER PROGRAMS
THE FOLLOWING TIMESHARE COMPUTER PROGRAMS TO PERFORM
VARIOUS DESIGN CALCULATIONS ARE A V A I L A B L E TH40UGY ?YE
CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT,
API-65 - A COHPUTER PROGRAM FOR CALCULATING SHELL
THICKNESS SEQUIRED FOR HYDROSTATIC LOADS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH API-658 REQUIREMENTS, DESIGN PRACTICE D-131-18,
WIND1 AND WIND2 - THESE ARE TWO COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR DETERMINING THE RESISTANCE OF STORAGE TANKS TO BUCKLING
FOR WIND LOADING, DESIGN PRACTICE D-131-9,
BOTH PROGRAMS USE THE CRITERIA OF API-650, SECTION 3,gc FOR CHECKING TANK SHELL FOR STABILITY AGAINST WIND
LOADING. DESIGN PRACTICE D-831-9,
THE PROGRAM WIND1 DETERMINES THE MAXIP~UM WIND VELOCITY AN UNSTIFFEMED TANK CAN WITHSTAND WITHOUT BUCKLING AS
THE SHELL THICKNESS IS REDUCED BY CORROSION1
THE PROGRAM WIND2 ALSO DETERMINES THE MAXIMUM WIMa
VELOCITY AN UNSTIFFENED TANK CAN WITHSTAND WITHOUT
BUCKLING, IF THE CALCULATED VALUE IS BELOW THE DESIGN WIND VELOCITY THE SHELL THICKNESS IS INCREASED SO IT
CAN WITHSTAND THE DESIGN WIND VELOCITY,
TANKE - A COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CHECK I NG NON-ANCHORED
TANKS FOR SEISMIC LOADING COMPLIANCE WITH API-650
APPENDIX E, DESIGN PRACTICE D-831-15,
F, BASIC DATA
THE DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE IS THE LOWEST ONE-DAY MEAN
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE I N THE L O C A L I T Y WHERE THE TANK I S
TO BE INSTALLED, PLUS 15F, DESIGN METAL TE~YPERATURES
USED AS MAJOR COMPANY INSTALLATIONS ARE TABULATED OH
FIGURE 1 OF T H I S SECTION, THE LOWEST ONE-DAY MEAR
TEMPERATURE FOR OTHER LOCATIONS IN THE UNITED STATES
AND SOUTHERN CANADA CAN BE OBTAINED FROM FIGURE 2-1 IN
AP 1-658,
THE DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE IS AN IWPORTAMT FACTOR IN
THE S P E C I F I C A T I O N OF M A T E R I A L , DRAW I NG GD-D1047,
STANDARD MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS CONSTRUCTED TO
~ P E C I F I C A T ~ ~ N NO, EG-967, D E F I N E S ~ O M P A N Y REQUIREMENTS
I N T H I S REGARD,
THE MAXIMUM FILLING AND EMPTYING RATES MUST BE
SPECIFIED, FOR COME ROOF TANKS THESE RATES WILL
DETERMINE THE NUMBER AND S I Z E OF BREATHER VALVES,
THE DESIGN WIND VELOCITY USED AT MAJOR COHPANY
INSTALLATIONS IS TABULATED ON FIGURE 1 OF THIS SECTION,
FOR OTHER LOCATIOHS THE USE OF A DESIGN WIND VELOCITY
EQUAL TO THE ANNUAL EXTREME M I L E VELOCITY AT 30 FEET
ABOVE GROUND, 50-YEAR MEAN RECURRENCE INTERVAL 4 S
RECOMMENDED UNDER MOST CIRCUMSTANCES,
CHARTS OF FIGURE 2 SHOW THE 50-YEAR AND 108-YEAR ANNUAL
EXTREME MILE VELOCITIES FOR THE UNITED STATES,
THE APPROPRIATE EARTHQUAKE ZONE FOR SEISMIC DESIGN OF
TANKS SHOULD BE DETERMINED FOR THE S P E C I F I C TANK
LOCATION, THE SEISMIC ZONE MAPS INCLUDED IN APPENDIX E
OF API-658 SHOW EARTHQUAKE ZONE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE
UNITED STATES, ALSO, SEE APPENDIX V I OF RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE NO. 11. THE ZONE DESIGNATION APPLICABLE AT
MAJOR COMPANY INSTALLATIONS IS TABULATED ON FIG, 1 OF
THIS SECTION,
THE BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE LIVE LOAD ON THE ROOF
I S 25 PSF, IN ADDITION, PROVISIONS MUST BE MADE FO2
OTHER LOADS THAT MAY BE IMPOSED ON THE ROOF,
G , OVERALL DESIGN CONSIDERATION
C O ~ R O S I O N ALLOWANCE
THE CORROSION ALLOWANCE USED FOR NEW TANKAGE SHOULD BE
BASED ON THE SERVICE AND LOCATION FOR WHICH THE TANKAGE
IS BEING BUILT, REFERENCE SHOULD ALSO BE MADE TO THE
CORROSION PREVENTION MANUAL, TANKAGE # SECTION 240, FOR
A C O M P I L A T I O N AND D I S C U S S I O N OF CORROSION RATE DATA FOR
- TANKAGE I N T Y P I C A L SERVICES, IF ADDITIOIVAL GUIDANCE I S
REQUIRED, THE CORPORATION ENGINEERING'S MATERIALS
DIVISION SHOULD BE CONSULTED,
DESIGN OF TANKAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH API-650 PROVIDES
FOR MOST SERVICES A B U I L T - I N , OR INHERENT, CORROSION
ALLOWANCE, VALUES FOR TYPICAL TANKS ARE PRESENTED IN
FIGURES 3 AND 4 ,
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 20 DEFINES THE MATERIAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR PREVENTING BRITTLE FRACTURE IN COMPANY
DESIGNS, IT ALSO INCLUDES A SUMMARY OF BASIC FRACTURE
MECHANICS AND SUGGESTS TECHNIQUES B Y WHICH FRACTURE-
SAFE DESIGNS CAN BE DEVELOPED,
GENERALLY, THE HISTORY OF API TANKS HAS BEEN e o o D
CONCERNING PROTECTION AGAINST B R I T T L E FRACTURE,
HOWEVER, I N 1954. AN API COHMITTEE COMPLETED A SURVEY
WHICH RECORDED 28 WELDED API 12C (PREDECESSOR TO API -
650) TANK FAILURES WHICH OCCURRED UNDER COLD WINTER
CONDIT IONS, AS A RESULT OF T H I S A P I SURVEY AND OTHER
MORE FUNDAHENTAL I N V E S T I G A T I O N S OF B R I T T L E FRACTURE,
MINIMUM COMPANY STANDARDS EXCEEDING A P I STANDARDS IN
THIS AREA WERE ADOPTED IN 1955,
SPECIFICATION EG-967 INCLUDES PROVI s IONS TO PROVIDE
APPROXIMATELY EQUAL PROTECTION AGAINST B R I T T L E F A I L U R E
FOR A L L TANKS, W I T H CONSIDERATION G I V E N TO MATERIAL,
D E S I G N B A S I S AND R I S K INHERENT I N PROBABLE TANK S I Z E ,
MATERIALS HAVE BEEN SORTEQ INTO QUALITY GROUPINGS ON
DRAWING GD-Dl047 (REFER TO SEC, 1x1.
FOR MANY DESIGNS, IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO PURCHASE
HIGHER Q U A L I T Y M A T E R I A L S OW TO Q U A L I F Y LOWER Q U A L I T Y
MATERIALS BY IMPACT TESTING, APPROXIMATE COSTS OF TANK
STEELS ARE PRESENTED IN FIGURES 5 AND 6.
IT IS CONCLUDED THAT GROUPS I V . IVA, V AND V I STEEL
SHOULD GENERALLY NOT BE USED FOR THE INTERMEDIATE
STORAGE OF SOUR F L U I D S SIlVCE THERE I S L I T T L E ECONBWIC
I N C E N T I V E TO DO SO, AND BECAUSE A R I S K OF S U L F I D E
CRACKING E X I S T S I N SOME SERVICESw
H , BOTTOM DESIGN
REFER TO DRAWING GD-Dl047 FOR ACCEPTABLE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE BOTTOM PLATES ASTM A-283 GRADE C
I S THE MOST COMMONLY USED M A T E R I A L ,
ANNULAR BOTTOM PLATES AND SKETCH PLATES
TANK BOTTOMS ARE FABRICATED OF I/~-INCH PLATE EXCEPT
WHEN THE BOTTOM SHELL COURSE IS GROUPS IV, IVA, V OR V I
MATERIAL, T H E S E T A N K BOTTOMS ARE REQUIRED TO HAVE A
BUTT-WELDED OUTER C I R C L E OF PLATES TO WHICH THE SHELL
IS ATTACHED (ANNULAR BOTTOM PLATES),
TO PROVIDE EARTHQUAKE S T A B I L I T Y UNDER THE DESIGW
PROVISIONS OF APPENDIX E, TANKS SMALLEQ THAN 100,000
BARRELS MAY REQUIRE ANNULAR BOTTOM PLATES AND THE
ANNULAR PLATES FOR LARGER TANKS MAY NEED TO BE T H I C K E 9
THAN REQUIRED OTHERWISE,
THE BOTTOM PLATE WHICH COVERS THE CATCH BASIS AND TO
WHICH THE WATER DRAW-OFF NOZZLE I S ATTACHED I S CALLED A
SKETCH PLATE, SPECIFICATION EG-967 REQUIRES THAT THIS
PLATE HAVE A MINIPIUM THICKNESS OF 1/2 INCH,
TANK BOTTOC~S CAN TOLERATE APPRECIABLE SETTLEMENT, AN
A N A L Y S I S OF MAXIMUM P E R M I S S I B L E TANK BOTTOM SETTLEMENT
IS INCLUDED IN SECTION X I , FOUNDATIONS,
THE USE OF CATHODIC PROTECTION MAY BE CONSIDERED.
REFER TO SECTION X I FOUNDATIONS,
I, SHELL DESIGN
IN THE ~ T H EDITION OF API-650 APPENDICES D, G , AND PART
OF K, OF THE ~ T H EDITION OF API-650, HAVE BEEN DELETED
AND T H E I R A P P L I C A B L E REQUIREMENTS ARE INCORPORATED I N T O
THE B A S I C STANDARD, THE B A S I C TANK OF THE ~ T H EDITION
OF AP I 650 IS NOW COVERED BY APPENDIX A, THE BASIC
DESIGN NOW PERMITS A DESIGN BASED ON PRODUCT S P E C I F I C
GRAVITY AND A HIGHER STRESS DURING THE HYDROTEST. THE
APPENDIX A DESIGN USES A MAXIMUM STRESS OF 21,000 PSI,
A J O I N T E F F I C I E N C Y OF ,85, A S P E C I F I C GRAVITY OF NOT
L E S S THAN 1.0, AND THE ONE FOOT THICKNESS METHOD. IN
OTHER WORDS, HYDROSTATIC STRESSES CANNOT EXCEED DESSGlhd
STRESSES,
THE GOAL IN DESIGNING THE TANK SHELL IS TO ACHIEVE THE
LOWEST ERECTED COST. THIS IS NOT ALWAYS ACHIEVED BY
M I N I M I Z I N G THE TONNAGE OF S T E E L REQUIRED S I N C E THE
. HIGHER QUALITY STEELS COMMAND A PREMIUM PRICE, THE
FOLLOWING GUIDELINES ARE BASED ON EXPERIENCE AS OF 1975
AND MAY NOT BE V A L I D FOR A L L S I T U A T I O N S ,
1, TANKS OF L E S S THAN ~ ~ , ~ ~ ~ - B A R w E L C A P A C I T Y WILE-
GENERALLY BY APPENDIX A DESIGN, WAXIMUM PLATE
THICKNESS ALLOWED IN APPENDIX A IS 1/2 INCH WHICH
L I M I T S THE MAXIMUM S I Z E TO ABOUT 30,000 BARRELS,
2, TANKS FROM 30,000 BARRELS TO 150,000 C A P A C I T Y WILL
GENERALLY BE CONSTRUCTED W I T H M A T E R I A L W I T H AN
ALLOWABLE STRESS LESS THAN 21,000 PSI. (FORMERLY
APPENDIX D DESIGN),
3, HIGHER STRENGTH MATERIAL GROUPS IV, Iva, v AND VI
WILL GENERALLY RE USED ON THE LOWER COURSES OF
TANKS OF 2000000 BARRELS OW MORE C A P A C I T Y ,
(FORMERLY APPENDIX G DESIGN),
4, THE HIGHER STRENGTH STEELS WILL ALMOST NEVER BE
USED ON A L L COURSES OF THE TANK,
5, THE THICKNESS OF "VARIABLE DESIGN POINT ~ E T H O D "
WILL GENERALLY BE USED ON TANKS OF lOO,OOO BARRELS
OR MORE C A P A C I T Y , (FORMERLY APPENDIX K DES 1 ~ ~ 4 )
COMPUTER PROGRAM API-65 IS AVAILABLE TO CHECK
S H E L L THICKNESSES QUOTED B Y SUPPLIERS.
TANK SHELLS MAY BE SUBJECT TO BUCKLING UNDER WIND
PRESSURE, APH-650 SECTION 3.9 PROVIDES A FORMULA FOR
DETERMINING THE MAXIMUM H E I G H T OF UNSTIFFENED S H E L L FOR
A WIND VELOCITY OF 1QQ MPH,
BACKGROUND ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF API-658 REQUIREMENTS
MAY BE FOUND IN A PAPER, "STABILITY OF API-650 TANK
SHELLS, R , V. MCGRATH: PROCEEDI~GS OF THE A P I DIVISION
OF REFINING, VOL. 43 (111) (1963). COMPUTER PROGRAMS
WIND1 AND WIND2 ARE AVAILABLE TO PERFORM THESE
CALCULATIONS,
TANKS WAS MADE BY CORPORATION ENGINEERING TO
EVALUATE TANK DESIGNS FOR WIND S T A B I L I T Y ,
GENERALIZED COWCLUSIOMS OF THIS STUDY WERE:
A , THE API-658 EQUATIONS APPEAR TO PROVIDE AN
APPROPRIATE B A S I S FOR WIND RESISTANCE
PROVIDED THAT THE "TRANSPOSED w I D T H ~ METHOD
I S USED,
B, USE OF A DESIGN WIND VELOCITY EQUAL TO THE
ANNUAL EXTREME-MILE VELOCITY A T 30 FT , ABOVE
GROUND) 50-YEAR MEAN RECUISRENCE I N T E R V A L I S
RECOMMENDED UNDER MOST CIRCUMSTANCES,
C8 AS EXPECTED) TANKS F I L L E D TO A SUBSTANTIAL
LEVEL (AT LEAST HALF FULL) DEMONSTRATED A
S I G N I F I C A N T INCREASE I N WIND RESISTANCE
COHPARED TO TANKS F I L L E D TO LOWER LEVELS,
GENERALLY A SIGNIFICANT INCREASE IN WIND
RESISTANCE W I L L NOT BE OBTAINED U N T I L THE
LIQUID LEVEL REACHES ABOUT HALF HEIGHT,
OTHER FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED IN DESIGN FOR WIND
RESISTANCE OF TANKS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
A , 11'4 GENERAL* B U C K L I N G DUE TO WIND RESULTS I N
DAMAGE TO THE TANK THAT CAN VARY FROM VERY
MODEST TO DAMAGE REQUIRING EXTENS %VE
R E B U I L D I N G O R t RARELY* SCRAPPING,
£3, HOW TO HANDLE CORROSION ALLOWANCE I S A
D I F F E R E N T QUESTION S I N C E :
1) THE CORROSION RATE THAT WILL ACTUALLY
OCCUR I S D I F F I C U L T TO PREDICT AND I T
WOULD BE UNDESIRABLE TO FURTHER INCREASE
THE I N I T I A L COST BY REQUIRING DESIGN FOR
F U L L WIND RESISTANCE I N THE CORRODED
C O N D I T I O N ,
2 ) NON-UNIFORM CORROSION SUCH AS LOCAL
P I T T I N G WILL NOT APPRECIABLY REDUCE THE
WIND RESISTANCE STRENGTH OF SHELLS,
3 ) THE API RULES FOR WIND RESISTANCE APPEAR
TO PROVIDE SOME MARGIN OF SAFETY ABOVE
THE D E S I G N WIND V E L O C I T Y WHICH MAY
P A R T I A L L Y COMPENSATE FOR LOSS OF METAL
DUE TO CORROSION,
4) ALTHOUGH AT A HIGHER COST, WIND GIRDERS
CAN BE ADDED I N THE FUTURE WHEN T H E I R
NEED I S KNOWN FROM THICKNESS SURVEYS,
IN SUMMARY, THE FOLLOWING PRACTICES ARE
RECOMHENDED AS A M I N I M U M I N CONSIDERING WIND
S T A B I L I T Y OF TANKS,
A , NEWTANKS
2 ) CHECK MAXIMUM DESIGN WIND VELOCITY IN
THE CORRODED C O N D I T I O N ,
3 ) CORROSION ALLOWANCE CONSIDERED IN
ACCORDANCE w I TH "OTHER RELATED FACTORS"
SECTION ABOVE,
4 ) USE 50-YEAR EXTREME M I L E WIND V E L O C I T Y
EXCEPT WHERE B U C K L I N G OF A TANK WOULD
RESULT I N A C R I T I C A L LOSS SUCH AS
SHUTTING DOWN A REFINERY OR P I P E L I N E I N
WHICH CASE USE OF THE 100-YEAR WIND
SHOULD BE CONSIDERED,
5 ) USE "TRANSPOSED WIDTH" METHOD FOR
CALCULATING TANK SHELL STABILITY,
1) ESTABLISH WIND RESISTANCE CRITERIA AS A
PART OF TANK INSPECTION RECORDS,
2 ) ESTABLISH OPERATING PROCEDURES TO BE . .
FOLLOWED UPON RECEIPT OF WARNINGS OF
HIGH (HURRICANE VELOCITY) WINDS, WHICH
SHOULD INCLUDE:
A) CONSIDERATION OF FILLING OF TANKS
IN CRITICAL SERVICE AND TANKS WITH
LOW SHELL STABILITY,
B) SECURING OF MATERIAL WHICH COULD
BECOME AIRBORNE,
C) TURNING OFF UNESSENTIAL POWER TO
TANKFIELD LIGHTING, TANK MIXERS AND
SIMILAR EQUI PMENT TO REDUCE
POTENTIAL SOURCES OF IGNITION IN
CASE OF LEAKAGE FROM BUCKLED OR
SPLIT TANK SHELLS,
EXPERIENCE IN PAST EARTHQUAKES HAS SHOWN THAT
STORAGE TANKS ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO LOWER COURSE
SHELL BUCKLING AND, I N RARE OCCASIONS, TO BUCKLING
IN THE UPPER COURSES, NEW TANKS SHALL BE DESIGNEE
FOR EA9THQUAKE GROUND MOTION I N ACCORDANCE WITH
APPENDIX E OF API-650 AND THE SUPPLEMENTAL
PROVI s I ONS OF RECOMMENDED PRACTICE NO, 11,
IT I S GENERALLY NOT INTENDED TO UPGRADE E X I S T I N G
TANKS TO MEET THE CRITERIA FOR NEW TANKS, FOR SOME TANKS I N EXTREMELY C R I T I C A L SERVICE, I T MAY
BE J U S T I F I E D TO REDUCE THE R I S K OF EARTHQUAKE
DAMAGE (SEE RP-111,
SEE APPENDIX E OF API-650 AND SECTION X I 1
CONNECTING LINES, FOR REQUIREMENTS OF FLEXIBILITY
I N TANK L I N E S AND DETAILS OF TANK VALVES AND
F I T T I N G S ,
TANK ROOF SUPPORTS COLUMNS IN SE I SMICALLY ACTIVE AREAS PREFERABLY SHOULD BE CONSTRUCTED OF PIPE AND
SHOULD BE DESIGNED FOR EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION IN
ACCORDANCE WITH APPENDIX VI OF RP-11,
THERE ARE OTHER KINDS OF DAMAGE TO TANK DETAILS
WHICH HAVE BEEN SUSTAINED IN PAST EARTHQUAKES,
MODIFICATIONS IN DETAILS TO AVOID THESE RISKS
EITHER INTERFERE WITH NORMAL OPERATHHG TANK
FUNCTIO#S OR ARE MORE CCISTLY THAN REPAIRING OF
CONVENTIONAL DETAILS,
J, CONE ROOF DESIGN
ROOF PLATES ARE NORMALLY 3/16 INCH, REFER TO ORAWING GD-Dl047 FOR ACCEPTABLE MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ASTM
CONE ROOF TANKS WHICH DO NOT HAVE A ROOF-TO-SHELL.
CONNECTION THAT FAILS PREFERENTIALLY TO THE SHELL-TO-
SHELL AND SHELL-TO-BOTTOM CONNECTIONS SHALL BE EQUIPFEE
WITH ADEQUATE EMERGENCY VENTING, (REFER TO SECT ION
VII),
K , MISCELLANEOUS
PREPRIMING OF THE STEEL PLATES IN THE FABRICATOR'S SHOP PRIOR TO SHIPMENT TO THE JOB SITE IS RECOMMENDED,
APPLICATION OF THE FINISH PAINT COATS IS GENERALLY DONE
BY A CONTRACTOR OTHER THAN THE TANK FABRICATOR AFTER
THE TANK IS TESTED AND PUT IN SERVICE,
TANK MANUAL T.4NK 9ESIGN
FIGURE 1
TYPICAL TANK DESIGN CRITERIA FOR VARIOUS COMPANY LOCATIONS
Design Metal Design Wind Temperature Velocity
F (MPH)
* Richmond
El Segundo
Pascaqou la
P e n h Amboy
Salt Lake 5
Alaska (Kemi Area) - 25
Burnaby (Vancouver) 25
Baltimore 10
Seismic Zane Desig narion
Note: This da t a for other localities can frequently be ascertained by referring to t he Basic Design Data Sheets fo r the particular project.
TANK MANUAL TANK DESIGN
EXTREME WIND VELOCITIES
Charts from lVew Disnibulion of Exrrerne Winds in the U.S. by H.C.S. Thorn. Copyright Arnencan Society of Civil Engineers 1968. Reproduced by special permiss~on.
4/8 1 100- 17
F I G U R E 3 APPENDIX A T.WiS
INHERENT CORROSION ALLCJWANCX
CALCULATIONS DEC. 1 9 7 0
/ OOL'O OSL'O OOp'O 058'0 006'0 OS6'0=3( i iiiZ'0 6ZZ.0 612.0 602' 0 OOZ'O 061'0 I SLE'O 1 680'0 890'0 LtrO'O 920'0 500'0 000'0 / LEL-0 trOL'0 ZLO'O OilO' 0 800'0 000'0 1 tr8L'O LilL'O 860'0 ilSO'0 110'0 000'0 / LEZ.0 LLL'O EZL'O 890'0 trl0'0 000'0 ' 6LZ'O ELZ'O Rill'O ERO'O LLO'O 000'0
r EZZ-0 ' ELZ'O ZOZ'O L6L'O 081'0 691'0 660.0 9LO'O 250'0 6ZO'O 900'0 000'0 ZS!'O 911.0 080'0 SilO'O 600'0 000'0
1 nOZ-0 9SL'O 8OL.O 090'0 ELO'O 000'0 / LSZ'O L6L'O 9EL.O 9LO-0 910'0 000'0 j OLE-0 LEZ'O tr9L'O 260'0 610'0 000'0 i E9E.O 8LZ'O 261'0 LOL'O 220'0 000'0
1 ~ii:-o 28~~0 ELL'o 591-0 951'0 Lill-o 1 6L0'0 190.0 ZilO'O EZO- 0 SOO'O 000'0 I LZL'O E6O'O t90'0 9E0'0 LOO'O 000'0 I hgL-o szL-o LBO-o etro' o 010-o 000'0 1 902'0 LSL'O 601'0 190'0 ELO"0 000'0
BilZ.0 061'0 Zil'O ELO'O SLO'O 000'0 I 062'0 ZZZ'O trSL '0 980'0 810'0 000'0
8 9 L trZ ZE Oil 8tl 95
SLE'O ilZil'0 OS9'0 9LB.O 201 ' L BZE' o trSS ' L
j OOL-0 CSL-o 00s-o ose-o 006-o os6'0=3i I 902-o 86~*0 L~L-o EBL-o 9~1.0 ~9~~0 i
ZLE'O 6EE'O OZS'O LOL'O 288 ' 0 E90' L EtrZ' L
OSZ OSZ 0s Z 0 SZ OSZ OSZ OSZ
8 9 L ttz ZE Oil Bh 9s
L 9 S il E 2 L
SZZ S zz szz SZZ SZZ SZZ szz
ZLE'O SSil' 0
ZilO'O 600'0 000'0 €19'0 081'0 960' 0 ESO'O 110'0 000'0 ZL'O LLZ'O OE6'0
880' 1 1 ooi- 0 OSL-o ooe-o
202' 0 561'0 681'0 ZLE'O SLO'O 190'0 LtrO'O ZLE'O LZO' 0 900"O 000'0 06E ' 0 9E0.0 800'0 000'0 925'0 9ilO'O 600'0 000'0 199'0 SSO'O 110'0 000'0 L6L'O
€66'0
@;!'C QE.'C 521°C 51 .'O EOL'O L60'0 2LC.C g! SZL 5 Z.2" C
7 7- LL- C ZL?.C ZLS'C 2cZ.U 60Z'C 1 ZiE'G E I 521 5 I 1 1
91 bZ ZE Oil 8il 95
8 9 ttZ ZE Otl 8il 95
5
il E
nlr esc.0 O~C'G ZZC' C SO0"C 000'0 , >&L*C
ZOL'O 8L0'0 trS0'0 OEO'O 900'0 000'0 1 6SL.O 860'0 P9O'O 8E0-0 800'0 000'0 LSS'O
SLL SL L SLL SL L SLL SL L
05 1 051 0s L OSL 05 1 0s L 05 L
9 S il E 2 L
L 9 S tl E 2 L
t CS!'0 6L!'O 280'0 9ilO'O 600'0 000'0 tr99'0 I !g:O 6E:o 96c.c trS0' 0 LLC'O 000'0 00, - C OSL'O OOF'C 0SF.C 006'C 056'C=f 1 OS:C os:'o 0s~"~ O;L'C OSI'O OSL'O 1 osa-o 0Z!'G . LO!-@ 26C.0 ~80-o +,LO-o I osz-o
1 lgc-o gtrG.0 Zic.0 BLC-o i70c.o OOO'O 092" o ZBC'C E9C'G itrC'0 trZC' C SOG'O 000"O 051.0 E3. '0 6LC.C' SSC"C OED-c 90C'C 000'0 j Li7ti.C
i7Z , SZL ZE Oil
SZ L SZ L
8i7 95
I
8 I 00: I L 91 I OOL I s tlz IOOL ZE 1 001 Oti 00 L
I 001 ?ZLaC S6C'@ yC'C LEC'C 80C'O OOC'G 1 LES'O i 8h
c il E I
Sc. 'C LC LLC'G EtiCa c 60C'Cl 000'0 1 ZF'O 95 1 001 I 1 I
I I
CL--C OL'C OOE'G PSF'L oot-c oS~'G=~ 66JLIXs7U 345~~~ 2aa, I (XUP, - qz 91) 1 16230JPXk I j JaaneTt asJncg
TANK MANUAL TANK DESISN
FIGURE 5
A U,S. P r o d u c e s r s 2an. 7975 P r i c e s f o r St.?el P l a t e s by Q u a l i t y G r ~ u p i n q
Rimmed
Semi-Kill &
FuUy-Ki l l ed , FGP
Normalized
AS%M S p e c i f i c a t i o n
* AM-DH ** AES-EH
Thickness Cos t , $ / t o n (Note 1 ) j
43/4" 1-1/2" Max
1/2" i%x 1-1/2" Max
3/4" t o 1-1/2" 1 'I Fax
i ~ n
1-l/ZR Max 4 1
1-1/ZW Max
0 Pressure vessel quality s t eeL Normany not used for tankage excep t where required f o r toughness.
* k g e n e r a l , b , e r e b ~ t l e n e e d f o r u s e o f Amerriran BuseauofSh ipp inqStee l s . They are not readily aMilable in t h e U.S. ** Price includes mandatory i m p a c t testing to C v = 50 R-lb a t 14F.
1. Except as noted below, these costa are base pr5ces. They do not include many e m s , such as odd thickness, tonnage, e tc .
2, C osts do include an ex t ra f o r width and thickness of 1 d/ #. Actual ex t ra varies fYu m 0.55d to 2,70d/#.
Comparison of U.S. and Japanese S t e e l P r i c e s
r U.S. - $ / t o n Japanese - S / ton 1
S t e e l Base P r i c e Semi-Killed P l a t e F i n e g r a i n p r a c t i c e , f u l l y k i l l e d 271. Norna l i zed , impact t e s t on h e a t l o s t b a s i s 336 Normalized, Three impact t e s t s p e r p l a t e 35 1
225. ~ 237. i I
247. 257.
(Note 4 )
3 . Normalizing c o s t s vary wi th th . ickness . 4 . By s p e c i a l r e q u e s t . 1
TANK MANUAL ?.WK 3ESISN
Cost of Impact Tes t i ng ($ /Tes t )
I I I
I. Heat l o t b a s i s - (If a v a i l a b l e - s e e Note 1 )
S t r u c t u s a l S t e e l s Temperature t o be agreed upon
II. Pla te -as - ro l led b a s i s 2
Longi tud ina l Transverse 30 th j
i S t r u c t u r a l S t e e l s
Tes t +40 F o r above Test below +40 F
/ Pressure Vessel S t e e l s
Test +40 F o r above Tes t below +40 F
NOTE 1: It appears t h a t obtaining guaranteed impacts on e i ther a heat l o t basis cr f o r steels which are not heat t reated is diffScult o r i m p k b l e in t he U .S.
Discusdons with two U.S. steel suppliem indicates they w i l l conduct guaranteed impact tests only on hea t t reated material3 and only on a plate-s- rolled basis. On individual cases they may conduct tes ts on non-heat tma t ed ,
plate, cr on a heat Pot basis, f o r information only. I NOTE 2: Costs do not include an extra f a - normallzing. When normalizing is not I
included in the applicable materiala specification an additional $35 per %n must be added to t he above costs. , I
I
I I I , SELECT1 ON OF APPURTENANCES
A , INTRODUCTION
THIS SECTION HAS BEEN D I V I D E D INTO THE FOLLOW5NG
CATEGORIES OF APPURTENANCES:
B, GAGING AND SAMPLING DEVICES
B , FORMS EF-33 CR 8 EF-33 FR
THESE FORMS, WHICH ARE INCLUDED I N SECTION V I , CONTAINS
A LIST OF ALL COMMONLY USED TANK APPURTENANCES. THEY
SERVE BOTH AS A CHECK L I S T WHEN SELECTING APPURTENANCES
AND AS A SCHEDULE BY WHICH THESE APPURTENANCES CAN BE
S P E C I F I E D I N A TANK PURCHASE CONTACT,
C , COMPANY DRAWINGS
ALTHOUGH THE DISCUSSION OF APPURTENANCES WILL COVER ALL
COHMONLY USED APPURTENANCES FOR TANKS, DRAWINGS ARE
INCLUDED ONLY FOR APPURTENANCES NHICH HAVE BEEN
DEVELOPED BY CORPORATE DEPARTMENTS AND OPERATIPIG
COMPANIES AS A RESULT OF NOT HAVING SUITABLE API OR
MANUFACTURER' s STANDARDS A V W ILABLE, THESE DRAW 1 NGS
AUGWENT API OR MANUFACTURER'S STANDARDS TO SUIT
PART1 CULAR REQUIi?EMENTS,
D, APH STANDARDS
THE API HAS STANDARDS FOR APPURTENANCES IN SECTION 3 OF
SHELL MANHOLES (3,7,5>
SWELL NOZZLES AND FLANGES (3,7,6>
FLUSH TYPE CLEANOUT FITTINGS (3,7.7>
FLUSH TYPE SHELL CONNECTIONS (3,7,8>
ROOF MANHOLES (3,8,4>
ROOF NOZZLES (FLANGED AND SCREWED), THE FLANGE3
ROOF NOZZLE I S NOT SATISFACTORY FOR VENTING
(3,8,5>
DRAW-OFF SUMP ( 3 a 8 6
SCAFFOLD CABLE SUPPORT (3,8,7>
UNDER-BOTTOM CONNECTIONS (APPENDIX 0-CONTAINS
RECOMHENDED PRACTICES ONLY, )
E , MNUFACTURERS ' STANDARDS
MANUFACTURERS HAVE DEVELOPED AP$UETENANCES I N CERTAIN
CATEGORIES THAT AXE ACCEPTED AS " S T W M D A R D S ~ BY THE
INDUSTRY. EXAHPLES OF THESE APPURTENANCES ARE GAGING
DEVICES (GAGE HATCHES OF VARIOUS TYPES, AUTOF~ATIC
GAGING), B E A T H E R VALVES, AND FLOATING ROOFS AND
F I T T I N G S #
F , ECONOMY I N SELECTION
THREE GOOD RULES FQR ECONOMY IN THE SELECTION OF
APPURTENANCES ARE:
A , USE AN APPURTENANCE ONLY IF THERE IS A KNOWN
REQUIREMENT,
B , DOUBLE UP OW THE USE OF AN APPURTENANCE WHEZEVER
POSSIBLE ( I a E . , A ROOF MANHOLE MAY ALSO SERVE AS A
GAGE INSPECTION HATCH OR AM EMERGENCY VENT HATCH) I
C , SPECIFY HANUFACTURER'S S T A N D A ~ D DESIGN, WHEREVER
USABLE, RATHEi? THAN OUR OWN DESIGN,
A I 6 I C I D I - E C O N S T R U C T I O N N O T E S
1-7" 3'-0'1 a ' . ~ " 5'. 0" / ! sK vS2'-4" -- C - I ) MATERIALS AND F A B R I C A I I O N SUALL LOHFORH TO 5 P E L I F I C A T I O N
31-b" 6'. 9" 5'. 3' /I. d' 2'. /" EG-967 AN0 TO A P I STAHDARD 650 . LATEST EOIT ION. 2 /4' --- ~. Tan& she/ / - - 3 - /&.,I 4,. 0" To" 5'.6** /'- 7. 2' 7~4. /(I (-1) THE s u n p AHO NOZIIE ASSERULY SIIALL n t IHERMLLY STRESL-
4 /B" 4'.6* 7'3'' 5'. 9' . /'. 8- 2'-q;/i /y4* RELIEVED A T A T E W E M T U R E OF 1.100'F 1 0 I .100.f fOR A
-- - - -- . . - - - - -- - - . . ... PERIOD OF ONE HOUR PER INCH OF r H I c m E s S OF THE B o T T o n
5 20" 5 7: 6" 6'. 0' / I - 9'' 2 , . , / q /y+" P L A r E , U l T H A n l H l n W PERIOD OF ONE HOUR FOR U1) THICUIELS.
- " 6'.0"
8'0" 6'.6" / ' . / / " 3'.3v /g L - 3 ) GASKET SUHFALE OH M l S L D FACE F L h l l C t TO UE C O M L K I A L L Y smorn ( 5 0 0 RHS MXIRW ROUG~NESS) .
C-4) FLAHCE BOLT I lOLLS SHALL L T M U D L L C i N T E h L l n E .
( - 5 ) THE EXTERNAL SUHFACtS OF THC S M P , ' N U I I L f ASSEMBLY ANU TAHK BOTTOR R E l N i D R C l H G PLATE SHALL B t SANOBLASTED TO A COnnER- C l A L NEAR-WHITE F I N I S H (SSPC SP-10) AND PAIHTEO WITH 3 H I L S (DRY T H I C U E S S ) OF IHOHLAHIC Z IHC RICH COATING; HAPKO 51 ( 1 1 3 7 8 ) . AHEROR D l n f T c o T E D-6. CAHBOLINE CARBOZIHC II OR N O B l L C H t H l C A L HOBIL -Z INC I. THE W T A L LOGES TO BE F I E L D Y E L L 0 SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED OF COATIHG BEFORE UELDIYC TO PREVENT Z lHC CONTPAINATION OF UELO RETAL,
( -6 ) THE suw TO u u T r d n R~ INFORCINC PLAIE F I ~ L O u t ~ u SIIALL BE COHPLETELY O I L C H E C U O AFTER TrlE R3OT PASS A l l0 AFTER THE COVER PASS.
( - 7 ) T l l lCU lESSES OF S U W UALL, SunP BOTTOH PLATE PdlU RElNFORCll IG PLATE INCLUDE 1 /16" CORROLIOH ALLOUAIICE.
'-8) THE TRnK SUPPORT U t M 5 dUST bE PI.ACEU AND CHOUIEO BEFORE F I E L D u E ~ O l l r G THE SUI1P TO Tl lE dD lTOH REINFORCIIIG PLATE. SEE STANDARD UKAUlNG GC-QIOIS.
P L A N
o f tank she// fo SU/? rejoforr/oy p/aCe.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
. ~ - . .. .... . . . . . . - - ~ . ... ...... ~. ~~ -.
. . . . . . . -. . --
. . . . .. . -.
Sqmrnetrical about 40 - h o l e s for i . 9 bolts,
equal ly spaced - s t r a d d l e - Permissable ~ l t e r n a t e f l a n q e 4
Field n o t e : When A i s less t h a n t qrind corners r o u n d , al l a round , a f ter we ld inq 7
\ square cut
X-I Cover plaie - min. thick. u e r Table3- I API 5td 650
K w J t o suit curvature of thnkJ SHOWING COVER - COVER -- R E M O V E D - - - -. - -
ELEVATION , .
p - - 1159 I
DETAIL OF GASKET
D E S I G N A N D C O N S T R U C T I O N N O T E S - --. p~ --
I. L e l t e r d i rnens io r~s ~ r e f e r to v a l u e s g i v e n i n Table 3-2 2 0 " s h e l l m a n h o l e , a n d a r e ttre same a s t lrose shown in Fig.3.6 of API S t a n d a r d 650 cu l - ren t e d i t i o n .
2 . No tes g i v e n ill API L t a r ~ d a r d 6 5 0 c u r r e n t e d i t i o n , f o r 20"c i r cu la r shel l rnanlnolr d r s i q r l a n d conbt l -ur t ion s lbr l l b e appl icable t o t h i s drawinq.
, 5. E d g e o f cower t o b e f i n i s h e d bnroo th a n d I -
o u t s i d e c o r n e r o f p i a l e l o L e s l i g h t l y r o u n d e d .
Chtulan --
REVISIONS Stal~dard Oil Co~npany 01 Cal~lo~n~a . - . . . . . . . . . . . . v- I A?C-,'c/<d Noh 4 . I / + / . '%/ 0 L I , ~ " ' . " " ~ ~ UIY.IIII~LIII s111 tr*"cll'"
- - S.[Ab$Jfil?r) 30' X 36'' :!,I I! ! I bIL\!4! I ~ ) I . E .. r i d
- -~
. . . . . . . . r:o!i larj~ci, . .. ACT SCALE-NYUE . .. DATE ..3: 10:1314 . . . . . . .~ ~~ ~
I%z<A -. -. . .~ - . - - - - - -- .-- ~*;; Added Sea l plate and DH D L I ( LIB CH G C U DR. APP - ENGR. EL- . . -. - -. .
up dated Flg ( T r r b l r rererenCe6lo rnntch l o t c a t
-Er(nfApl650 [6:$Y7i - . . .
S T A H D A R D D R A W I N G I
I 9 E 1 N r 0 4 C I N G SL.4TE 352
Y A P \ STANDARD ;50 2 V 1 I 5 C H 80 L O N G R A D I U S I
W E L D I N G ELSOW i L A H G E i 3 i 4 O Z I L S SiiALL ; 3E :50;3 LlSAS S T 3 r k 3 I
I RF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTE? /
SCH 80 S E A M L E S S STEEL I
PIPE, A P I 5 1 O R AS 1
I
SEAMLESS STEEL n I 5 1 OR A S T M A-53 -
3
\
-el
>I
NOTE : F A B R I C A T I O N A N D A T T A C H M E N T OF NOZZLES SHALL CONFORM T3 THE A P I S T A N D A R D 6 5 0 LATEST E D I T _ I O N
n I R E D R A W N
EN61 WEERIWG DEPARTM EWT SAW FRANCISCO
T A N K W A T E R DRAWOFF PntNrso IN u.s.A. S T A N D A R D D R A W I N G
I V , TANK OPENINGS
A, A P I SHELL MANHOLES
A P I STANDARDS S P E C I F Y MANHOLES I N S I Z E S OF 20". 24",
30" AND 36' (SEE FIG, 3-4A, A P I 650,) THE 24" ROUND
MANHOLE I S MOST COMMONLY USED, HOWEVER, LARGrR
MANHOLES MAY BE J U S T I F I E D FOR I N S T A L L A T I O N OF HEATERS,
ACCESS FOR CLEANING, R E P A I R M A T E R I A L S AND I N S T A L L A T I O R
- OF HEATERS. USUAL PRACTICE IS TO PROVIDE ONE MANHCLE
FOR TANKS UP TO 40' OR 50' DIAMETER, TWO MANHOLES FOR
TANKS RANGING FROM 40'-50' TO 100'-110' DIAMETER, AND
TWO OR THREE MANHOLES FOR LARGER TANKS, DEPENDING a?!
T H E I R SERVICE,
B , LARGER ACCESSWAY - DWG, GC-D99761
SOME OPERATORS REQUIRE ONE 20" x 36" MANHOLE ON EACH
F L O A T I N G ROOF TANK TO P E R M I T MOVING EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
THROUGH THE SHELL, E S P E C I A L L Y D R A I N - P I P E J O I N T S , IT I S
SOMETIMES USED ALSO FOR CONE ROOF TANKS WHEN A LARGER
SHELL ACCESSWAY I S REQUIRED,
SHELL NOZZLES
A P I STANDARDS ARE USED FOR SHELL NOZZLES AND PROVIDE
1
FOR TWO NOZZLE HEIGHTS, ~ ~ E G U L A R AND FLUSH, GENERALLY~
NOZZLES SHOULD BE PLACED AS LOW AS POSSIBLE TO ALLOW
MAXIMUM TANK OPEWING CAPACITY AND YET F U L F I L L THE
REQUIREMENTS OF S U F F I C I E N T HEIGHT TO ALLOW FOX
REINFORCING PADS, SHELL NOZZLES FLUSH WITH THE TANK
BOTTOM ARE P R I M A R l L Y USED W I T H FLOATING ROOF TANKS TO
PERHIT HAXIHUM LOWERING OF ROOFS, STANDARD DRAWING GG-
D 1069 PROVIDES DETAILS TO DESIGN FLUSH NOZZLES AND HAS
BEEN INCLUDED I N THE ~ T H EDITION OF A P I 650,
D. SHELL CLEANOUTS
GENERALLY. THE COMB IMAT ION CLEANOUT AND WATER DRAW-OFF
AS SHOWN ON DRAWING GA-099765 WILL SERVE AS WELL AS
STANDARD A P I 8" x 16" AND 24" x 24" SIZES AND IS MORE
ECONOMICAL, LARGE FLUSH-TYPE CLEANOUTS ARE EXPENSIVE
AND SHOULD BE I N S T A L L E D ONLY WHEN FREQUENT CLEANING OF
HEAVY SLUDGE DEPOSITS IS ANTICIPATED, FOR THIS PURPOSE
EITHER STANDARD APH 36" x 48" OR 48" x 48" CLEANOUT
SHOULD BE USED,
A DOOR SHEET I S USED WHEN LARGE EQUIPMENT I S REQI I ;?ED
FOR CLEANING OPERATIONS, I[T CONSISTS OF A LARGE i C - E
I N THE BOTTOM COURSE OF A TANK COVERED BY A LARGE SHEET
OF THE SAME THICKNESS AS THE BOTTOM COURSE AND BOLTED
I N PLACE,
IN LARGE TANKS DESIGN OF THE VERTICAL J O I N T BETWEEN THE
DOOR SHEET AND SMELL IS DIFFICULT. IT MAY INVOLYE
SEVERAL ROWS OF BOLTS AND I T I S D I F F I C U L T TO M A I N T A I N A
T IGHT J O I N T ,
E, ELBOW OUTLET - DWG, GC-D39627
THIS OUTLET PERMITS WITHDRAWAL OF TANK CONTENTS TO A
LOWER LEVEL AND CHECKS VORTEX FORMATION AT HIGH FLOW
RATES
F, SIPHON-TYPE WATER DRAW-OFF-DWG, GE-931732
THIS IS USED WHERE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO HAVE A
PERMANENT COHNECTION I N THE TANK BOTTOM FOR WATER DRAlPE
OR CLEANING (MARKETING TANKS AND CONE DOWN BOTTOM TANKS
ARE AN EXAMPLE),
6 , WATER DRAW-OFF SUPIPS
API-650 FIG, 3-15 PROVIDES A STANDARD FOR DRAW-OFF
SUMPS LOCATED NEAR THE EDGE OF THE TANKS,
UNDER-BOTTOfl CONNECTIONS
API-658. APPENDIX 0, "RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR UNDER- I1
BOTTOM CONNECTIONS, CONTAINS BASIC RECOMMENDATIONS TO
BE CONSIDERED FOR THE D E S I G N AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDER-
BOTTOM CONNECTIONS FOR STORAGE TANKS,
THESE INLET/OUTLET NOZZLES PERMIT VERY HIGH FLOW RATES. ,
AND WITHDRAWING AT LOW L I Q U I D LEVELS WITHOUT VORTEX
FORMBTION,
I , ROOF MANHOLES
THE PRIMARY FUNCTION OF ROOF MANHOLES IS TO PROVIDE A
MEANS FOR V E N T I L A T I N G A TANK BEFORE ENTRY B Y WORKERS
AND TO PROVIDE NATURAL L I G H T WHILE WORK I S B E I N G DONE,
THEY MAY ALSO BE USED A S AN ACCESS TO END OF SWING
L I N E S , AN I N S P E C T I O N HATCH FOR TANK GAGE, OR A BASE F @ 2
EMERGENCY VENT ATTACHMENTS,
STANDARD API WOOF MANHOLE
API 650, FIG. 3-12, PROVIDES 20" AND 24" DIAMETER ROOF
MANHOLES, SOME OPERATORS PREFER THE 20" MANHOLE AND IT
I S Q U I T E SATISFACTORY FOR SMALLER TANKS,
FOR LARGER TANKS A 24" x 36" MANHOLE IS PREFERRED
BECAUSE I T PROVIDES A GREATER AMOUNT OF L I G H T I N G AND
V E N T I L A T I O N , AND AN E A S I E R ACCESS DURING MAINTENANCE
OPERATIONS, THE HIGHER MANHOLE SHOULD BE USED FOR
INSULATED TANKS, FROM ONE TO THREE OF THESE MANHOLES ;
ARE USUALLY I N S T A L L E D DEPENDING ON TANK DIAMETER,
WINDOW SHEETS
A LARGE ROOF OPENING (UP TO 5 ' x 8' DIPIEIUSIONS) CALLED
A WINDOW SHEET IS SOMETIMES USED, IT PERMITS LOWERING
OF LARGE EQUIPMENT THROUGH THE ROOF AND ALLOWS A LARGE
AMOUNT OF NATURAL L I G H T I N G AND V E N T I L A T I O N , ITS
CONSTRUCTION I S S I M I L A R TO THE 24" x 3611 ROOF NANHOLE
W I T H A gN ANGLE FRAMEl ON TANKS THAT ARE SELDOR
OPENED, COLD C U T T I N G AND PATCHING THE ROOF I S
ECONOMICAL,
GAGE FLOAT INSPECTION HATCH
A GAGE FLOAT I N S P E C T I O N HATCH I S REQUIRED FOR I N T E R I O R
INSPECTION OF TANK GAGE AND FLOAT ONLY I F AN OPENING I S
NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR THE PURPOSE,
APH ROOF NOZZLES
API-650. FIG. 3-13 AND 3 4 ROOF NOZZLE HEIGHTS ARE
NOT SATISFACTORY FOR MOUNTIIVG VENTING EQUIPMENT, WHEN
ROOF NOZZLES ARE INTENDED FOR USE W I T H VENTING
MACHINES, THE HEIGHT OF THE NOZZLES S H A L L BE INCREASED
V, GAGING AND SAMPLING DEVICES
A, VAPOR-TIGHT GAGE HATCH
THESE ARE NEEDED ONLY ON VAPOR-TIGHT T A ~ ~ K S AND SYOULD
BE PLACED ON ALL VAPOR-TIGHT TATiKS EQUIPPED W I T H
BREATHER VALVES, SEVERAL MAWUFACTUDE?S HAKES STANDi l23
EQUIPMENT WHICH I S SATISFACTORY,
B , . FUIMEL-TYPE THIEF AND GAGE HATCH
THIS IS A NON-GAS-TIGHT HATCH USEE ON TANKS HOLDING
DIRTY, LO%-VAPOR-PRESSURE STOCK, IT IS USED FOR
CATCHING D R I P S FROM SAMPLE BOTTLES AND GAGE TAPES AND
ALSO PROVIDES A RACK FOR SAMPLING EQUIPMENT,
C , MULTIPLE USE HATCH
THE COMBINED GAGE HATCH, BREATHER, AND MANHOLE FOR NOM-
GAS-TIGHT TANKS SERVES A T R I P L E FUlVCTION ON SMALL NON-
GAS-TIGHT TANKS, IT HAS BEEN USED FOR SMALL GREASE AND
SLUDGE TANKS,
D . GAGE WELLS
SLOTTED GAGE WELLS FOR FIXED ROOF TANKS A R E USED TO
GUARD AGAINST S T A T I C HAZARD I N TANKS STORING R E F I N E D
PRODUCTS WHERE VAPOR SPACE MAY BE I N EXPLOSIVE RANGE,
E , TANK GAGING
TANK LEVEL GAGING IS DEFINED BY THE A P I AS "A PROCESS
OF MEASURING THE HEIGHT OF A L I Q U I D I N A STORAGE TANK, :I
FOR PROCESS LEVEL MEASU~EMENT ACCURACY REBU I REHEHBS
(8.1X TO 1%) CAN BE MET WITH MECHANICAL GAGES* DIP CELLS, TORQUE TUBE DISPLACERS, OR A V A R I E T Y OF OTHER,
UNCONVENTIONAL SYSTEMS,
A I
B I
C D E F G 1 I t i
I I I O R D E R IC.\JG DATA
<R WHEN O R D E R I N G C O M B I P I A T I O N H A T C H b W E A T H E R FROPA THLS D W G . , S P E C l F Y : -
I. ROOF S L O P E 2. DIMEI\ISI~N'~," I
-
C.2) 4i4 r l " L ~ . BP~S5.FINI511ED HEX t i E A 0 BOLT WITH HEX
2
C O N S T R U C T I O N N O T E S
I: A L L S T E E L S H A L L EE A S T M A - 36.E A C E P T A5 NOTED. 2:AL L W E L D I N G S H A L L BE EL€ C T R l C , I J 5 I I - I G
C O A T E D ROD C O b I F O F i W l l h l G TO A.W.S. l - Y P S k-6010. HATCH LONG SEAM SHALL e t A FULL PEI<ETRPTION WLLR
S h C D E T A I L 3
A 's r .I 7;'s~. 0RA55 BLOCKS. 0 K A Z E TO cove*. 2 R ~ O D . RILL FOR ~/B"LI..LG.
COTTER PIN. (0OTl i ENDS). -16 GA. 5TL. COVER -... -
Yi'b STL. H A M O L E
REFERENCE D R A W I N G S ' 4
. -~ . ~~ ~~. ..- . . ~ . . ... ... .
1/4"5TL. bPACKET %G"THK. ST L.- - .. HATCH
REINFORCING RI~IG. DETAIL OF HINGE €LEVA1-IOI\ j
-. --- ~
R E V I S I O N S Chavlon S ~ a i ~ d d ~ d 011 C o ~ ~ l p a ~ ~ y ol Calilornia ~llY,l l~r, , . l . i ~ i .~.~~,~,~, ,~ bill tldlillli~ F~l jP .... p J O a l - ( i t - . ? - - r I c i t i T .~ . T P i l ' 1 t c . S ~~~
-
SCALE_!!C!?.!E . . . . O A T E 31 !Z If: ~.
OH I'_B.!:CtiC.!FL 011, A P P . C . E e - _ t N G H J ; M c Q 4.!3 A P P R O V E D
LNG. UCPT. i i .A .R 4 2!, E ?!! 4!??%~&5/i)n P f i , , , , , , $ . ,> 5. * , 5 I A I i U A U O O R A W I N G
F L A N G E 0 SAMPLE F U N N E L B COVER. FOR FLOATING ROOF TANKS I
S T A N D A R D D R A W I N G
V I , OPERATING DEVICES
SWING PIPES AWE USED WHEN IT IS DESIRED TO FILL OR
WITHDRAW FROM TANKS AT SPECIF IC LEVELS# OR FOR SOME
SPECIAL PURPOSE SUCH AS SKIMMING, BLENDING# OR
C I RCLILAT I NG ,
SWING PIPES ARE EXPENSIVE TO MAINTAIN AND SHOULD NOT BE
INSTALLED UNLESS THERE I S A D E F I N I T E OPERATING NEED FOR
THEM n
ELBOWS ON ENDS OF SWING PIPES SHOULD BE TURNED UPWARD
I F DISTURBANCE OF BOTTOM WATER LAYER OR SLUDGE I S TO BE
AVO I DED a
BALANCED OR CENTRAL TYPE OF "STAY TITE" SWING JOINT IS
STANDARD AND SHOULD BE USED ON ALL SWING P IPES 4" AND
LARGER,
CABLE SHOULD 9 E S I S T CORROSION AND WEAR SO AS TO BE
SERVICEABLE EEYOND THE PERIOD BETWEEN CLEANOUTS (AT
LEAST SEVEN TO TEN YEARS), IIV MOST CASES, GALVANIZED
PLOW-STEEL CABLE SHOULD BE ADEQUATE,
, A WINCH SHOULD NOT BE SELECTED TOO CLOSE TO I T S WORKING
L I M I T ,
NECESSARY FOR INSULATED TANKS,
B , TANK HEATERS AN0 HEAT LOSSES
SELECTION AND S I Z I ~ ~ G OF HEATERS DEPENDS UPON TANK SIZE,
AMOUNT AND PRESSUTE OF STEAM AVAILABLE, ATMOSPHERIC
TEMPERATURE, I N I T I A L AND F I N A L O I L TEMPERATURES,
HEATING T I M E , AND R A D I A T I O N FACTORS WHICH VARY OVER A
WIDE
RANGE, BECAUSE OF THE MANY VARIABLES, EACH HEATING
PROBLEM IS AN :INDIVIDUAL ONE AND IS NOT ADAPTED TO
STANDARDIZATION, ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT DESIGN PRACTICE D-131-4 PROVIDES BACKGROUND INFORMATION ON THE DETERMINATION OF TANK HEAT LOSSES AND THE SIZING OF
HEATERS,
EARLIER TANK HEATERS CONSISTED OF A NUMBER OF HAIRPIN
COILS FORMING A GRID OVER THE BOTTOM OF THE TANK 1 COST PER SQUARE FOOT OF EFFECTIVE HEATING SURFACE WAS HIGH
AND MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROVE EXPENSIVE. THIS LEADS TO BUNDLE-TYPE HEATER AND, FINALLY, TO MANHOLE HEATERS,
HEATERS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS REQUIRE NO PIPING
CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE TANK AND CAN BE REMOVED AND
REPAIRED WITHOUT GOING INSIDE THE TANK, DESIGN SHOWN ON THE DRAWING PERMITS REMOVAL OF THE HEAD WITHOUT
EMPTYING THE TANK,
APPLICATIONS, THEY CAN BE EITHER SHOP OR FIELD
EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF HEAT OVER THE BOTTOM 3F A TANK,
MOST APPARENT DISADVANTAGE IS THAT THE TANK HAS TO BE
TAKEN OUT OF SERVICE AND CLEANED FOR MAINTENANCE AND
REPAIRS TO THE HEATER,
SUCTION HEATERS SIMILAR TO MANHOLE TYPE HEATERS,
WITH A SHEATH PLACED AROUND THE BUNDLE, BASICALLY,
ONLY STOCK WITHDRAWN FROM THE TANK IS HEATED, SUCTION
HEATERS ARE FREQUENTLY EMPLOYED TO REDUCE V I S C O S I T Y OF
HEAVY STOCKS AND THEREBY TO REDUCE PUMPING COSTS.
COMPARTMENT HEATERS A9E INSTALLED I N TANK COMPARTMENTS
AND ARE DESIGNED TO HEAT ONLY STOCK TO BE PUMPED OUT,
PIPE COIL. MANHOLE TYPE, OR VERTICAL FINNED-TUBE
HEATERS MAY BE USED IN THIS SERVICE, USUALLY THERE ARE
ONLY TWO SUCH COMPARTMENTS WITH A HEATER I N EACH,
EACH COMPARTMENT HAS A SWING DOOR TO THE INTERIOR OF
THE TANK AND TANK SUCTION I S MANIFOLDED TO EACH
COMPARTMENT,
SUCH HEATERS ARE USUALLY USED ONLY WHEN PREHEATING
STOCKS B E I N G PUHPED FROM A FEED TANK TO A PROCESS U N I T
AND ARE GENERALLY USED TO O B T A I N HIGHER TEMPERATURES
THAN WOULD BE P R A C T I C A L WITH OTHER TYPES OF HEATERS,
AN EXTERNAL HEAT EXCHANGER MAY BE AN ECONOMICAL CHOICE
FOR TANK H E A T I N G I N SOME INSTANCES E S P E C I A L L Y I F I T CAN
B E MANIFOLDED TO SEVERAL TANKS,
TANK MIXERS
PROPELLER-TYPE TANK MIXERS, GENERALLY MANUFACTURER'S
STANDARD U N I T S , ARE USED FOR BLENDING OPERATIONS,
ANOTHER SOLUTION TO TANK MIXING PROBLEMS, IS THE USE OF
M I X I N G NOZZLES. THIS METHOD I S COVERED I N ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT DESIGN PRACTICE K134-1, SIMPLY, THE
METHOD USES A J E T OF PRODUCT TO PRODUCE DESIRED
A G I T A T I O N ,
D, THERMAL CLOS I NG TANK VALVES
GENERAL
IN THE OIL INDUSTRY'S MORE SERIOUS FIRES. DAHAGE WAS
GREATLY INCREASED BY O I L RELEASED THROUGH RUPTURED
, P~P ING, GENERALLY. THIS OIL CAME FROM TANKS ON WHICH
THE OUTLET VALVES WERE OPEN AND COULD NOT BE REACHED
FOR CLOSING AFTER THE FIRE STARTED, THE USE OF
AUTOMATIC THERMAL CLOSING TANK VALVES OR REMOTE-
OPERATED VALVES COULD M I N I M I Z E OR AVOID T H I S HAZARD,
THEY ARE AN EXCELLENT DEVICE FOR SELECTED LOCATIONS,
USES
THERMAL CLOSING VALVES OR REMOTE-OPERATED VALVES MIGHT
BE DESIRABLE ON TANKS WHERE PUMPOUT DURING A F I R E I S
NOT POSSIBLE BECAUSE OF L I N E OR EQUIPMENT FAILURES: OR
AS BOUNDARY BLOCKS AT MANIFOLDS I N C R I T I C A L LOCATIONS.
CONDITIONS NORMALLY NOT JUSTIFYING USE OF THESE VALVES
INCLUDE ISOLATED TANKS OR TANKS LOCATED SO THAT S P I L L S
D R A I N AWAY FROM THE TANKS AND AREAS OF H I G H VALUE I N T O
IMPOUNDING AREAS WHERE F I R E WOULD NOT BE HAZARDOUS,
MA I NTENAMCE
MAINTENANCE THAN ORDINARY VALVES,
TYPES OF VALVES
SEVERAL TYPES OF THERMAL CLOSING VALVES ARE AVAILABLE
FOR PROTECTION AGAINST F I R E HAZARD, RELATIVE COSTS FOR
DIFFERENT TYPE INSTALLATIONS ARE SHOWN IN TA:BLES 1 AND
2 ATTACHED,
A SPRING LOADED LEVER OPERATED VALVE WHICH CAN BE HELD
I N OPEN P O S I T I O N B Y A F U S I B L E L I N K ATTACHED TO THE
HANDLE, IT CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY WHEN FIRE MELTS THE
L I N K a THIS VALVE MAY BE INSTALLED IN THE TANK,
E L I M I N A T I N G THE NEED FOR AN OPERATING GATE VALVE,
A SPRING LOADED LEVER OPERATED VALVE WHICH CAN BE HELD
I N THE OPEN P O S I T I O N B Y A F U S I B L E L I N K ATTACHED TO THE
HANDLE. IT CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY WHEN F I R E MELTS THE
L I N K ,
THIS TYPE OF VALVE IS CONSIDERED AS EMERGENCY FATHER
THAN OPERATING S I N C E THE LOW D I S C SEAT PRESSURE
(EQUIVALENT TO ONLY 3 PSI BACK PRESSURE) DOES NOT
PROVIDE BOTTLE T I G H T CLOSURE.
THIS VALVE IS PRIMARILY INTENDED AS A THERMAL SAFETY
VALVE THAT I S NORMALLY OPEN, IT REQUIRES BACK UP B Y AN
OPERATING VALVES
AN INTERNAL CHECK VALVE USING A DISC MOUNTED ON A
COUNTERWEIGHT ARM THAT IS HELD IN THE "OPEN" POSITION
B Y A CABLE ATTACHED TO A F U S I B L E L I N K AT A S U I T A B L E
POINT OUTSIDE THE TANK SHELL, MELTING OF THE FUSIBLE
L I N K B Y F I R E R E L I E V E S THE CABLE, AND THE COUNTERWEIGHT
CLOSES THE VALVES
THIS VALVE IS SUITABLE ONLY AS AN E~MERGENCY THERMAL
SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVE s IT I S NOT AN OPERATING VALVE,
I N A TANK INSTALLATION THE VALVE I S MOUNTED I N THE
DISCHARGE OPENING AND, EXCEPT FOR I T S BASE FLANGE, I S
ENTIRELY W I T H I N THE TANK, IT NORMALLY I S HELD CLOSED
BY A SPRING AND OPENS ONLY WHEN HYDRAULIC PRESSURE I S
A P P L I E D BY A SMALL HIGH PRESSURE HAND PUMP MOUNTED NEAR
THE VALVE OR AT A REMOTE LOCATION AS DESIRED, RELEASE
, OF T H I S PRESSURE WILL IMMEDIATELY CLOSE THE VALVE AND
SHUT OFF FLOW,
THIS VALVES IS SIMILAR TO TYPE ( 4 ) EXCEPT THAT IT IS
DESIGNED TO REMAIN CLOSED AGAINST ANY TANK OR L I N E
PRESSURE, IT IS, THEREFORE, SUITABLE FOR USE AS AN
OPEqATING VALVE,
A F U L L FLOW VALVE FOR USE I N L I N E S TO TANKS JUST
OUTSIDE THE REGULAR SHUT-OFF VALVE WHERE I T I S
NECESSARY FOR A VALVE TO CLOSE AUTOMATICALLY AND
INSTANTANEOUSLY DUE TO EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE I N THE
TMMEDIATE AREA OF THE VALVE,
THIS VALVE CAN BE PROVIDED WITH AN AUXILIARY CIRCUIT OF
F U S I B L E WIRE WHICH, UPON EXPOSURE TO F I R E , CLOSES A
RELAY I N THE M A I N C I R C U I T AND THUS CLOSES THE VALVE
SHOULD I T BE OPEN,
A 450 BODY REMOTE OPERATING VALVE HELD I N NORMALLY
CLOSED P O S I T I O N B Y THE SPRING UNLESS A C T I V A T E D B Y THE
P I LOT VALVE, ELECTRIC, PNEUMATIC, OR HYDRAUL I c P I LOT
VALVES MAY BE USED FOR OPENING THE M A I N VALVE CYL INDER,
THIS VALVE IS IDEAL WHERE MINIMUM PRESSURE DROP IS
REQUIRED OR FOR A P P L I C A T I O N S WHERE I T I S NOT P R A C T I C A L
TO USE THE FLOWING STREAM AS THE POWER MEDIUM TO
OPERATE A VALVE,
March 1962
M P)
43
2C
,o
3
mr
i C
>
ad
o2
1
~5
s-
March 1962
NOTES L SuPp/;cr ,n~y umc his J/JNO!!IJ S ~ C J I S . ~v~i 'h mod'fii.al/Ms
shown by O ! ~ / J / % on D/awiny GB-D78trt3/ 2. fdycs o f 1'10/cr pr-ov/ddd for f i s s ~ y c ol' % - &6/e
thru SIuff,r/y Box, W ~ s h c r dlid Cdp to Lc I oulldcd o f f on bolh rid<,.
/ ? , E f f / ? , k M ~ f D R A W / N G S
c11.",0" Srindacd 011 CUIII~UIIY III C~IIIUIIIIA t,,",~,, lir,l~,l,,,l.,l S . , ~ I l * , l ~ , l i U
- - ~ ~~ . .- S C A L C . 32 6'.: !-'<?- .. oxr t 2 4' .I 22-. DM JILL ~ CII.LG 4C*? -rht ~ 1 1 ~ ~ . -mu E I J L , R . L ~ L U < L
MIXER sUMBts COMPANY .DATA (CONTINUED)
n l x t n I r s r r L L t o ir ( v t s s t ~ ) ( l r r r ) r u n e t a
COMPANY'S D A T A E. wAT!,L_ REQUIREMENTS (vGUG?Gi l *o i i *~~ MICUYIIIUIO WIIHIAI PKOPCIIIR 011 l n P t L l r R -~ -
DH I 1~ I I ; lY I IL I lUN CU1 I l l * 1101 S P L c I t 110 . ) : i l 1 1 I I I I IC Uua A110 nOI Im l lnc FIAIIGL . . _ ... _.. .
D. ConsiuucTIw I ( E Q U I R E H E N I S
b l z , l < ~ ! ~ , ~ ~ l l l I ~ l l ~ ~ ~ l ( l l l A ' , l l ~ ~ l l ~ ~ f ~ l l ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i l , I l 1 1 )
,,,,I,.,! I 8 , I , ,,,,<,,I , , I I, I,, (4 ~ ~ l ~ l ' ~ l r ~ f l ~ ~ l l ~ l I >,,4,. .,A1 I , . i l l I 1 1 I 1 '.ill I I I I l l l l l l I( 1 1 1 i i i i , , i l i i l ,l,.I [ , I ' l ~ l , l / " i . I l i i l i i , )I,,",,, 1
' I . , r I l l , I , l l l l l l > i l l l l I l l 11 , 1 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 J I d1 11111.1.1
,,I I . , ' I 1111 .I./ , 1 1 1 1, I " , , , . l l i i i , I . I,.. I , , , , < \ A l l , ,1(,1I I11. I ',I , , I , , , , . , 4 I ,I, I I t t,, ,I,, ' , l , l l \:Al,#,,<84 I,, ( 1 , . , t , . l . '
1 , ' . .I { I '"I, l " ' , ~ " ' ' . " ' ~ . " " ' ' ~ I I Ill i
?111*1 1 - - - . . . l l ln l l ~ l l l t 1 ~ ; l ~ G 511AFl I l l R U 51111 f 1111; 1 0 x 7
W~IIAIIILAL b t ~ ~ - 5 1 ~ 1 PING-. . - - _~ . W I l l l t G 5 t A l Y l l l L . .... 5wINl;>--. . .. ~ .- .--- C l l l L A P S . CAL I S. C I C . -
CAbKCIS -. . ~ - > I l l 1 I, H U I 3 l l U I U t - C O L I I H 011 Sl lA t I - ..
-CA5IC 1 .. ~ --
- S I L L F A T I u* S111FI. U U l .
. . . .. . . . . .- - VENDOR'S D A T A 1511 NUII 1 1
MOM 1 IIUMIM
. L I H l A l h'llHULW -. ~
I r v t ,,I . , P t t n HIIJIICIU (I;IAY) Iv-UIII~(IIIPICI U W I V I ~ r w w l AI I &UHF AMII null 1 W 5 Y l 1 il It1 llll t H
r.c.14~ 1 1 H v 1 . l I ~ l l l k I'WIII'I IIIII u l r M IIY -. I I I ~ I K nuural IN,. I ILII;~ -S 1 1 1 IHAI IIU,. .. _ 1 6 1 1 ~ 1 ,
I M I ~ I 11 .,urlwnl 11 11 u c u ~ l I, I~AIIII I .. . I , I111111 , l ~ t l ~ l 1 * 1 . . I I P L _, ~
IH I I I IH I I t I 1 l l l l l r l i ; l l l LU O H l l l l t l l I t l PAZS I ' I ? ~ I I ' I I ~ I M _ I #
l ' l l h l l < l l - l lO l l l l l H U HIIII;>> I l l
. NOTES I. l l f H > I I P l i b l l , '.' I11V l l l l t l 11 <11<1< ,IN I I A I 1 11111 I
iul i , l1: ,~110 b l 1 1 6 l i l 8 ' l ll'l 01 111<121 11. AII 11l11111 111 ~i
h~ y u ~ l ; l l ~ u l l n ~OOIIIAI la in
. ..
~ -
. . ... .
- ..
L - -
. ~
S K I I C H Of VESSEL S l l w l l G CLIILIAL DIIAPE. I:UI~ICAL
DIHCUSIOUS. A I D I I I C U V A L S .
VLNOOR I 0 S11W P R L f t U R t D LOCAI IUN. U H l E I l ~ 1 1 0 1 . AND
I I I L Y N A I CLCAPAICC M t Q U I n l O .
- . - .. . . . . . . . . . . - - ~ -
!
! I I I
2 V) - :
3 I ::-I \&
. ~~ l'.~:.~.-I
.. . . ~~ -.
LIIbU. ~ . .. -. - .
O I ' H ' L U f l ' l . . . .
fMC. O f I ' I . _ . ~
~-
V I I , VAPOR RELIEF F IXED ROOF
A, GENERAL
ALLOW FOR:
A) OUTBREATHING OF TANK VAPOR DUE TO EXPANSION
RESULTING FROM ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE INCREASE
AND F I L L I N G THE TANK, AND
B) INBREATHING OF AIS DUE TO CONTRACTION OF TANK
VAPORS RESULTING FROM TEMPERATURE DECREASE AND
EMPTYING THE TANKm
B. VENTING CAPACITY AND PRESSURES
THE MAXIMUM PRESSURE WHICH A TANK WITH A ROOF STRUCTURE
SHOULD ORDINARILY BE SUBJECTED I S THE PRESSURE AT WHICH
THE ROOF PLATES ARE LIFTED OFF THE ROOF RAFTERS. (FOR
A ROOF CONSTRUCTED OF 3/16-IN, PLATE, T H I S PRESSURE I S
EQUAL TO 1 1/2 I N . OF WATER, )
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE VACCUM IS DETERMINED FROM THE
RESISTANCE OF THE EMPTY TANK TO COLLAPSE. THE MAXIMUM
VAPOR SPACE VACUUM NORMALLY ALLOWED I S 3 I N , OF WATER,
THE API VENTING GUIDE RP 2000 PERMITS THE USE OF OPEN
VENTS FOR TANKS IIV WHICH O I L WITH A FLASH P O I N T OF lOOF
AND ABOVE I S STORED,
A SINGLE OPEN VENT THAT MAY BE HOODED TO KEEP OUT R A I N
IS USUALLY PROVIDED, THE VENT NIPPLE SHOULD BE SIZED
USING THE LOWER SET OF CURVES ON THE PRESSURE VENTING
CHART, DRAW I NG GB-87390,
A BREATHER VALVE I S A PRESSURE R E L I E F VALVE WHICH OPENS
TO ALLOW TANK VENTING ONLY WHEN THE INTERNAL PRESSURE
OR VACUUM EXCEED THE VALVE OPERATING PRESSURES, THEREBY
M I N I M I Z I N G TANK BREATHING AND REOUCING EVAPORATIOPl
LOSSES n
BREATHER VALVES ARE GENERALLY PLACED ON TANKS STORING
O I L S WITH A FLASH POINT BELOW 100F,
AS DISCUSSED I N THE FIRE PROTECTION MANUAL, THE
I N S T A L L A T I O N OF FLAME ARRESTORS ON TANK VENTS YO
ATMOSPHERE I S NOT RECOMMENDED,
BREATHER VALVES SHOULD NORMALLY BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE
w ITH DRAW I NG GB-87398, "CHART FOR SELECT I ON OF BREATHER
VALVES," WHICH IS BASED ON THE API VENTING GUIDE RP -
2800 AND PERFORMANCE DATA OF COMMERICALLY AVAILABLE
BREATHE8 VALVES,
THE AP I VENTING GUIDE RP 2800 REQUIRES THAT IN ADDITION
TO NORMAL VENTING CAPACITY, A L L TANKS SHALL HAVE SOME
D E V I C E OR FORM OF CONSTRUCTION THAT WILL R E L I E V E
EXCESSIVE I N T E R N A L PRESSURE I F THE TANK I S EXPOSED TO
F I R E , AN EMERGENCY V E N T I N G D E V I C E I S MOT RE3UIRED B Y
A P I RP 2880, IF r T CAN BE SHOWN THAT THE ROOF-TO-SHELL
J O I N T I S WEAKER THAN THE SHELL-TO-SHELL OR SHELL-TO-
BOTTOM J O I NTS ,
PROBABLY MORE THAN HALF OF THE TANKS THAT HAVE BEEH
DAMAGED FROM EXCESSIVE PRESSURE OR VACUUM FROM ANY
CAUSE HAVE BEEN DAMAGED BECAUSE OF FROZEN BREATHER
VALVES OR VENTS,
TANK D l AMETER
( FT)
1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5
5!
TABLE I COMPARATIVE COSTS OF VENTING AND ACCESS
FOR SMALL VERTICAL STORAGE TANKS WITH F I X E D ROOFS
--
TANKS WITH FRANGIBLE ROOF-SHELL JOINT TANKS WITIIOUT FRANGI BLE ROOF-SHELL JOI NT
( 1 ) ( 2 1 I BREATHER V A L V E PI
NOTES:
( 1 ) V E N T I N G REQUIRED FOR 5 0 0 GPM F I L L I N G AND EMPTY I N 0 HATE ( 2 ) V E N T I N G FOR a) NORMAL F I L L I N G AN0 EMPTY I N G AND/OR b ) T O T A L PRESSURE R E L I E F PER A P I R P - 2 0 0 0 . ( 3 ) RECOMMENDED M I N I M U M BREATl lER VALVE S I Z E I S $-IN.
(11) ABOVE T A B L E I S BASED ON THE USE OF Sl lAHD h J U R S BREATl lER VALVES AND V E N T I N G MANHOLES, OR L Q U I V A L E N T . ( 5 ) T l l E PRESSURE-VACUUM V E H T I H G MANII0I.E (s. h J. 5 1 - 5 4 5 5 P -V) MEETS V E N T I N G REQUIREMENTS FOR A L L [AUKS AND CAN BE U S E 0 1011 TANK
ACCESS AHD L I G I I r . I T HAS A TEFLON DIAPHRAGM. ( 6 ) BHEATl lE l l VALVE COSTS INCLUDE NOZZLE.
1 m
IM mc
>Ian, a rarcn
mi
5 t
? !
I,
,
1
1, ,
I.
I
,!
/
I
. . -a
. . !:; :;
>
*.
p;; ::
5; i:
. -
1:: :;
- 0
.
-.
I:" j3
.. - -
.. ... m
--
.-
-.. ,.
-i
... .
-..- '
--. -- -.- . ..- 3
":
::
. .-
--
.:<
-:
".- , is
: i4
a!; - - 3:
:-- --
i
ii
;:
.-
I
<,
- - . . -,!
:: 32:
'5;
iii ..-
.A
--. ..
:a<
5
:;
3
--.
--- -
. . ,
-
-.
- z;: PI-
=:- iz
- ::; a:-?
z
:35
-:*
ta
4:
+-: -.-. :3: :a;-
::-
--.. ..-. ::z
I I I
E::- , ,
- - - -'i--- 4PI qOOF N O Z Z L E v, I
I
I ( \ I
C O N E
I NOTES
I . DIMENSIONS F O R N O Z Z L E SH4LL BE REFERRED TO T ~ L E 15 A N D FIG- 16 OF Pg l S T A M D A U 650,CURRENT E D I T I O N .
2. NOTES G I V E N I N 4P \ STkNDARD 6501 CURRENT EDtTION ) F O R ROOF NOZZLE OESlGH 4ND CONSTRUCTION S H A L L 51 ~PPLIC~BLE: TQ THIS DRAWlNC.
L I f PRINTED IN US.,4. USAS S T A N D A R D D R A W i N G
4; . n
I , . - .
I - I !-- &-. : i ')
I kv r! 1
VI I I, ACCESS AND MISCELLANEOUS
A, LADDERS
8, STAIRS
C, HANDRAILS
Dl SPECIAL WALKWAYS
E, SCAFFOLD CABLE SUPPORT
THIS PIN SUPPORTS A PAINTER'S BOSUNS CHAIR OR STAGING
FOR FIXED ROOF TANKS, THE DETAILS AS SHOWN IN API-650
FIG, 3-16 IS ACCEPTABLE,
F, THERMAL EXPANSION RELIEF SYSTEM
RELIEF SYST,EMS ARE REQUIRED TO RELIEVE INCREASED LIQUID VOLUME DUE TO THERMAL EXPANSION IN SECTION OF LINE WITH
TIGHTLY CLOSED ENDS a ENGINEER I MG DEPARTMENT RECOMMENDED PRACTICE NO, 21 GIVES GUIDE LINES TO HELP
DETERMINE WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE RELIEF,
DRAW I NG GC-L99584 COVERS TYP I CAL I NSTALLAT I OM DETAILS ,
G , THERMOHETER ASSEMBLY
THEWIOMETERS ARE USUALLY REQUIRED ON HEATED OR CRUDE
SALES TANKS, THIS DRAWING SHOWS USUAL TYPE -
INSTALLATION,
H , TANK INSULATION
INSULATION OF TANKS IS DISCUSSED IN ENGINEERIHG
. DEPARTMENT RECOMMIENDED PRACTICE No, 12. THIS PRACTICE
D I SCUSSES TYPES OF INSULATION AVAILABLE,
WEATHERPROOFING AND ECONOMICS OF PROVIDING INSULATION,
ORDERING DATA
Specification BF-S-1328 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
T A N K QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 1 of 15
INSTRUCTIONS Oi\J USE OF THIS MODEL SPECIFICATION
This specification provides guidance for preparing quotation requests to solicit bids for the fabrication and erection of new tanks. Engineers are encouraged to prepare quotations that are clear, concise and , above all, complete. Failure to make the extra effort to achieve this will generally result in receiving incomplete bids and give rise, a t a later date, to extra costs for charges or additions that must be negotiated under noncompetitive conditions.
The following paragraphs discuss the various elements of a quotation request that must be prepared by the engineer, as well as other documents to complete the quotation request that are added by the Purchasing Department.
TANK & APPURTENANCE, SC14EL)ULE
The Tank and A ~ ~ u r t e n a n c e Schedule Form. BDC-33. is the basic document for describing and specifying a tank. The form should be cdmpletely filled out.
The availability of computer programs for calculating shell plate thickness and checking a tank for wind and earthquake stability makes it possible to design a tank very quickly and using the guidance provided in the Tank Manual, select the economical design basis. If the choice is not clearcut, the bidders should be asked to quote an alternate design basis if that results in a lower bid.
When specifying appurtenances, include all the appurtenances that may be required. If the size of a nozzle is not firm, specify several sizes. It is more important to specify the type and size of appurtenances than the exact number of each required. Those appurtenances which may be subject to changes as the project develops should be designated with a "QR" in the column provided on form BDC-33 for this purpose. The list sheets require the bidder to submit unit prices for the addition and deletion of these appurtenances. Finally, each appurtenance should be designated as "S", Contractor-furnished and installed; or "CS", Company- furnished and Contractor-installed.
Drawing GD-D-1086, "Instructions for Use of Form EF-33CR, include references to appropriate sections of the Tank Nlanual for discussion on the use of each appurtenance. Reproducible transparencies of BDC-33 may be obtained from Drafting.
As mentioned previously, the extra effort spent in completing the Tank and Appurtenance Schedule in all respects will save the Company money and the engineer many future problems.
Speeifica tion BF-S-1320 MODEL SPEClFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 2 of 15
REFERENCE DHAFVIN GS
The reference drawings listed on form BDC-33 for the appurtenances selected should be sent to bidders with the quotation request, and, when the order is placed, these drawings should be included as a part of the Purchase Order Contract.
TAN K SPECIFIC-!?'IONS
S~ecif icat ion EG-967
The specification applies to cone roof or open-top, welded steel tanks. It covers Company requirements that are in addition to, or modify, the requirements of API Standard 650.
Section 7.0 covers supplemental requirements. It is necessary to specify in the project specification which of these requirements will be applicable to the contract.
Additional comments regarding these supplemental requirements are as follows:
1. Note that Section 22.4 of EG-967 requires that such supplemental requirements be included as separate items in the bid.
For priming of plates, note that Section 7.2 requires that the COMPANY specify whether the primer is to be LZI or inorganic zinc. Specification SF-1011 calls for LZI if priming/painting is required. Both SF-1011 and EG967 are out-dated regarding selection of primer and topcoats for external painting. LZI (Lead-Zinc-Iron) primers are difficult to find now. Because of the lead components, they have been restricted to industrial uses, and few companies still manufacture them. SF-1011 is currently being revised. It will present primer topcoat and surface preparation codes to be able to identify painting requirements.
The ultrasonic examination requirements of Section 7.3 of EG-967 can be an effective technique to obtain higher quality welds, but it must be applied with caution. Since ultrasonic examination often will locate discontinuities that might be missed by radiography, application of Section 7.3 as written requires higher quality and more costly welding. The CONTRACTOR may decline to bid on this requirement or may bid a price that does not appear justified. (In such cases, it is suggested that consideration be given to mod~fying Section 7.3, so that the CONIP4NY pays on a unit price basis for any radiographs and for any resulting repairs).
4. The field testing requirements of this Section 7.5 are to provide further assurance that the hardness (and strength) of welds is not too high. This is to provide protection against sul fide stress corrosion cracking. It is. believed that tank CONTKACTOKS will strongly resist application of Section 7.5, although similar requirements are routinely applied to pressure vessels.
Specification BF-S-1326) MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND bjATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 3 of 15
It is recommended that Section 7.5 be applied to all tanks handling crude oil or any sour product or sour intermediate product. It is not necessary for known non-sour services such as gasoline, or sweet fuel oil. Future tank use should also be considered. Iuote that hardness checks do not apply to butt or groove welds known to be made with shielded metal arc (manual) electrodes of the E70XX or EGOXX series. Consult the Engineering Department, Materials Division if further definition is needed. Dependent on CONTRACTOR'S reaction, it may be appropriate to modify the requirements of Section 7.5 so that the tests are for information only and any repairs are paid for by the COMPANY on a unit price basis.
PLANT REGULATIONS
During the erection of the tanks, the Contractor will be required to conform to a variety of plant regulations applicable to the particular location. He must know the details of these when preparing his bid. Our plant regulations are available in a form which can be included with the quotation request.
OTHER DOCUMENTS
When the bidders prepare their quotations, they need to know the contractual terms and conditions that will apply to the contract if they are awarded the work. Therefore, sample forms defining the terms and conditions must be attached to the quotation request. This is done by the Purchasing Department. The following forms are typical of those used by Chevron U.S.A.
P D-5 2 Form of Contract P D-5 2 -1 Terms and Conditions GO-279-2 Certificate of Nonsegregated Facilities GO-279-3 Equal Opportunity Clause .
GO-279-16 Affirmative Action for Handicapped Workers PD-302 Sub-order Clause PD-37 lV1 Inspection Clause
SPECIFICATION
?'he following Model Specification shows a suggested forrnat for a typical tank quotation request. The scope may be reduced or expanded as appropriate for the particular circumstances by marking up the Model. Do not "cut and paste1'. The Engineer is to obtain a unique specification number and name for hislher project. Engineers should be careful not to include requirements in the specification which are already contained in API Standard 650, Specification EG-967, or other CORIPAN Y specifications.
Specificat ion BFS-1320 IMODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 4 of 15
1-he primary purpose of the specification is to t ie together and reference all the documents, specifications and drawings which describe and specify the tanks covered by the quotation request. They also provide a location for additional or modifying requirements. Finally, they clearly s ta te the informat ion that is required to be submitted with the Contractor's bid and set forth his obligations with respect to further in for mat ion a f te r a contract is awarded.
Spec i f i c a t i on BF-S-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION F O R
T A N K QUOTATION REQUESTS AN D MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 5 o f 15
IVIODEL SPECIFIC.4TION F O R 1-4NK QUOTATION REQUESTS ANL) MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
CONTENT
1.0 SCOPE A N D INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCHEDULE O F WORK
3.0 LIST O F APPURTENA4NC'ES
4.0 SPECIFICATIONS
5.0 COhSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
6.0 GUARANTEE
7.0 TEKB'IS O F P A Y MENT
8.0 QUOTATION KEQUIKEMEN'IS
9.0 INFORMATION REQUIKED FROM CONTRACTOR AFTER A W l R D O F C O N T R A C T
Specificat ion BFS-13269 MODEL SPECIFICATlOM FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 6 of 15
SECTlOiv 1 - SCOPE -4ND INTRODUCTION
1.1. CONTRACTOR shal.1. furnish all. labor, material, and equipment to design, fabricate, transport, and erect the fo1.lowing tanks a t COMPANY'S
7 w . Indicate Location u
Tank Nominal. Dia. x Ht. N o. Capacity, Bb1.s. F t. Type of Roof Service
55 x 24 Cone Freewater Knockout 11 11 I I
1 0 x 2 4 11 Pu mp Suction Reservoir
55 x 16 11 Wash Tank 11 I I 11
1.2 Refer to the following Tank and Appurtenances Schedules for a detailed
1.3 COMTKACTOK shall visit the site and ascertain the conditions under which the work will be done. Arrangements to do so can be made by contacting:
Include name, address and telephone
a plot plan or map showing location of tanks with respect to other facilities.
Note: Include site entry qualifications here or ensure contact person advises bidders.
Specification BFS-1329 MODEL SPECHFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND NATERHAL REQUISHTIONS
P a g e '7 o f 15
SECTION 2 - SCHEDULE OF WORK
2.1 CONTR4CTOK shall e r e c t the tanks in accordance with the following schedule.
ude pert inent information, such a s da tes on which tank foundations will be available t o contractor. Include required \ completion da tes if these a r e bidding
For multiple tank projects and critical, d i f f icul t schedules milestone d a t e s should be included.
SECTION 3 - LIST OF APPURTENANCES
3.1 The appurtenances included in the base price o f each tank a r e shown on each Tank -and -4ppurtenance Schedule by "S" for appurtenances furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR, "CS" for appurtenances furnished by COMPPiN Y and installed by CONTRACTOR, and "C" for appurtenances furnished and installed by COMPANY.
3.2 CONTK.4CTOR shall quo te unit pr ices for additions or deletions of appurtenances for i t ems marked "QK" on the Tank and Appurtenance Schedule; these pr ices shall incl.ude furnishing and installing the appurtenance on the applicable tank.
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Tanks shall, conform t o COMPANY Specification EG-967. In case of conflict, the order in which the documents of this con t rac t shall govern shall. be a s fol.lows:
a) This Specificat ion b) Tank and Appurtenance Drawings c) COMP4NY Specifications EG-967 d) API Standard 650 e) Other At tached Standard Specifications and Drawings
4.2 COlMP-4NY intends t o inspect tank erect ion and reserves the r ight t o inspect shop fabrication.
4.3 The a t t a c h e d Inspection Clause PII-37M is pa r t o f th is contract .
Specification BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERL4L REQUISITIONS
Page S of 15
4.4 CONTRACTOR shall comply with the plant regulations under paragraph 2.01 of Specification SF-1000 and the attached Safe Practices Guidelines.
regulations for the construction location. Emphasize H2S and hot work permit
4.5 Tank construction shall comply with the California Occupational Safety and Health Requirements (OSHA).
These apply to tanks erected in
4.6 The following provisions are modifications to Specification EG-967.
4.61 Radiography wi l l be by COMP-ANY.
Include here any other deletions, additions, or modifications to EG-967 that are appropriate. For clarity, state the specific paragraph of EG-967 to be changed and then set forth the new
Supplementary Requirements of Section
Specification BF-S-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERE4L REQUISITIONS
Page 9 of 15
SEC'TION 5 - CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
5.1 COMPANY reserves the right to let other contracts or perform other duties concurrently in or near the site of the work to be done under this contract. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOH to coordinate operations with those other contractors to avoid interferences and delays to the project a s a whole.
5.2 CONIPANY will have the right to use CONTRACTOll's staging, both fixed and mo-vable for inspections, provided COMPANY repairs any damage caused by COMPANY, and returns the staging including all cables and equipment attached to them to the locations in which they were left by CONTRACTOR.
5.3 COMP4NY will designate a Construction Representative who will administer the contract a t the erection sites.
5 .4 CONTKACTOK shall obtain a written permit a t least 2 4 hours in advance through the COMPANY'S Construct icn Representative before working in areas other than those areas predesignated by COMPANY as working areas.
5.5 CONTKACrIOR shall hydrostatically test tank shells in accordance with Paragraph 2.8 of Specification EG-967. Prior to hydrotest CONTRACTOR shall clean tanks of all debris to a broom-clean condition and shall close tanks for hydrotest after interior acceptance inspection. Tanks shall be hydrotested after mixers, valves and other appurtenances are installed.
5.6 CONTK-ACTOR shall vacuum test tank bottoms in accordance with Paragraph 2.7 of Specification EG-967. CONTlLACTOR shall test the tank roof by applying external vacuum to the seams using a soap film.
Specification BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 10 of 15
Sections 5.5, and 5.6, above yepresent the usual test arrangement. Modify if necessary to suit the particular project and site conditions. If there are limitations on water pressure, water temperature, supplies, quantity, or availability, these should be stated. Sornet~mes produced water a t 1700- 1'300 has to be used for testing. With temperature change volumetric shrinkage of water wil l appear as a sgnificant leak. -Accurate volume and temperature reading must be taken up to one week to ensure the tank bottom is
5.7 COMP-4NY will design piping tank fittings to permit reasonable movement of tank shell.
5.8 Tank foundations will be constructed by COMPANY to the tolerances specified in Paragraph 5.5.5 of API Standard 650.
5.9 CONrI'RACTOR wil l prepare the tank surface for internal coating in accordance with Section 2.0 Specification BF-S-1497.
5.10 CONTKACTOR will. internally coat tank with in accordance with Specification BF-S-1497.
5.11 The tanks shall be insulated by others.
5.12 CONTKACTOR shall externally coat tank in accordance with Specificat ion BF-S-1632.
5.13 CONTIIACTOR shall remove mill scale from the bottom plate (foundation side) by sandblasting to steel structures paint council (SSPC) Specification SSPC-SF6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) or by wheel abrating to the same degree of cleanliness.
Specification BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 11 o f 15
SECTION 6 - GU4R-4NTEE
6.1 Guarantee requirements are stated in Paragraph 27.0 of Specifiction EG-967.
SECTION 7 - TERMS OF P-4YMENT
Contractor shall submit payment terms with the Q.R.
Conditions (GO-2791, Paragraph 2.4 covers terms of payment in detail, and is consistantly used for all construction contracts. Purchase Order Contract Terms and Conditions (PD 52-I), Paragraph 2.4 indicates "Terms of Payments: as set out on the attached sheets." Western Region Purchasing (Bakersfield) nor rnally ask suppliers, fabricators, or contractors to quote on their terms of payments. The quoted terms are a starting point for negotiations by Purchasing and the bidder selected to perform the work. Purchasing normally attempts to elimate progressive payments, i.e. monthly invoices, and are successful for projects taking a few months. On larger projects the agreed terms normally involve paying Contractor 30 days after receipt
I of invoice 85% of the value of the material received and the work accomplished during the preceding calendar month. The invoice for such < I
payments shall include signed verification of progress by Company Construct ion Representative. The { balance of the contract price is normally to be pa~d upon test or inspection and ,:
Specification BF-S-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION RkQUESTS AN D MATEKJAL KEQUISITIONS
Page 12 of 15
SECTION 8 - QUOTA'I'ION HEQUIRELYIENTS
8.2 CONTRACTOK shall submit a firm price quotation for each tank complete in accordance with this Specification BF-S- , references and attachments.
8.2 CONTRACTOR may submit alternate quotations for other design bases within the scope of 4PI Standard 650 if this enhances the delivery of steel and/or results in a 1.ower tank cost. However, the tank diameters and heights may not be chariged.
8.3 CONTRACTOK shall. submit unit price quotations for the addition or deletion of the appurtenances on the Tank and Appurtenance Schedules that are marked "QR".
8.4 If CONTRACTOR cannot meet schedule dates specified in Section 2, he shall include with his quotation the schedule under which he can perform the work, including the earliest date for receipt of steel a t his fabricating plant.
8.5 CONTRACTOK shall clearly state in the quotation any exceptions to this contract specification. The use of CONT7RACTOR's standard forms will not be construed to be a clearly stated exception.
8.6 COMPANY reserves the right to accept or reject all. or any portion of the quotation.
8.7 As an alternate to reverse shingling as specified in EG-967, paragraph 2.2 (d)(l), CONTRACTOR shall quote normal roof shingling with seal welding of plates inside tank.
8.8 As an alternate to internal rafters, CONTRACTOK shall quote external rafters.
8.9 As provided in Section 7 of the Terms and Conditions, CONl'RACTORS proposed subcontract I ist follows:
Category of Work Subcontractors Name Calif. License No.
Spec i f i ca t ion BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION F O R
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 13 of 15
SECTION 9 - INFORiVI-4TION REQUIRED FZiORil CONTK-ACTOR -4F'IER AWARD
9.1 CONTHACTOE", shall comply with t h e r equ i r emen t s of Sec t ion 23.0 of Speci f ica t ion EG-967.
schedule. De le t e i t ems which a r e not
9.2 COMPAW Y will furnish CONTRACTOK with revised drawings showing appur t enance loca t ion and or ien ta t ion within th i r ty (30) days pr ior t o s t a r t o f fabricat ion.
9.3 CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY reco rds one comple t e reproducible t ransparency set of al l drawings for e a c h tank co r rec t ed for t h e as-built condit ion within th i r ty (30) days a f t e r comple t ion o f e r ec t ion of e a c h tank.
Specification BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUEST'S AND MATERIAL HEQ UISITIONS
Page 14 of 15
SECTION 10 - ATTACHMENTS iginator is to add revision chara
10.1 Specifications
Oil Storage Tanks, of welded construction with Cone Hoof or Open Top with Wind Girder. Steel Fabrication General Contract Specificat ion Internal Tank and Vessel Coating Thermal Insulation for Hot Storage Tanks
These are the required Tank and Appurtenance .> ( GT-F-27216 Schedules and site plan.
GT-F-27217 GT-F-27 2 18
10.3 Standard Drawings
Standara Tank Details Standard Baffle Plan for use with Breather
Valves Standard Materials for Tanks Constructed
to EG-967 Standard Tank Bottom Down off Elbow Standard Flush Type ?ank Shell Muzzle Standard Tank Bottom Combination Inlet/Outlet
Nozzle Standard Tank Bottom Snap Circumferential Stairways and Platforms
for Tanks Standard Insulation and Weatherproofing
-4ssembly Details for Hot Tanks Steel Stairs (PL) Standard Ladders and Guards Details and Installation of Standard Welded
Bosser and 11Iiscellaneous Connections Siphon Type Tank Water Dowoff Standard Stairs and Platforms
10.4 Other -Attachments
Specification BFS-1320 MODEL SPECIFICA'I'ION FOR
TANK QUOTATION REQUESTS AND MATERIAL REQUISITIONS
Page 1 5 of 1 5
Funnel Type Thief and Gage Hatch 24" x 36" Roof Manhole Standard Swing Pipe Thermometer Assernbly for Oil Storage Tanlts Combined Hatch and Breather for Non-Gas Type Tanks Elbow Outlet for Standard Shell Nozzles Handrails Standard 20" x 36" Shell Manhole for tanks Gager's Shelter 6" or 8'' Slotted Gage Well for Fixed Roof Tanks Combination Clearout and Water Draw Tank Swing Joint Support Swing Joint Supports Standard Insulation Item Numbers Standard Insulation and Aluminum Weather- proofing Details for Hot Tanks Standard Ladders and Guards (2 Sheets)
Safe Practices (Northern Calif. Div.) Form of Contract Terms and Conditions Certificate on Nonsegregated Facilities Equal Opportunity Clause Affirmative Action for Handicapped Workers Sub-Order Clause Inspection Clause
Bakersfield, California 1987
QUOTATION REQUEST SPECIFICATION NO.
E-FILE NO.
MR. L. M. MOORE, PURCHASING ATTENTION: A. E. BRAMLET:
P lease dbta in quo ta t ions for t anks for t h e p lant in Area in acco rdance with Speci f ica t ion BF-S- d a t e d
a t t a c h e d .
P l ease advise b idders t h a t t h e proposed work will b e shown in t h e field by t h e P ro jec t Engineer . Bidders a r e asked t o a t t e n d t h e b i d walk a n d mee t a t (Time) (Date) . Direc t ions t o t h e bid walk a r e shown on t h e a t t a c h e d map.
ngineer Furnish Ma
I t is understood t h a t b e f o r e bidders submit a quota t ion , t hey must visit t he job s i t e o f t h e work and appra ise t h e condit ions t o b e encountered during construct ion. Quest ions regarding t h e work involved o r a t t a c h m e n t s to th is l e t t e r should b e d i r ec t ed t o t h e P r o j e c t Engineer, , t e lephone (805) at t h e of f ice .
I t is desired t h a t th is work b e s t a r t e d by , a n d t h a t all work b e comple t ed by
Please ins t ruc t bidders to use t h e e n t i r e enclosed Proposa l F o r m for submit t ing bids. The proposed p r i ce for t h e work sha l l b e in s t r i c t acco rdance with t h e Specif icat ion, Proposa l Form, F o r m o f Con t rac t , F o r m o f Su re ty Bond, F o r m o f Acord C e r t i f i c a t e o f Insurance and Form o f C e r t i f i c a t e o f Nonsegregated Faci l i t ies . If b idders wish to t a k e except ion or propose a l t e r n a t e s t o t hese papers, p lease have them descr ibe in a s e p a r a t e proposal l e t t e r t he devia t ions proposed a n d indica te t h e ad jus tmen t t o proposed pr ice applicable t o e a c h deviat ion should w e e l e c t t o a c c e p t individual deviations. Deviat ions not described in a s e p a r a t e proposal l e t t e r will b e considered invalid.
Quotations shall be prepared on the enclosed Proposal Form in Section o f the specification and submitted in an envelope using the enclosed "Sealed Bid Do Not Open" label. All documents in Section must be completed and returned with the Proposal Form. Quotations shall be marked "Confidential Quotation No. .I1 ~uotat idns must be received a t 4800 Stockdale Highway in Bakersfield, CA by p.m. on to receive considera tion.
Please advise bidders that due to the possible presence of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) a t or near the construction location, all Coiltractor personnel working on Chevron property must maintain the ability to use supplied air breathing apparatus (i.e., be clean shaven) a t all times. This policy will stay in effect until a more defined procedure can be developed.
Please indicate your standard words on handling of California sales and use taxes, and use of materials of domestic manufacture only.
JAC/srg
Attachments
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J
. . ; ' '.-. 1.0 I L "STORAGE .TZUXS ' OF. :WELDED- CONSTRUCT I ON . . . . . \ . . . .
WITH FIXED ROOF OR OPEN TOP WITH'WIND GIRDER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT CHEVRON CORPORATION
SAPJ W O N , CALIFORNIA
MAY 1, 1986
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674 MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 1 OF 38
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674
OIL STORAGE TANKS OF WELDED CONSTRUCTION - WITH FIXED ROOF OR OPEN TOP WITH WIND GIRDER
CONTENTS
SECTION A
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL..........O.........ee.aa........s..e..a......e2 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL TANKS.........,......,..........4 REQUIaEMENTS FOR APPENDIX A TANKS.......,.,,........,.18 'REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS OF MODERATE
STRENGTH MATERIALS..,......,,,..,...,..,,,..,.,.....18 REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS OF HIGHER STRENGTH MATERIALS..................................l9
REQUIREWTS FOR LOCATIONS OR MATERIALS PRODUCED OUTSIDE OF U.S......................................Zl
SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS WHEN SPECIFIED..............22 REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS TO BE LOCATED IN SEISMICALLY ACTIVE AREAS............................27
SECTION B
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
21.0 SCOPE.................................................33 22.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BID.........................33 23.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT..........34 24.0 CONTRACTOR .REQ UIREMENTS...............................35 25.0 WORK AND MATERIAL BY COMPANY..........................36 26.0 UTILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION.........................37 27.0 GUARANTEE.............................................37 28.0 COMPANY REFERENCES....................................38
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALI FORN I A
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 2 OF 38
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674
OIL STORAGE TANKS OF WELDED CONSTRUCTION - WITH FIXED ROOF OR OPEN TOP WITH WIND GIRDER
SECTION A
TECHNICAL REOUIREMENTS -
GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This Specification covers requirements for material, design, fabrication, erection and testing for vertical, cylindrical, aboveground, welded steel storage tanks for internal pressures approximating atmospheric. Tanks are for operation under the conditions and for the performance of the functions specified herein and on the drawings and schedules attached to, and incorporated by reference in, the Contract to which this Specificaton is attached.
Conformance to API -- Standard
Tanks shall conform to API Standard 650 - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage (API-650), latest edition; to all legal requirements in effect at the tank locatiow' and to the additional requirements of this Specification. Supplements to API-650 issued through the date of the Agreement referenced in Par. 1.1 shall apply.
All tanks shall be marked, certified and provided with a data sheet as required by API-650.
1.3 Desiqn
Based on economic study, tank shells may be designed in accordance with the requirements of Appendix A within its limitations or may be designed for "moderate strength materials" (Groups I, 11, I11 or IIIA of API- 650, Table 2-3) or for "higher strength materials" Groups IV, IVA, V or VI of API-650, Table 2-3). The "variable design point method" of API-650, Par. 3.6.4 may be used except where prohibited by API-658.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 3 OF 38
When metal temperatures exceed 200F, the additional requirements of Appendix M of API-650 shall be applied in accordance with Par. 1.1.11. -
All shop assembled tanks shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with the additional requirements of Appendix J of API-650. The provisions of Par. 5.4.1 for elimination of spot radiography and for alternate test methods shall not be applied unless specifically approved in writing by COMPANY.
1.4 Specification Orqanization
This Specification is divided into Section A, Technical Requirements, and Section B, General Requirements. Section A is subdivided into eight sections, which contain the following requirements:
Section 2.0: Requirements applicable to all tanks, regardless of API-650 design basis;
Section 3.0: Requirements applicable only to tanks designed and constructed to Appendix A of API-650;
Section 4.0: Requirements applicable only to tanks designed and constructed of "moderate strength materials";
Section 5.0: Requirements appliczble only to tanks desiqned and constructed of "higher strength materials";
Section 6.0: Requirements applicable to all tanks, when the steel for such tanks is from mills located outside the United States;
Section 7.0: Requirements which are applicable only when specified in the Agreement to which this Specification is attached or where required by Par. 5.3;
Section 8.0: Requirements for tanks to be located in seismically active areas.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 4 OF 38
2.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL TANKS
2-1 Materials -
2.l(a) All materials for tanks shall be in accordance with the ASTM or API Specifications listed in API-650 and any further limitations of this Specification or shall require written approval from the COMPANY under the provisions of Section 6.0. ASTM-A537, Grade 2 and A-678, Grade B materials shall not be used.
2.l(b) When required by -1-650, or when required by attached Drawing GD-Dl047 or when otherwise specified by COMPANY, impact tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Pars. 2.2.8, 2.2.9 and 2.2.10 of API-650 modified as follows:
1) Test specimens transverse to the direction of major working axis shail be used.
2) The maximum test temperature shall be the tank design metal temperature specified on the Tank and Appurtenance Schedule (Form EF-33).
3) Lateral expansion and percent shear shall be reported for information only.
4) Unless the procedures of Pars. 2.2.10.2 or 2.2.10.3 of API-650 are specifically accepted in writing by the COMPANY, each plate as-rolled shall be tested in accordance with Par. 2.2.10.1 of API-650.
2.l(c) Controlled roiled plates (see Par. 2.2.7.4 of API-650) shall not be used without specific written COMPANY authorization.
2.1(d) Each steel plate shall be inspected for thickness. Six measurements are required; one at each corner of plate two inches from the edge, and two at center along length sides. Measurements shall be taken immediately upon arrival of plate from mill to the construction site or CONTRACTOR'S shop. Measurements shall be reported promptly in writing showing a
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 5 OF 38
sketch and both plste and sketch shall be marked for positive identification. If any readings below minimum required thick-ness are found, based on API maximum allowable under run, this shall be reported promptly to COMPANY Representative by telephone. In addition, COMPANY reserves the right to inspect tank plate thicknesses at the mill prior to shipping to the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall allow COMPANY ample time to make this inspection. Any plate with a reading below the minimum required thickness shall not be used without COMPANY approval. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for plate replacement in the event of rejection by COMPANY.
2.2 Desiqn
2.,2(a) . Shells
2.2(a)(l) Nozzles shall be located as shown on COMPANY'S Tank and Appurtenance Schedule. Shell plate layout shall be made such that shell joints clear all shell openings and reinforcement by a mininum of 6 inches, or 12 inches where required by API-650. Manhole locat ions may be changed slightly if necessary to clear joints.
2.2(a)(2) The top angle shall be fabricated with the horizontal leg outward for both cone roof and open-top tanks.
2.2(a) (3) For floating roof tanks, adjacent shell courses shall be offset to provide nominal alignment at the inside surfaces.
2.2(a)(4) Open top tanks shall have a wind girder in accordance with API-650 and additional requirements as below. (For intermediate wind girders see Section 4.2(c)). Design wind velocity shall be 100 mph unless otherwise specified. The wind girder shall be installed 3'6" below the top edge of tank. The wind girder shall be designed to permit passage of a painter's trolley.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ZNGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-963-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 6 OF 38
Further, for tanks greater than 920 feet in diameter, the top wind girder shall also be designed as a walkway with a minimum clear width of 24 inches. The outboard side shall have a handrail, midrail and toeboard in accordance with Drawing GF-M99645, except that when the wind girder has an appropriate vertical flange it may serve as a toeboard. Wind girders, also to function as a walkway, shall be designed for a vertical live load of 40 psf. Adequate drainage shall be provided on all wind girders serving as walkways or a19 wind girders having turned up vertical flanges.
2.2(a)(5) The ends of all shell plates which do not require shaping in accordance with Par. 4-1-3 of .VI-658 shall be -braken.
2.2(a)(6) COMPANY specified minimum corrosion allowances are indicated on the Tank Appurtenance Schedule EF-33. CONTRACTOR shall determine corrosion allowances available for (or to be added to) each shell course in accordance with the procedure defined below. The principal purposes of this procedure are:
' TO properly define available corrosion allowance when the "as built" thickness is established by the hydrostatic test thickness, by the minimum thicknesses of Par. 3.6.1.1 of API-650, or by a decision to use plate thicker than otherwise required.
0 For calculating corrosion allowance only, to recognize the COMPANY'S special treatment of joint efficiency and specific gravity for Appendix A tanks as defined in 2.2(a)(6)(a)(l) below.
To recognize COMPANY'S minimum retiring thickness defined in 2.2(a)(6)(a)(2) below.
CHEVRON CORPORA TI ON ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG- 96 7- 3 MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 7 OF 38
In no case shall the design corrosion allowance in a shell course be les than the COMPAh'Y specified minimum corrosion allowance.
The "as built" thickness and the design thickness shall satisfy all other requirements of API-650 and of this Specification.
The "as built" thickness is the nominal thickness or specified thickness of the plate as ordered and as erected.
For the purpose of this paragraph, corrosion allowance is not to be added to the design thickness. Design thickness is the thickness required for product loads and earthquake loads with corrosion allowance equal to zero. Unless otherwise specified (see Sections 4.2(c) and 5.2(a)), wind loads need not be considered.
2.2(a)(6)(a) For purposes of determining the appropriate corrosion allow- ~ n c e available for (or to be added to) each course, CONTRACTOR shall calculate the difference between the "as-built", shell course thickness and the greater of either:
2.2(a)(6)(a)(l) For Appendix A tanks a minimum design shell course thickness for product loads for purposes of determining corrosion allowance only shall be calculated as specified in Appendix A of API-650 except a 0.85 joint efficiency factor shall not be applied and the specific gravity may be less than 1.0, when the heaviest stock to be stored as specified by the COMPANY, is less than 1.0, or;
CHEVRON CORPORATIQN ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN W.MON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674 MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 8 OF 38
For all other tanks, the minimum design shell course thickness for product loads determined in accordance with the design rules of API-650 using the specific gravity of the heaviest stock to be stored, as specified by COMPANY.
2.2(a)(6)(a)(2) a m i n i m retiring shell course thickness of 0.100-in.
Computed differences shall be compared to COMPANY specified minimum corrosion allowances.
2,2(a)(6)ib) If the computed difference of 2,2(a)(6)(a) above exceeds the COMPANY specified minimum corrosion allowance, the di f f.erence computed in accordance with 2.2(a)(6)(a) above shall be indicated on the Tank and Appurtenance Schedule as the available corrosion allowance for the particular shell course.
2.2(a)i6)(c) If the computed difference of 2.2(a)(6)(a) above is less than the COMPANY specified corrosion allowance, "as built," shell course thickness shall be increased only to the extent that the CaWANY specified corrosion allowance exceeds this computed difference.
2.2(a)(7) For floating roof tanks, wind skirts or top-shell extensions and overflow drainage openings in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1 of API-650 shall not be provided unless approved in writing by COMPANY.
2.2(b) Bottoms
2,2(b)(l) The sketch plate over catch basins shall be 1/2 inch minimum thickness, and shall extend at least 12 inches beyond the outside edges of the catch basin.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986 PAGE 9 OF 38
2.2(b)(2) Water draw-off elbows installed in 1/2 inch sketch plates do not require reinforcement of the bottom plaLe.
2.2(b) (3) Protective plates or clips shall be installed under swing pipe ends, roof supports, and any other appurtenances that could strike bottom. Plates and clips shall be seal welded to the bottom with full fillet welds.
2.2(b)(4) Regardless of material group, tanks with capacities of 100,000 barrels or greater shall have butt-welded annular bottom plates that satisfy requirements specified in Par. 3.5 of API-650. Where erection is on a concrete ringwall, the CONTRACTOR shall notch -the ringwall to accommodate the .backing strip without visible distortion of Lhe bottom plates.
2.2(b)(5) All flanged connections in tank bottoms, including water draw-offs, shall be supported by approximately 1/2-inch thick bar welded to both the tank bottom and connection neck. Bar supports shall be located in vertical line with the bottom shell course and shall have a width equal to approximately 50% of the pipe O.D.
2.2(b)(6) When bottom cleanout connections are specified, sumps associated with these connections shall be located close to shell manhoies for easy access.
2.2(c)(l) To prevent rust streaks, all plates, clips and structural shapes on windgirders, floating roofs and tank shells shall be completely seal welded with a 3/16-inch minimum fillet weld. Unless otherwise specified, the bottom edge of all windgirders shall be completely seal welded to the shell with a 3/16-inch minimum fillet weld.
CMEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT S M RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674 MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 10 OF 38
%.2(c)(2) Tank and appurtenances shall be practical to clean, paint, insulate and maintain. Appurtenances shall have adequate clearances for these operations. Bracing and supports shall be minimized (e.g., diagonal bracing shall not be used under stair treads).
2.2(c)(3) Appurtenances and other details not covered by COMPANY'S standard drawings may be of CONTRACTOR'S design, provided they comply with applicable provisions of this Specification.
2,2(c)(4) Any tank heaters specified shall be designed to hold the product at the minimum storage temperature specified by COMPANY when the tank is 3/4 full. For design calculatians, CaMPANY will specify average wind velocity and minimum average temperature over an extended period of time. Tank manway heaters, if specified by COMPANY, shall be designed for removal without entry by personnel into the tank.
%.2(d) Fixed Roofs
Unless specifically approved in writing by COMPANY, fixed roofs shall have a frangible joint in accordance with Par. 3.5.1 of API-650. Additional requirements are as follows:
2.%(d)(l) Roof plates may be rectangular and of uniform width. Plates shall be laid in reverse-shingle fashion.
2.2(d)(2) Roof support columns shall be firmly guided to a height of at least 8 inches by 31'8 inch minimum thickness clips attached to the tank bottom.
Roof support column loads shall be adequately distributed where such loads are transferred to the tank bottom, either by a 3/8 inch thick plate or by structural shapes. Either method shall distribute the load over a square area, the plan dimensions of which shall be at least
I CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 11 OF 38
twice the major cross-sectional dimension of the column and shall be large enough to accommodate the column base where one is used. These plates or structural shapes shall be at least 6 times the bottom plate thickness from any joint in the bottom plates.
If pipe columns are provided, they shall be closed at each end by a method using full thickness welds to prevent fluid from entering the pipe.
2.2(d)(3) Roof rafters shall be located so as to clear all appurtenances.
2.2(e) Stairs Platforms
2.2(e)(l) As specified on the Tank ,and Appurtenance Schedule, stair and floating ladder treads and platform decking shall be either plain steel plate (subsequently to be painted with a non-skid coating by COMPANY - see Section 25.5) or hot dipped galvanized steel serrated grating. Checkered steel plate shall not be used. Only steel serrated grating shall be used in locations where there is considerable ice and snow. Serrated grating shall meet the requirements of Specification EG-398 and shall have bearing bars at least 3/16" thick. Stair stringers shall be sandblasted and primed in accordance with Specification EG-398 prior to installation of stair treads. If stair treads are bolted to stringers, only galvanized bolts, rivets, etc. shall be used. Unless otherwise specified, stair treads and platforms welded to stringers or tank shells shall be completely seal welded all around to minimize rust streaking. The number of field welds between galvanized grating and stringers shall be minimized. All field welds shall be thoroughly sandblasted or wire brushed where approved by COMPANY, and primed.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 12 OF 38
2.2(e)(2) A landing in the circumferential stairway at the wind girder level shall be provided where wind girders are designed as a walkway and equipped with a handrail.
2.2(e)(3) All platforms and stairs shall be constructed in accordance with the design details shown on Drawings GD-M13966, GA-D99639 and GF-M99645, and the requirements listed below. Materials shall conform to the requirements of Specification EG-398. Minimum headroom clearance shall not be less than 7'-0".
2,2(e)(4) All platforms and walkways shall be designed for a minimum load not less than 40 psf live load or 1000-pound concentrated load. Deflection under design loading shall not exceed 1/2 inch. The unobstructed width shall not be less than 30 inches normally and 36 inches in front of manways and similar openings. Gaps between floor plates resting on structural members shall be less than 1/2 inch. Adjacent platforms 12 inches or less apart in plan, or 18 inches or less apart in elevation shall be interconnected.
2.2(e)(5) Platform elevations shall be set to permit the tread and riser dimensions as shown on Drawing GA-D99639.
Stringers must be sandblasted and primed before attaching stair treads. The top flange of the stair channel stringers, at the base of the stair flight, shall be cut off at an angle of 45 degrees and ground smooth. Stairs shall be designed for a minimum load not less than 60 psf on the horizontal projected area. Deflection under design loading shall not be greater than 1/2 inch. A minimum vertical clearance of 6 ft. 6 inches plus the height of the riser shall be maintained as a minimum over the stairway as measured at the nose of the tread.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-9674 MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 13 OF 38
Stairs supported at grade shall be bolted to a concrete landing of 2 ft. 6 inches square minimum size with the bottom of the concrete a minimum of 6 inches below grade. In freezing weather climates the bottom of the concrete landing shall be located below the frost line. The top of the concrete shall be considered to be the first tread. All concrete used, whether for stair landing or stair support column foundations, shall be 3500 psi minimum compressive strength.
2.2(e)(6) Circumferential tank stairs shall have handrails in accordance with Drawing GA-D99639. All other stairs and platforms shall have handrails with midrails and taeboards in accordance with Drawing
. GA-M99645. Handrsils shall clear all obstructions by a minimum of 3 inches. Attachments to handrails should be avoided but where absolutely necessary they shall be made in such a manner not to obstruct proper use of the handrail.
2.2(e)(7) Stair treads on insulated tanks shall be supported with stringers on both sides and be spaced away from the tank shell a distance sufficient to install a full thickness of insulation. The stair stringers shall be supported with brackets that minimize insulation fitup. An inside stairrail is required, if gap between inside stair stringer and insulation exceeds 6 inches.
2.3 Weldinq
2.3(a) Except with specific written approval, welding processes shall be limited to shielded metal- arc (SMAW), submerged arc welding (SAW), gas tungsten-arc (GTAW), gas metal-arc (GMAW) or gas shielded flux core-arc (FCAW). GTAW, GMAW and FCAW shall not be used when wind velocities in the welding area exceed 5mph. Short circuiting GMAW shall only be used in the downhand flat and vertical uphill positions.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 14 OF 38
When using the FCAX welding process the CONTRACTOR must adhere to the following requirements: -
1. Only E6XT-1, E6XT-5, E7XT-1 and E7XT- 5 electrodes are allowed.
2. Only T-1 electrodes 1/16" diameter and smaller may be used for all position welding. Larger T-1 and T-5 electrodes (up to 1/8") are acceptable for welding in the flat position and horizontal fillet welds.
3. Short circuiting transfer FCAW is not acceptable.
4. Only uphill progression shall be used for vertical FCAW welding.
2.3(b) Weld rod or wire shall be selected so that the deposited weld metal does not exceed 95,000 psi tensile strength. When specified by COMPANY, this requirement shall be verified by hardness tests of production welds in accordance with Section 7.5. Unless specifically approved in writing by COMPANY the nickel content of the welds shall not exceed 0.6% nor shall silicon, chromium, molybdenum or vanadium be intentionally included beyond the limits established in AWS Spec, A.5.1 for E70 series electrodes. Alloy weld rods, such as low nickel rods may be necessary at design temperatures below O°F. COMPANY must approve the use of such alloy weld metal.
2.3(c) Unless specifically approved in writing by COMPANY, single pass butt welds and single pass bottom plate lap welds are not permitted. In addition, weld passes exceeding 3/4-inch nominal thickness are not permitted.
2.3(d) Welding procedure qualifications shall be in accordance with Par. 7.2 of API-650 and, where impact tests are required, in accordance with additional requirements as follows:
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-4 MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 15 OF 38
2.3(d)(l) All supplementary essential variable applicable to the procedure when notch toughness tests are required shall apply as specified in Section IX ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2.3(d)(2) When impact tests at the heat-affected zone are required, the test plate material shall represent the same grain size practice and shall be in the same heat- treated condition as the material to be used in production.
2.3(dj(3) All automatic or semi-automatic welding process qualifications shall include impact tests of the heat-affected zone regardless of the joint orientation or the .design metal temperature.
2.3le) When the base metal temperature or the atmospheric temperature is below 50F, the base metal shall be preheated in accordance with Par. 5.2.1.2 of API-650.
2.4 Other Fabrication Requirements
2.4!a) Completed tanks shall meet the dimensional tolerances set forth in Par. 5.5 of API-650.
2.4(b) In addition for open top tanks, the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters at any level shall not exceed 0.2% of the tank diameter.
2.4(c) All required stress reliefs shall be in accordance with Par. 3.7.4 of APP-650.
2.5 Radioqraphy
Radiographic requirements shall be in accordance with API-650 and the following:
2.5(a) Radiography shall be conducted promptly as tank erection progresses so that it may be used for quality control, rather than being used as a basis for acceptance after all welding has been completed.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J YAY 1, 1986
PAGE 16 OF 38
2.5(b) The density of all radiographs shall be in the range of 1.7 to 3.0. Fine grain, high definition, high contrast film (Kodak Type AA or equivalent brands) shall be used. Fluorescent intensifying screens shall not be used.
2.5(c) The minimum diagnostic length of each radiograph shall be 7 inches on three-way joint radiographs. The length of the film shall show the vertical joint.
2.5(d) Random radiographs in excess of the requirements of this Specification may be requested by COMPANY. ~ e f e r to section 22.4.
2,5(e) Location of areas to be radiographed shall be se1ected.b~ COMPANYIS.Field Representative.
2.5(f) In accordance with API-650 examination of welds by sectioning shall not be performed on any part of the tank.
2.6 Maqnetic Particle Examination
At least 20% of the length of automatic or semi-automatic welded vertical welds shall be examined across the width of side by the magnetic with the requiremsnt that brush contacts
the weld part icl
.s of Par shall be
plus 3/16 inch on each e technique in accordan . 6.2 of API-650 except substituted for solid
prods in the prod technique.
2.7 Testinq Tank Bottoms
Tank bottoms shall be vacuum tested by CONTRACTOR in accordance with method 1 of Par. 5.3.4 of API-650.
2.8 Testinq Tank Shells
All tanks shall be hydrostatically tested with water to full height by CONTRACTOR in accordance with method 1 of Par. 5.3.6 of API-658. Major debris shall be removed from the tank bottom prior to testing. Unless otherwise specified, COMPANY will furnish test water to the valve on the first tank to be tested. CONTR4CTOR shall be responsible for transferring water from one tank to another for further hydrostatic tests. COMPANY will furnish make-up water as required by CONTRACTOR.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-969-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 17 OF 38
The method of heating test water, if anticipated by CONTRACTOR, shall be subject to review by COMPANY (see Section 22.6). -
COMPANY will dispose of test water in accordance with CONTRACTOR'S schedule and directions. After hydrostatic testing, CONTRACTOR shall squeegee remaining debris, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign material from the tank bottom.
Anchor Boltinq Tanks
Tanks shall not be anchor bolted to a concrete foundation for resistance to earthquakes, overturning due to wind or, in accordance with Par. F.7 of API-650, for internal pressures unless specified or accepted in writing by COMPANY. When permitted, anchor bolts and attachment brackets shall be designed in accordance with the foll-owing.~equirements..
Anchor bolts, if permitted, shall be sized to resist the total overturning moment or uplift force less the total resisting moment due to the weight of the tank shell and the portion of the roof supported by the shell. The following requirements shall be incorporated into the design of the anchor bolt hold down system:
2.9(a) Anchor bolts shall not be attached to the tank bottom.
2.9(b) All loads shall be transmitted from the shell to the anchor bolts through stiffened chair type brackets of sufficient size and height.
2.9(c) Brackets shall be designed to carry 150% of the anchor bolt design load. The brackets shall also be designed so that stresses in the tank shell are held to suitable levels under the bracket design load.
2.9(d) Pretensioning of anchor bolts is not permitted and shall be prevented by use of compressible washers under double nuts or by other suitable means approved by COMPANY.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CAL'I FORN I A
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 18 OF 38
2.9(e) All applicable requirements of API-650, such as those of Pars. E.6 and F.7, shall be satisfied.
3.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR APPENDIX A TANKS
3.1 Materials
In accordance with Par. 1.1.3 of API-650 the nominal thickness of stressed components shall not exceed 1/2 inches.
The requirements of Section 2.1 apply to tanks designed and fabricated to Appendix A of API-650.
3.2 Radiosraphy
The provisions of Par. A.3.4 of MI-650 for the elimination of spot radiography shall not be applied unless specifically approved in writing..by COMPANY.
4.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS OF MODERATE STRENGTH MATERIALS
4.1 Materials
The requirements of this Section 4.0, apply to tanks or parts of tanks constructed of the "moderate strength materialsn which are defined as the materials of Groups I, 11, I11 and 111-A of Table 2-3 of API-650.
4.2 Drawinqs
4.2(a) All manways and flanged connections with reinforcing pads which are welded to tank shells or bottoms shall have full penetration welds between the connection neck and shell or bottom plate, and between the connection neck and reinforcing pad.
All manways and flanged connections with insert type reinforcement which are welded ta tank shells or bottoms shall have full penetration welds between the connection neck and insert plate.
A11 welds attaching connection necks and rein%orcing pads shall be inspected by magnetic particle methods, after stress relief (if any), in accordance with Par. 5.2.3.6 of API-650.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J KAY 1, 1986
PAGE 19 OF 38
4.2(b) Flanges for nozzles or manholes shall be either welding neck or slip-on. Corner welds, such as shown in -1-650, Figure 3-6, Detail€, shall not be used.
4.2(c) Intermediate wind girders shall be furnished when required in the new condition. All calculations to satisfy the need for intermediate wind girders shall be made in accordance with Par. 3.9.7 of API-650. The 't uniform' used in computing a transposed width as shown in Par. 3.9.7.4 of API-650, can be any thickness as long as this same thickness is used in computing maximum height of unstiffenes shell as described in Par. 3.9.7.1 of API-050. he average thickness method of Par. 3.9.7.2 of API-650 shall not be used.) Wind velocities shall be 100 mph unless otherwise specified. An additionaltabulation indicating the-maximum design wind velocity in the corroded condition without intermediate wind girders shall be furnished to COMPANY for review and further instruction before final design (See Section 22.8).
4.3 Radioqraphy
Where the design metal temperature is below -10F:
4.3(a) All vertical joints in plate 3/4" and thicker shall be 100% radiographed.
4.3(b) All three-way joints in shell courses with a hydrostatic test stress of 10,000 psi or more shall be radiographed.
5.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR TANKS OF HIGHER STRENGTB MATERIALS
5.1 Materials
5.l(a) The requirements of this Section 5.0, apply to tanks or parts of tanks constructed of "higher strength materialsw which are defined as the materials of Groups IV, IV-A, V, and VI of Table 2-3 of API-650.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
5.2 Desiqn
5.2(a)
5.2(b)
5.3 Weldinq
5.3(a)
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 20 OF 38
Subject to COMPANY'S specific written approval of CONTRACTOR'S supplementary specifications for the material, the minimum specified tensile strength of the material may be increased to 75,000 psi in accordance with Note 1 of Table 3-2 of API-650.
The requirements of Section 4.2 above apply.
Upper courses may be moderate strength materials in accordance with Par. 3.6.1.6 of API-650 and the additional requirements of Section 4.0 of this specification.
Stairways intermittently supported from the tank and/or supported by structures from grade may be substituted for the circumferential stairway of Drawing GA-D99639. The requirements of API-650 Par. 3.8.1.2 and Section 2.2(e) of this Specification shall apply. CONTRACTOR shall provide the complete installation including any support structures and foundations.
Unless specifically waived in writing by COMPANY, based upon previous experience, supplementary data in accordance with Section 7.4 below shall be furnished for automatic and semi-automatic procedures for vertical welds.
No vertical welds shall be made in the downhill direction except for wash passes on vertical welds on the outside of tanks.
All manual welds on the shell shall be made with low hydrogen electrodes.
Attachments to shell courses shall be in accordance with Pars. 3.8.1.2 and 5.2.3.5 of API-650.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 21 OF 38
5.4 Other Fabrication Requirements
5.4(a) Unless otherwise specified, any openings in bottom plates shall be prefabricated with any required reinforcement into the bottom plate. The prefabricated assembly shall be stress relieved.
5.4(b) Where design metal temperature is below -10F:
1) All vertical joints in plate 3/4" and thicker shall be 100% radiographed.
2) All three-way joints in shell courses with a hydrostatic test stress of 10,000 psi or more shall be radiographed,
5.5 Appurtenances
All mixers requiring support from tank shells shall have spring tie rods in order to adequately accommodate the differential movement between the mixer and the shell course from which it is supported.
6.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCATIONS OR MATERIALS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES
6.1 General
All requirements of this specification apply including those of Section 1.2 concerning all legal requirements in effect at the tank location.
6.2 Materials
6.2(a) For sources of materials outside the United States, national substitutes for the ASTM or API material specifications permitted by API- 650 and by this specification may be used, if approved in writing by COMPANY, providing that:
6.2(a)(l) The upper limit cf their allowable tensile strength does not exceed 90,000 psi.
6.2(a)(2) The certification requirements of Paragraph 2.1.1 of API-650 are satisfied.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 22 OF 38
6.2(b) For sources of supply outside the United States, specification sheets shall be furnished for all materials and shall include c-hemistry, mechanical properties, melting practice, deoxidation practice, deoxidation materials, heat treatment and grain size practice.
6.2(c) Unless specifically waived in writing by COMPANY for sources of supply outside the United States, all plate material, as rolled, which is 3/4-inch or greater in thickness shall be impact tested in accordance with Section 2.l(b) of this Specification. For all other plate material thicknesses, test data to demonstrate adequate notch toughness in accordance with Par. 2.2.10.3 of API-650 and Section 2.l(b) of this Specification based on past production from the same mill shall be submi tted to COMPANY .for review..
6.2(d) The requirements of Section 6.2(a), (b) and (c) above do not apply to G40.21 plate material produced in Canada.
SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS WHEN SPECIFIED
The following supplementary requirements apply only where specified in Section 5.3 or in the Contract to which this Specification is attached.
7.1 Pickled or Abrasive Blasted Plate
All plate shall be pickled or sandblasted in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Standard SSPC-SP8 or SSPC-SP6. Where an inorganic zinc primer is specified, the plate shall be abrasive blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10.
7.2 Pickled or Sandblasted and Primed Plate The picked or abrasive blasted external (convex) plate surface shall be primed to within 2 inches of the plate edges after rolling. Primers can be an inhibited alkyd (code P-7) or an inorganic zinc primer (code P-12) as specified by the COMPANY (see Drawing GF-S1103). Upon COMPANY' approval the external surfaces may be primed with an acceptable inorganic zinc primer before rolling, provided that the tank diameter exceeds 135
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 23 OF 38
feet and no degradation of the primer (cracking, etc.) after rolling is evident.
A
7.2(a) Acceptable formulations for inhibited alkyd primers are Napko 416, Glidden 5210 , Carboline GP-10 or GP-20, Reliance REL-KYDE 11, Cook 391- N-083 and International CPA038 or CPA039. If these are not obtainable, alternates must be approved by the COMPANY. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2 mils.
7.2(b1 Acceptable brands of inorganic zincs for application prior to rolling are Porter (Zinc-Lock 3511 or Carboline (Carbozinc-11). Film thickness shall be 2-1/2 mils minimum to 3 .mils maximum dry film thickness. Preconstruction inorganic .zinc primers, maximum dry film thickness 1-mil,-may be provided if .approved by the COMPANY.
7.2(c) Acceptable brands of inorganic zinc for application to plate after forming or application in the field after tank erection are Porter (Zinc-Lock 3511, Carboline (Carbozinc-111, Napko (177-521, Cook (GALVA-PAC 1011, Arneron (Dimetcote 6) or International (QHA 189/188). If these are not obtainable, alternatives must be approved by the COMPANY. Film thickness shall be 2-1/2 mils minimum to 5 mils maximum dry film thickness.
Any priming within 1-inch of edges prepared for welding shall be thoroughly removed.
7.3 Ultrasonic Examination
The COMPANY will make partial Ultrasonic examination of locations in vertical and circumferential shell welds which would not normally be radiographed. All examinations will be made in a manner and time which will not interfere with CONTRACTOR'S production work. Ultrasonic examination will be in accordance with Par. 6.3 of API-650. The extent of examination will be dependent upon results but normally will not be less than 10% of the length of applicable welds.
Where unacceptable ultrasonic indications are found, CONTRACTOR shall either examine the indication by
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-3 MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 24 OF 38
radiography or make a repair. Final judgment of the indication for acceptance shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements for radiography,- Where additional radiographs result from ultrasonic indications and the indications are subsequently found to be acceptable, the COMPANY will pay for such additional radiographs at the unit cost quoted by CONTRACTOR.
7.4 Supvlementary Weidinq Procedure Tests
7.4 (a) General
7.4(a)(1) These supplementary tests apply only to automatic and semi-automatic welding procedures for verticai welds.
7.4(a)(2) In addition to the requirements for -procedure qualifications of this Specification, the plate material used shall be to the same specification and from the same plate source as will be used in the applicable tanks. These supplementary tests shall be made as soon as possible after the award of the contract and in any event before applicable welding starts.
7.4(a)(3) The test procedures described below are intended to define the scope of the tests. Some critical details are omitted or are subject to modification dependent upon preliminary results, limitations of test equipment, design metal temperature, judgment of the laboratory conducting the test, etc. Recommendations for improving the tests are requested. A definition of the actual test procedure shall be furnished for COMPANY'S approval.
7.4(b) Hardness, Tensile Impact Tests
The requirements for tensile strength Item (1) and impact values Item (4) shall be as specified below. Other data resulting from these tests is for COMPANY'S information and there are no contractural quanitative requirements on the test data furnished.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 25 OF 38
7.4(b)(l) An "all weld metal" tensile test shall be made with the specimen centered at the 1/4 weld thickness position as thickness permits. Minimum tensile strength shall be as specified for the plate material. Maximum tensile strength shall be 95,000 psi.
7.4(b)(2) Diamond point micro hardness surveys shall be made of the weld and the heat affected zone (HAz) cross section to define the areas of maximum and minimum hardness.
7.4(b)(3) ~hotomicrographs of the weld and weld heat-affected zone shall be furnished at sufficient magnification to show structure and grain size.
7.4(b1(4) Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be made at design metal temperatures. Minimum energy requirements for full size specimen shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2.3. Generally, specimen shall be full size and shall be located dependent upon the results of 2) and 3) above and the following.
7.4(b)(4)(a) A series of specimen centered on each of two planes parallel to the plate surface shall be taken with the notch at 1/8 inch increments from the center of the weld to 1/4 inch inside the fusion line and at 1/16 inch intervals from that point to 1/4 inch outside the HAZ.
7.4(b)(4)(b) Sets of 3 specimen shall be taken from 4 locations suspected of representing minimum toughness. For example at weld centerline and in the HA2 near the fusion line and surface. Two locations shall be in the weld and two locations shall be in the HAZ. Reduced size specimen may be used for half of these locations if it appears desirable to more thoroughly investigate a location closer to the surface.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY I, 1986
PAGE 26 OF 38
7.4(b)(4)(c) COMPANY reserves the right to specify large size toughness tests such as the British Standard 5762 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) test, the Wells-BWRA wide plate tests for welds or the Robertson wide plate test for base material.
Supplementary Weldinq Test Requirements for All Tanks
Section 2.3(b) requires that weld rod or wire be selected so that deposited weld metal does not exceed 95,088 psi tensile strength. This requirement shall be verified by tests of all automatic welds and certain manual welds as follows. Manual groove and butt welds made with E68XX or E70XX series electrodes need not be tested. Manual fillet and lap weIds exposed to the tank contents shall be tested. Manual fillet and lap welds not exposed to the tank contents and made with E60XX or E70XX electrodes need not be tested.
7.5(a) For groove welds at nozzles and manways, and for butt welds, hardness determinations shall be made with a Telebrineller, Eiten or equivalent portable hardness tester. The hardness determinations shall be made at, or near, the center of each weld and wherever practical on the surface of the weld seam that is exposed to the process environment. When necessary, the surface on which the impression is to be made shall be filed, ground, machined, or polished with abrasive material so that the edge of the impression shall be defined clearly enough to permit accurate measurement of the diameter. Care should be taken to avoid overheating or cold working the surface.
7.5(b) One hardness determination shall be made for every third groove weld and for every third butt weld, if any, at nozzles and manways. One hardness determination shall be made for every second vertical butt weld. One hardness determination shall be made for each 100 ft. of circumferential butt welds, and at least 25% of the determination required for vertical and circumferential butt weld shall be taken at the "T" joint intersection or at manual repair locations.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 27 OF 38
7.5(c) All hardness determinations shall be taken promptly as the work progresses and reported to the COMPANY. -
All determinations indicating a hardness of 200 BHN or less are acceptable. Should any determination be in excess of 200 BHN, that fact shall be reported immediately to the COMPANY so that its representatives can participate in further investigations of welds suspected of high hardness. In such cases, three additional hardness determinations shall be made in the suspected area. If the average of these three determinations exceeds 205 BHN or if any one of these three determinations exceeds 215 BIB{, the weld shall be considered re j ected.
7.5(e) The COWANY -will cansider proposals .by the CONTRACTOR for further testing of welds rejected under Item (d) above, such as removal of samples for laboratory chemical analysis and hardness tests,. to confirm the suitability of the weld. However, unless such proposals and the results of further tests are accepted in writing by the COMPANY, welds rejected under Item (dl above shall be removed and replaced.
Fillet and lap welds cannot be tested by the above procedures. Thus for each fillet or lap weld procedure used on the inside of the tank the procedure shall be simulated by preparing a groove weld test specimen at three times during the course of production for each tank (i.e., at the start and approximately at the 1/3 and 2/3 points of fabrication). Hardness determinations shall be made and accepted or rejected on each test specimen in accordance with Items (a), (c), (d), and (e) above.
8.0 SEISMICDESIGNOFSTORAGETANKS
Tanks to be located in seismically active areas shall be designed for earthquake ground motion in accordance with Appendix E of API-650 with the additional requirements specified below.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 28 OF 38
8.1 Seismic Zone and Factors for Essential Facilities and Site Amplification -
8.l(a) The seismic zone 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be used shall be as specified by the COMPANY.
8.l(b) The essential facilities factor, I, shall be taken as 1.0 except for tanks where the COMPANY specifies use of a 1.5 factor for emergency post earthquake services.
8.l(c) The site amplification factor, shall be as specified by the COMPANY.
.-8.2. Anchored Tanks
Anchorage of tanks.is.not permitted except -in accordance <with-x7Section 2-53.
8.3 Upper Shell courses-
8.3(a) When the seismic design dominates over hydrostatic pressure in determining the thickness of the lowest shell course, each upper shell course shall be checked for seismic loading in accordance with this paragraph.
8.3(b) The seismic overturning moment at the bottom of each upper shell course may be determined as follows:
Where:
M, = Overturning moment in foot pounds at the desired elevation, level X.
W,, = Total weight in pounds of the tank shell above level X.
X, = Height in feet from level X to the center of gravity of W,.
X = Height in feet from the bottom of the tank shell to level X.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 29 OF 38
XI, and X2, = Multiplying factors measured in feet determined in accordance wifh subparagraphs (c) and ( d ) . These factors are products of the height from level X to the centroids of the lateral forces above level X times the ratio of the lateral forces above level X to the total lateral forces, for the impulsive and convective forces, respectively.
Z,I ,Cl ,C2, Wr, WI, W2 and H, are as defined in Appendix E of API-650.
.~...8,:3.d.c) .; ;XIx .may.*be.i.determined ...,b y..multiplying H .by the . :: . :;ratio:xi;(~ ,obtained -by;:the.:f 01-lowing .-f 0rmulas:
DIH t1.333 and XIH (1 -0.75DIH:
32(1- x/m2 - 16(1- XIM (DIH) + 3 (DIH)~ XIx/H=
16(4 - DIH)
DIH (1.333 and XIH > 1-0.75DIH:
8.3(d) X2x may be determined by multiplying H by the ratio X2,1H obtained by the following formulas:
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 30 OF 38
8.3(e) The maximum longitudinal compression force in each upper shell course may be determin-ed as follows:
Where:
b, = Maximum longitudinal shell compressive force at level X in pounds per foot of shell circumference.
. .
-+ .- wba- =.:'Weight \.of ::ta~k~:'"sheF~~zabove~~~leve'l X and -.;.,~t;,pr tion-of::roof :?suppar te;dby.rshell. in
- :-I ~:.r~mn;ds~pe.r,?2~Eoo tm'f~i'sheTk~c,ixcumEer ence,
8.3(f) The maximum allowable longitudinal compressive stress in each upper shell course, bJlZt,, may be determined from the formulas in Par. E.5.3 of API-650 except substituting ( H - X ) for H and t, for t .
Where:
T , = Thickness in inches, excluding corrosion allowance, of the shell at level X.
8.4 Roof Columns
8.4(a) Columns supporting the roof of fixed roof tanks should be designed to resist the lateral forces caused by sloshing of the liquid contents and by the acceleration of the mass of the column and the added mass of the liquid. Columns designed for seismic loads should preferably be of pipe closed at each end to prevent fluid from entering the pipe. Such columns may be designed in accordance with the following paragraphs.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERNG DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 31 OF 38
8.4(b) The columns should be designed for a lateral force which may be taken as a uniform lateral load along the height of the column as follows:
Where:
q = Total lateral force in pounds per foot of column height
ql = Lateral force in pounds per foot of column height due to acceleration of the column and added mass of the liquid determined in
- . . - .rh accordance:: ,wikh*subpar+graph-:( c f
- . . ~q~?=-:~aterdl.-force.?in:rpaunds~per;-~foot.l.of.- column ; :.. ; : :-i~'he~t:+&~~~.ta~-sl~~hi pg.cf ;?l%qu idmll.t ent s
- : determined. - i ~ i mcc0fdanc.e-.w'ith .subparagraph
8.4(c) The lateral force q, may be determined as follows :
Where:
w, = The unit weight of the column in air in pounds per foot of height.
Dc = Diameter of column in feet.
8.4(d) The lateral force q, is composed of a drag force q,, and an inertia force q,which are not in phase. These forces may be approximated and combined as follows:
qd =(ZIC2)2 GDD, [*I cos2 (nYIDI
ql =ZICzGDc2[25.0 + 125.0 (D/H)/ cos ( n Y / D )
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 32 OF 38
Where Y = horizontal distance in feet from the center of the tank to the center of the column.
When. q i > 2 q d : q 2 = q i
- . . . . . . 4 . ) - ~*~h~::.-~tank:~columns~:~shou9d~~e:,d%si~gned.sfsr .-.the - . ;L. vertical7 .sgppor t. ;load;. togetlerxwi th ' the lateral
. . . . - . r l ) .... :&loaB.+deter&gd;inxacc~~&gwe ;~wikh_:the abcsv-e, -. . d . . . r: ,.:A: ~ ~ e ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ n g ~ s t r e s s e s ~ - S ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C I ~ - ~ ~ C e ~ d ~ ; ~ ~
. . allowable.. stresses - specifkedin Par. .3.6.2 6% API-650 increased by one-third.
THIS PAGE ENDS SECTION A - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 33 OF 38
SPECIFICATION EG-967-J
OIL STORAGE TANKS & WELDED CONSTRUCTION WITH FIXED ROOF OR OPEN TOP WITH WIND GIRDER -
SECTION 11
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
21.0 SCOPE
Section B of this Specification covers supplemental requirements relating to purchasing and defines the -
- division of work and responsibility between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR,
- - 22.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BID
22.1 CONTRACTOR shall submit the following information with quotation:
22.l(a) The ASTM, API or other national specification of the steel proposed for the shell courses, the bottom and the roof. If any materials are to be from sources outside the United States, the source shall be stated.
22.l(b) The estimated dates for the start of erection and completion of erection for the entire contract.
22.2 CONTRACTOR shall describe the types of automatic or semiautomatic welding procedures he intends to use.
22.3 CONTRACTOR shall state number of weeks after award of contract that he (a) will submit the drawings required by Section 23.2, and (b) will require receipt of his drawings after COMPANY'S review. COMPANY will normally require three weeks for review.
22.4 CONTRACTOR shall include, as separate items in his bid, the costs for these certain items of work under Section 7.0, Supplemental Requirements, as specified.
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT Sm RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 34 OF 38
CONTRACTOR shall include, as separate items in his bid, the cost of required radiographic inspection and the unit cost for any additional radiographg requested by COMPANY under Section 2.5(e). COMPANY reserves the right to specify in contract the options of:
(a) Radiographic inspection by CONTRACTOR, or
(b) Radiographic inspection by COMPANY or COMPANY'S agent.
22.5 CONTRACTOR shall include, with the description of any extra work necessary under Section 24.1, the cost of that extra work if performed by CONTRACTOR. Any such work shall not be performed by CONTRACTOR unless it is authorized by COMPANY.
2 2 - 6 If CONTRACTOR anticipates that-heated water may be required for hydrostatic tests, he shall include, as a separate item in his bid, the total cost of heating this water.
22.7 CONTRACTOR shall submit the additional cost if any, for wheel-abrading, blasting or pickling all tank bottom plates to remove mill scale on both sides. Finished surfaces shall be in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council Standard SSPS-SP8 or SSPS-SP6. COMPANY will specify in contract if bottom plates are to be cleaned.
22.8 CONTRACTOR shall submit the wind girder tabulation required by Section 4.2(c).
22.9 CONTRACTOR shall be prepared to submit the data required by Section 6.2 within two weeks of a specific request by COMPANY.
23.3 INFORMATION REQUIRED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
23.1 CONTRACTOR shall provide, within four weeks after award of fabricati shall be complete
contract, reproducible transparencies cf .on and construction schedule. The schedule itemized to program sequential steps in the cycle, including:
23.l(a) Preparation of sub-orders;
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 35 OF 38
23.l(b) Dates material and equipment will arrive at site;
- 23.l(c) Time required for erection;
23.l(d) Date tank will be ready for testing;
23.l(e) Size and number of erection crews proposed.
Monthly progress reports shall be prepared, starting with the issue of the above schedule.
CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY'S review a reproducible transparency of drawings showing tank details. Plate layout, any necessary relocation of manholes, manhole and nozzle details, appurtenance details and structural details shall be shown. COMPANY'S approval of these drawings does not release CONTRACTOR from its responsibilities, under the Contract to which this.Specification is attached.
When Sect mill be s
mate ion 6 test ubmit
rials are furnished und . 2 , or when impact test reports shall be submi ted concurrent with mat
.er the provisions of ing is performed, tted. Reports shall erial shipment.
23.4 Welding procedure specifications and qualification reports shall be submitted for COMPANY review three weeks prior to use of the procedure in production welding.
23.5 Hardness tests on production welds required by Section 7.5 shall be promptly reported to COMPANY as work progresses.
24.0 CONTRACTOR REOUIREMENTS
24.1 CONTRACTOR shall visit the site of the work, shall familiarize himself with COMPANY'S safety rules, shall review COMPANY'S plans for site preparation and tank foundations, and shall determine whether or not access to the tank site will be suitable for his equipment and materials. If access is unsuitable, CONTRACTOR shall describe work required to make access suitable. (See Section 22.5).
24.2 The start of tank erection by CONTRACTOR shall constitute an acceptance of the foundation with
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
respect to levelness affecting his work. the ability of the of the tanks and the settlement.
drain COMPAN oundat r cont
SPECIFICATION NO. 36-967-9 W.Y 1, 1986
PAGE 36 OF 38
age, 'Y wi ions ents
and other factors 1 be responsible for to support khe loads without adverse
24.3 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing adequate clearances for all appurtenances and internals and for the total structural adequacy and mechanical operation of the completed tanks. (See Section 25.1)
24.4 CONTRACTOR shall deliver all materials and equipment to and from site and shall do loading and unloading.
24.5 All welding procedures, operators and welders to be employed in the fabrication and erection work shall be qualified as required by API Standard 650 and the additional provisions of this Specification. COMPANY'S Field Representative nay specify retesting if in his opinion a welder's work is unsatisfactory. Costs of this retesting, if performed satisfactorily, shall be borne by COMPANY or, if unsatisfactorily, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. If a welder's qualification tests are out of date, costs of retests shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
24.6 When CONTRACTOR performs radiographic inspection (see Section 22.4), CONTRACTOR shall provide, at his own expense, equipment adequate for viewing and evaluating radiographic film at the job site.
24.7 CONTRACTOR shall furnish any blinding plates necessary to temporarily close tank openings for hydrostatic tests.
24.8 CONTRACTOR shall test all tanks in accordance with Par. 5.3 of API-650 and Sections 2.7 and 2.8 of this Specification.
WORK AND MATERIAL BY COMPANY
25.1 COMPANY will furnish drawings showing general layout of appurtenances and orientation of tanks. Any necessary modification to agree with plate layout shall be referred to COMPANY for approval. (See Sections 2.2(a)(l) and 23.2.)
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 37 OF 38
25.2 COMPANY will furnish permits giving CCNTRACTOR access to the tank site for delivery of material and movement of equipment. Access to site and materials storage area will be designated by COMPANY.-
25.3 COMPANY will furnish and install the tank foundation, catch basins, and other design features which are part of the tank grade. COMPANY'S work will include preparation of surfaces for tank bottom plates.
25.4 COMPANY will furnish and install all valves that are to be installed on the flanged or screwed shell and bottom outlets of the tanks.
25.5 COMPANY will prepare all surfaces, except to the extent that Section 2.2(e), Section 7.1 or 7.2 and Section 22.7 apply, and paint the tank and appurtenances after the completion sf work by CONTRACTOR,
UTILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION
26.1 CONTRACTOR shall provide chemical toilets or other similar facilities approved by COMPANY and shall maintain these for the use of his employees. Facilities shall be located as directed by COMPANY'S Field Representative and shall be removed by CONTRACTOR upon completion of the work.
26.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide drinking water for his employees.
26.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide all power required to drive construction equipment. CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for safe procedures in the use and fueling of motor-driven equipment and in storage of fuel.
26.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide any compressed air facilities that he may require.
VENDOR guarantees that each item provided under the Agreement to which this Specification is attached (a) will meet the requirements of the Agreement and (b) will otherwise be free of defects in design, material and workmanship. As to the items originally provided, the
CHEVRON CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SAN RAMON, CALIFORNIA
SPECIFICATION NO. EG-967-J MAY 1, 1986
PAGE 38 OF 38
gusrantee shall apply to discrepancies and defects that are discovered within the shorter of 12 months after beina placed in operction or 18 months after being receiveddat the jobsite. If corrective work is performed on an item under this guarantee, the guarantee shall also apply to discrepancies and defects in the corrective work that are discovered within the shorter of 12 months after the corrected item is again placed in operation or 18 months after completion of the corrective work. These guarantee terms shall be extended for any period that an item cannot be operated as a result of discrepancies or defects in any item provided by VENDOR. The guarantee shall apply whether or not designs, data or information are provided, reviewed or approved by COMPANY, but shall not apply to failures caused by subjecting the item to conditions more severe than those described in the Agreement.
COMPANY shall notify VlNDOR in writing, or by telephone or telex confirmed in writing, whenever-COMPANY discovers a discrepancy or defect covered by this guarantee. VENDOR shall promptly propose a method of correcting the discrepancy or defect involving the least loss of operating time. However, the proposed method need not involve costs of overtime labor or air freight, except to the extent that VENDOR was required to incur such costs in providing the original item. COMPANY, in its sole discretion, may select VENDOR" proposed method or any other method of correcting the discrepancy or defect. VENDOR shall perform the corrective work in accordance with the selected method. COMPANY shall reimburse VENDOR for any difference in cost to VENDOR between the selected method and the proposed method.
28.3 COMPANY REFERENCES
The following drawings referenced herein are a part of this Specification:
THIS PAGE ENDS SECTION B - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TANK MANUAL ORDERING DAT.4
SAMPLE LIST SHEETS
PART I - SCOPE AND INTRODUCTION
1.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, material, and equipment to design, fabricare, transport, and erect t h e following tanks a t COMPANY'S
Tank No. -
dicate Locati
Nominal Capacity, Bbls.
750,800 750,800 750,000 750,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 390,000 250,000
80,000 - 80,000 30,000 1 5,000
110,000 110,000
Dia. x Fit. Ft.
290 x 64 290 x 64 290 x 64 290 x 64 260 x 64 260 x 64 260 x 64 260 x 64 260 x 64 210 x 64 180 x 56 102 x 56 102 x 56
67 x 48 60 x 30
120 x 56 120 x 56
Type of Roof
Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Double Deck Cone Pontoon Pontoon
Service
Crude Oil Crude Oil Crude Obl Crude Oil Crude Oil Crude Oil Crude Oil Crude Oil Crude 0 il Crude Oil Bunker Cutter Cutter Heavy Oil Fresh Warer Ball as t Ballast
1.2 Refer t o the following Tank and Appurtenances Schedules for a detailed description of t h e t a n k s
CT-F-272 1 5-0 Tanks T 1 through T-10 CT-F-27216-0 Tanks T-11 through T-14 CT-F-272 17-0 Tanks T-15 through T-17
1.3 CONTRACTOR shall visit t h e site and ascertain the conditions under which the work will be done. Arrangements t o do so can be made by contacring
TANK MANUAL ORDERING DAT.\
EXHIBIT A
GENERAL PLANT REGULATIONS
1.0 Prior t o commencement of work, CONTRACTOR shall become familiar with rhe following plant regulations. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cam pliance with these regulations.
1.01 Admission O n t o Premises of COMPANY
(a) COMPANY'S Construction Representat ive will inform CONTRACTOR of t h e ga te through which his employees shall en ter and leave premises of COMPANY.
(b) CONTRACTOR's employees shall be admined t o COMPANY'S premises only af te r display of ei ther (i) CONTRACTOR's badge whenever CO MPANY's Construction Representat ive has approved the use of such badge, for example in t he case of major construction jobs, or (ii) COMPANY pzss badge, in all other cases.
When required, COMPANY pass badge will be issued by the G a t e Guard t o each em ployee of CONTRACTOR upon entering CO MPANY's premises each day and shall be surrendered upon leaving COMPANY's premises. CONTRACTOR's foreman or his delegated representat ive shall identify each of CONTRACTOR'S employees to the G a t e Guard at the t i m e the passes a r e issued each day representat ive shall identify each of CONTRACTOR's employees to t he employees. CONTRACTOR shall notii y COMPAN'fs Construction R e p r e e n t a t i v e of t h e individual responsible for identifying CONTRACT OR'S em ployees.
(c) Passes for vehicles will be issued to d r iven of motor vehides used in con- nection with CONTRACTOR's work. Limited p a r h n g for privase cars of CONTRACTOR'S employees will be provided. Access shall be restr icted ro designated routes. CONTRACTOR shall inform COMPANY'S Construcrion Representat ive of t h e motor vehicles equipment CONTRACTOR will use including any trucks used for material deliveries from outside of CO MPAN'fs premises.
(d) CONTRACTOR's drivers shall drive a r e f u l l y over designated routes, ob- served speed limiis and sto'p signs, and park only in designated areas. COMPAN'fs Construction Representat ive will designate routes and parking area. The COMPANY assumes no responsibility for damages to cars, trucks, or other vehicles which belong t o the CONTRACTOR, s u b contractors or CONTRACTOR's em plo yees--when driven or parked on COMPANY'S premises.
(el Mechanical equipment tha t is not f i t t ed with pneumatic t i res will not ke a allowed t o travel on paved COMPANY roadways. CONTRACTOR mus; sat isfy COMPANY that t he equipment he proposes t o use is operable over all COMPANY roadways and bridges. CONTRACTOR shall repair any damage t o such existing roadways and bridges caused by his operations.
Standard Oil Company af California, Western Operations. Inc.
Forward all correspondence, invoices, and related documents to F'urchasing Department.
Comr tract
CONTRACT NUMBER AND PREFIX
555 Market Street, h Francisco, CA 94105 1 I P.O. Box 743, b Habra, CA 9063 1 r I
1 - STANDARD OIL COMPANY O F CALIFORNIA, WESTERN OPERATIONS, INC., hereafter referred to as COkl-
PANY, and the undersigned CONTRACTOR, hereby mutually agree on 1 9 .
that CONTRACTOR shall perform for COMPANY, at or near
County of State of
the work set forth in the attached cheets dated which bear the above contract number and prefix and in the specifications and drawings referred to therein and attached thereto as an improvement to real property by affucing thereto whatever materials are involved therein so as to become an integral part of such real property, under the Terms and Conditions, pages 2 , 3 , 4 and 5 hereof, and in accordance with said sheets, :pecifications and drawings, which T m ::nd Conditions and sheets, specifications and drawings are part of this agreement.
COMPANY shall pay CONTRACTOR a compensation of
The work shall be commenced
diligiently prosecuted, and completed
A payment and performance bond in terms and executed by a surety company satisfactory to COMPANY shall be
furnished to COMPANY in the sum of (NO bond required unless an amount is entered above.)
Standard Oil Company of California, Western Operations, Inc. Purchasing Department
CONTRACTOR (See Note)
BY WITNESS
CONTRACTOR'S State kcense No. (Where Required By State Law)
NOTE: If CONTRACTOR is incorporated, execution shall be by an authorized officer of the corporation and corporate seal affixed and attested to by The Secretary or Assistant Secretary. I f CONTRACTOR :s nor incorporated, signatures should be witnessed by an employee of COMPANY, if practicable: if not, by a disinterested ?ar:>..
f ERMS A N D C O N D l f IONS
I. PERFORMANCE O f M E WORK
I. 1 Definitions
1.11 The term "work" as used in this Agreement meanr unless the context otherwise requires, all work to be periormed by CONTRACTOR under this Agrermrnt.
1.12 The term "Facility" as used in this Agreement means the product of h e work, such as an improvement to real p r o p e r r . designs or data.
1.13 The term "material" or "materials" as iised in this Agreement means all matenal, supplies and equipment to be rncorporzrcc into the Faciliry.
1.14 The term "affiliate" as used in &is Agreement means Standard Oil Companv of California or any companv in wnrch Standard Oil Company of California owns direcdy or indirecdy at least 51 percent o i the shares ent~t lcd to vote at a peneral ciection o: d k c t o n .
1.15 The terms "indemnitec" and "indemnitees" as used in this Ageement mean respectively COMPANY. one of its ~ i f i l i ~ t c s or the w n t or employee of COMPANY or one of its affiliates and all of them.
1.16 The terms ' b b c o n m c t o n " and "vendors" as used in this Agreement mean nrbcontracton or vendors of any tier.
1.2 Independent Contmctor: CONTRACTOR shall be an independent contractor, maintaining complete control over CONTRACTOR'S men and operations
1.3 Specifications: CONTRACTOR shall perform the work, including the provision of materials, in accordance with :he specificattons and exhibits (if any) which are a part of this Agreement and such additional drawings and explanations as COhfP.4NY rnav prgvide :O
CONTRACTOR from time to time ta detail and illustrate the work.
1.4 Permits: Unless otherwise prov~ded in this AgrecmenL CONTRACTOR shall secure all permits. make all cash and other de:osirs. provide aU bon& and give all notices r q u i n d by law in connect~on with the work.
1.5 Items to Be Provided by CONTRACTOR: Unless othenwlse provided in this Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall provide d l rnatenai.. utlities, consumable ~ ~ p p l i e s , tools. consuuction equipment, and labor, including mpen~s ion , necessary for d ~ e complet~on o i the work.
1.6 Safety Measures: CONTRACTOR shall perform the work in accordance with safe practices. taking all reasonable precati-ons :o protect the Faciliry and adjacent facilities. workmen and the public and providing. where reasonably necessary, barners. p a r d s . temporary bridges, lights and watchmen. Whlle on the premises of COhlPANY or ~ t s affdiates all of COMPANY'S safety rules shall k strictly observed; in particular. snoking shall be limited to such locations and occasions as are specifically authorized in w n t ~ n e by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall not perform or permit any act on the premlses of COMPANY or its affiliates which involves a iin or explosion hazard. including welding, torch cutting and disposal of debns by burning, without prior wntten consent of CC:lP.ANY.
1.7 Supptien
1.71 COMPANY may nominate bidden for the supply of certain items of material. CONTRACTOR shall request bids on these items from the nominees, and may o b m n arch other bids as CONTRACTOR may elect
l.72 COMPANY may have available for sale certain materials not products of COMPANY. COhTRACTOR shall purchase , u i t materials offered by COMPANY and its des~gnated affiliates as long as such material is suitable and 1s comprutively pr~ced.
1.73 When the work inchdes purchasing certain materials. CONTRACTOR shall be fuily responsible for orderine. sxpeditine, nxeiving and safeguarding (subject to the provisions o f Section 5.3 of these Terms and Conditions) all such rnatenais. ana :'or conducting all competitive bidding by m d negotiations with the vendors thereof and for paying for materiais and eniorclng o i warranties. unless otherwise provided in this Agreement.
1.8 Labor
11.81 CCNTRACTOR shall employ labor from that available in the viciniry of work, and in accordance with the terms oiempioy- ment prevailing in tl13t vicinity, to the extent that i t is pract~cable and consistent with the amely and eificiec! prosecuuon o i Me work.
1.82 CONTRACTOR shall use all reasonable efforu to avoid any disturbances in the ex~sting labor situation which wlll adversely affect the business of COhlPANY, its affiliates or other contracton working in the area.
1.9 Carriers: In connection with wansportation of purchased materials. CONTRACTOR shall give consideration to, but shdl not be limited to. use of carriers recommended by COMPANY.
Z COMPENSATION
2.1 Changes: COMPANY may make "Changes" by adding to, omitting or deviating from the requiremenu of this A g ~ e m e n r In :he event COMPANY issues any written directive which is not identified as a Change but which CONTRACTOR considers to be a Change, CONTRACTOR shall so notify COMPANY in writing within 10 days after recelpt of such directive. If no such tunely notlce is given, CONTRACTOR shall proceed in accordance with such directive without any adjustment in compensation. If C051PANY originally identrfres the directive as a CY~nge, or if CONTRACTOR gives such timely notice and COMPANY aerees that such direcave is a Change. CONTRACTTOR shall wiii!;n 10 days after giving such nonce or after receipt of the directive advise C O ~ ~ P A N Y o i its proposed adjustment in compensation and COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall attempt to agree In ~ v r i t ~ n g on an appropnsne adjustment in compensation resulting from the Change. After such agreement 1s reached, CONTRACTOR shall proceed u ~ t h !he Change. However. if such notice is given o r if COhlPANY originally idenofied the directive as a Change. and in e~ ther lnsrance COMPANY and CONTRACTOR fall to agree on whether or not arch directive is a Change or fail to agree on an aopropnate adjustmr711 in compensation. then COMPANY may issue a wntten request for CONTRACTOR to proceed in accnrdancr w ~ t h such directive without such agrremeni CONTRACTOR shall comply with such written request, but such compliance shall not prejudice eiMer party's claim that the directive is aChange or, as the case clay be. claim for an appropnate adjusnnen~ In sompensatisn. i t e r the written request to proceed IS issued. anv adjustment which is to be made to the compensation shall be determ~nea rn accordazce with the Exhibit - Compensation Adjustment (GO-279-7).
~axcs: L'UNIKAL'IUK shall pay, and CONTRACTOR's compenu?:on provided for hereunder includes an dlowance for, dI State, Federal and other payroll taxes, including corlrr~but~ons ind taxes ~ s x s s e d qainsr emolovees on wages earned. In connecrion w ~ r h the work. and shall make all r-poru rcquired by governmenu1 3uthoritles. CONTRACTOR snail riso pay, and CONTRACTOR':, compenwtjon provided for hereunder includes an 9ow:ace for, m y and dl other cues now or nere~.;'ter imposed bv anv Egvern- m e n d ruthonr). upon. measured by or inc~dent to chc pcrform3ncc o i hi ' : Agreccnnt or LCI? purchase. ;;crag?, ,lse or consumotlon by the CONTRACTOR of materials. utilitie3, consumzblt: supplies. tools or consrrucrlon cr. .?merit used in the performance o i rhis Agreement. uniess L!C applicible Idws ~pecifically provide that slch tax be paid by COhlPA?. :
2.3 Acceptance of Facility: When prov~sion is rnadc by [aw ior recording Notice of Completion. COMPANY mav Indicate its ~ c c e p ~ ~ - of the Facility by recording such Notice: otherwise Acceptance shall be on the date COMPANY aives wntten nouce to CONTRACTOR that i t u sausfied that the Fac~lity has been completed in accordant: with all requirements contained in this Ageement. Acceptance by CC!4?AHY or payment hereunder shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR of any obligat~on or I~ab~ii!y under this Agrremenr
2.4 Terms of Payment: As set out on the attached d~eets .
3. DELAYS
3.1 Site Readiness: CONTRACTOR shall ascertain from COMPANY that the site is ready before rending rnaterials or workmen thereto.
3.2 Delays. Suspensions and Extensions: COMP.ANY may rcqulre CONTRACTOR to suspend performance hereunder cornpietely or partially for whatever length of time COMPANY may e l e c ~ The time for completion shall be extended by each penod that CONTRACTOR is delayed by (a) COMPANY or another independent contmctor who is directly responsible to COhiPANY (unless such delay is due to CONTRACTOR'S default for example, as provided in Sections 4.1 and 4.2 of these Terms and Conditions); (b) an act of God or the elements; (c) any other cause beyond CONTRACTOR's reasonable c o n e d : or (d) a labor disturbance.
3.3 Damage Due to Delays and Suspensions: COMPA:<Y shall not be liable for any damages, dirctt consequentla1 or otherwise, suffered by CONTRACTOR due to delays and suspensions. but where CONTRACTOR is not in default CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to reimbursement for reasonable direct costs caused by delays and supensions to the ex tent such delays and suspensions are caused by COMPANY and orher independent contractors who are directly responsible to COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall be obligated to proceed with the work notwithstanding a dispute on reimbursement: such action shall not prejudice either party's claim with respect to r c i m b u m e n L
4. INSPECTION, CONDEMNATION, STOPPING WORK
4.1 Inspection
4.11 Inspe~tion by COMPANY: COMPANY may visit and inspect the work and mater.als. or any part thereof. at all times, and CONTRACTOR shall provide safe and proper facil~ties therefor. CONTRACTOR shall at all times during working hours keep a competent man in the immediate vicinity of the work areas to receive communicanons from COMPANY and to supervise the pd'ormance of this Agreement When COMPANY dctermines that a work area is unsafe, COMPANY may stop the part of the work affected u n d the unsafe condition is comcted.
4.12 Inspection by CONTRACTOR: Whenever any part of CONTRACTOR'S work depends on existing work or work or material provided by C O Y P A F or o h e n , CONTRACTOR shall inspect and measure such other work or material and promptly notify COMPANY of each defect or discrepancy in such other work or material which may render it unsuitable for proper execution of CONTRACTOR's work or proper functioning of the Facility. If CONTRACTOR fails to notify COMPANY'S representative of any such defect or discrepancy before performing CONTRACTOR'S dependent work, and such defect or dkr rpancy wwld have been discovered in the course of a reasonably thorou* visual inspection and measurement COMPANY may condemn the work or rnatenal involved and CONTRACTOR shali correct such defect or discrepancy on the u m e basis as if it were defective work by CONTRACTOR under Section 4.2 of thew Terms and Conditions.
4.2 Condemnation: COMPANY may condemn materials provided by CONTRACTOR and all parts of CONTRACTOR's work which are unsound or d e f e c a c or fad in any way to conform with the requiremenu of this Ageemenr CONTRACTOR shall begin to remove and replace such materials or work within 24 hours after receiving notice thenof from COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs involved in the removal and replacement of such materials and work and in the repur and replacemcnt of any other rnaterials and work nccessuily damaged by such removal and nplacrment. If CONTRACTOR is requested by COMPANY to uncover m y part of the Facility for inspect~on, me cost of uncovering and covering any such part not specifically requiring inspection under this Agreement shall be borne by COMPANY unless the part so uncovered is not in compliance with the rcquir-menu of this Agreement.
4.3 Taking Over and Stopping Work
4.31 Should CONTRACTOR default in any way in the performance of this Agreement, including failing. refusing or neglecting to supply sufficient material to be suppiied by CONTRACTOR hereunder, or tools, o: properly skilled workmen to complete the work with reasonable diligence, for 5 days after written notice of such default to CONTRACTOR, COMPANY may, at any time thereafter, take over and complete the work. The cost to COMPANY of completing the work shall be deducted from Lhe unpaid part of CONTRACTOR's compensation. If such cost exceeds any such amount, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse COMPANY for such excess cost. The zcnon by COMPANY of tztking over and completing the work shall not constitute a waiver of or election among any other rights or remedies that COMPANY may have against CONTRACTOR.
4.32 Should CONTRACTOR or its creditors seek relief under any insolvency law, or CONTRACTOR be adjudged a bankrupt, COMPANY may at any tune thereafter terminate this Agreement and take over and complete the work as provided in Section 4 3 1 of these Terms and Conditions, except that any payments due from CONTRACTOR to subcontractors or vendors in connection with the work may be made by COMPANY to such s u b c o n ~ ~ c t o r s or vendors. and be dducred from the mounrs otherwise due to CONTRACTOR.
4.33 COMPANY may. in its absolute discretion, stop me work at any time, but where C O N T R A O R is not in defznlt, COMPANY shall pay CONTRACTOR for all parts of the worr: done, including materials provided, in conformity with the requirements of this Agreement, plus an amount for reasonable and verified costs ofCONTR.4CTOR incurred in preparation for the pans of the work not yet performed and in shutting down his operauons hereunder, plus art amount for a reasonable part of the profit CONTRACTOR would otherwise have earned: provided, that the amounts payable under this Section 4.33 hall in no went exceed the unpaid part of CONTRACTOR's compensation.
5. LIABILITY
5.1 General Liability: CONTRACTOR shail indemndy snd save harmless h e indemnitees from and qalnst any and aU !oss, i imaze. injury, liability, and claims thereof for injun to or dearh o i a person, lnciuding an employee o i CONTRACTCR or an indemn~rer, sr for loss of or d m a g e to property !except rroprrry subject in Secnons 5.2 2nd 5.3 s i rhese T e n s .;na Coilditionsl, resuitlnq direczv or indirectly from CONTRACTOR'S periorrnance of Air Agreement. iniluding. but not limlted to. thc use bv CONTRACTOR si staging or othsr equipment prov~ded by CO>IPANY or othen. pardl less of the negligence of. and regardless o i whether lilbliiy without fault is imposed or sought to be imposed on. one or more of the indernn~tees, except to d ~ e e.xtent that such ~ n d r m n ~ r ) . ;s void or otherwise uneniorceable under appiicable law in effect on or validly retroactive to rhe date of rh~s Agreement and exce3t where such loss, damage. injury, liability or claim is rhe result of active negligence or wilful misconduct of an lndemnitee and is no: contributed to by any act oi. or by any omission to perform some duty imposed by law or contract on, CONTSACTOR. :LS
subcontractor or either's agent or employee.
5.2 Liability for Property of COMPANY and Its Affiliates: CONTRACTOR shall be liable to COMPANY and iu arfiliates ior anv loss o i or damagc to the property of COMPANY and its affiliates (other than the property subject to Section 5.3 of these Terms a d Conditions) resulting directly or indirectlv from CONTRACTOR'S performance of this Agreement resardless o i the negligence oi COMPANY, its agents, employees. and affiliates. except to the extent that such liabil~ty is void or othenvtse unenrorceaole under applicable law in effect on or validly retroacwe to the date of this Agreement: provided. however. that CONTRACTOR'S iiabiiir.- under this Section 5.2 shall be limited to the applicable insurance which CONTRACTOR carries or has others carry and wh~ch shall not be less than that provided in Section 6 of these Terms and Conditions.
5.3 Liabiiity for the Facility and Materials: CONTRACTOR shall exercise due care and diligence in the performance of this Ageement and in the c m and protection of the Facllity and materials. At COhlPANY's option, CONTRACTOR shall reconstruct. repair or n p l a a any part of the Facility or materials lost or damaged by any cause whatsoever, including but not limited to those referred to in Section 3.2 of these Terms and Conditions. wherever wid loss or damage occurs including loss or d m a g e to materials whlle in transit. In such went COMPANY shall reimburse CONTRACTOR for the costs of such reconstnrcnon, repair or replacement in e x a u of 51.000 for each occurrence or in excess of the coverase of any applicable insurance which CONTRACTOR may elect ro carry or have o then carry, whichever is greater. except costs incurred in reconsmction, repar and replacement of work or mater~ds mbject to condemnation by COMPANY prior to loss or damage (whether or not such condemnation was effected) under Section 1 . 2 of thew Terms and Conditions. and except cosrs incurred in order to meet the guarantee(si, if any, contained elsewhere in this A p c m m t CONTRACTOR also shall be paid 3 reasonable profit on that part of arch reconstruction. repair or replacement for which cost reimbursement is made. COMPANY shall not be liable for loss or dunage to construction equipmen& tools. temporary structure& temporary excavations or supplies owned or used by CONTRACTOR or its abconuac ton .
5.4 Compliance with Laws and Reqlauons: CONTRACTOR shall.comply with dl laws, regulations. decrees. codes, ordinances. resolutions, and other acts of any governmental authority, including Federal and State labor and tax laws. which are appiicaoie ;o this Agreement and CONTRACTOR'S performance hereunder. and shall indemn~fy and save COMPANY and its aifiliates harmless from and apinst any and all 10s. damage. injury. liability and c l m s thereof resulting directly or indirectly from CONTXACTOR's f d u m t o d o so.
5.5 Liens: CONTRACTOR shall discharge at once or bond or otherwise secure against all liens and attachments which are filed in connection with the work and shall indemnify and save COMPANY. its affiliates. and the owners of the premises on which the work is performed harmless from and against any and all 1 0 s . damage, injury liability and claims thereof resulting directly or indirect!). from such liens and attachmenu.
5.6 Patent Rights: CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save COMPANY and iu affiliates harmless from and aiainst any and all loss. damage, injury, liability and claims thereof for any patent infringement resulting directly or indirectly from CONTR.4CTOR's performance of the work, including provision of material and designs by CONTRACTOR, and use of tools and other equipment bv or for CONTRACTOR in any connection therew~th.
5.7 Cos* and Attorneys' Fees: COKTRACTOR shall promptly pay (a) to any indemnitee all costs and attorrreys' fees incurred by such indemnitee resulting directly or indirectly from any and ail loss, damage, injury, liabiiity and claims lor which CONTRACTOR is obligated to indemnify such indemnrtee pursuant to Sections 5.1, 514. 5.5 or 5.6 of these Terms and Conditions, and ib) to COMPANY all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees in any legd action in which COMPANY or its affiliate prevails, in whole or UI part. brought against CONTRACTOR based on a breach of this Agreement
6. INSURANCE
6.1 Insurance Required: Without in any way limiting CONTRACTOR'S liability pursuant to Sec t~on 5 of these Terms and Condidons. CONTRACTOR shall maintain the following inarrance:
6.11 Workmen's Compensation and Employen' Liability Insurance as prescribed by applicable law, including insurance coveriq liability under the Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Act a d the Jones Act, if applicable.
6.12 Without in any way dfectingCONTRACTOR's obligations pursuant to Secrion 6.11 of these Terms and Conditions. d marine work is to be performed hereunder. Protecnon and Indemnity lnarrance. including cwerage for injuries to or dearh o i m a t e n , mates and crews of vessels used in the performance of this Agreement The limits o i liability of such inmrance sku not be las than S500,000 per occurrence.
6.13 Comprehensive General Bodily Injury Liability Insurance. Such insurance shall include the following coverages: Broad F o m Conaactual Liability, Personal Injury Liabliity, Completed Operauons, and Producu Liabdity. The limrts of babllity o i arch insurance shall not be less than 5500,000 per occurrence.
6.14 Broad Form Roperty Damage Liability Insurance. Such insurance shall include the following coversges: Broad F o m Contractual Liability. Cornpleted Operations. and Products Liability. and shall expressly cover property of COMPANY and its affiliates other than that referred to in Section 5.3 af these Tenns and Conditions. The h i t s of liability of such insurance shall be not less than 5 1 00,000 per occurrence.
6.15 Automobile Bodily lnjury and Roperty Damage Liability Insurance. Such insurance shall extend to owned, nonowned. and hired automobiles used in the performance of this Agreement The l i i u of liability of arch insurance shall be not less than S250.000 per person/SSOO,OM) per occurrence for Bodily Injury and 5 100.000 per occurrence for Property Damage.
6.2 Evidence of Insurance: CONTRACTOR shall - before commencing the work - provide COMPANY with certificates or ot'ler documenlary evidence of the above insurance, satasfactory to COMPANY.
6.3 Policy Endorsements: The above insurance ,*ail include a requirement that the insurer provide COMPANY with 30 davs' 'unrten notlce pnor to thc etTecrrve date of any cancellanon or rnatenal change of the insurance. The insurance spec~fied In Section 6.1 1 si these Terms and Conditions hat( contain a waiver of subrogadon aganst the indemnltees. The insurance speclfied in Sect~ons 6.12. 5.13.6.14 and 6.15 of these l'enns an4 Conditions shdl
(a) name the indemnitees as additional insureds; (b) provide that said insurance is primary coverage with respect to all insureds; and (c) contlln a Standard Cross Lizbility Endorsement for Severability of Interest Clauses.
ASSIGNMENT: Neither this Agreement nor ?roney due CONTRACTOR hereunder shall be assigned. wblet or @ansferred in whole or In part by CONTRACTOR, except w ~ l h the pnor wri!ten consent of COMPANY, and any attempt to do so without arch written consent i b ~ l be void.
CONTRACTOR5 LNDER~TAYDING: Subject to any express provisions elsewhere in this Agreement. it is understood that CONTRAL70R, as a result of careful examination. IS satisfied 3s to the nature and location of the work, the conformation and strucmre o i the ground, the character, quality and quandty of the rnatenals to be used, the character of temporary equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecunon of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matten wh~ch cou'ld in any wav adfect the work under this Agreement No representations by or oral agreement with any agent or employee of COMPANY, e ~ t h e r before or after the execudon of this Agretment. shat( affect or modify any of CONTRACTOR'S nghts or obligauons hereunder.
RENEGmIATION ACT OF 1951: If Section 104 applies to this Agreemen& this Agreement shall be deemed to contain all of the provisioru required by wid Section.
RECORDS: CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors and vendors shall maintain m e and correct sets of records in connection with the work and all transactions rehted thereto. CONTRACTOR and its subconrr~ctors and vendors shall retain all a c h records for a period of not less than twenty-four (24) months after Acceptance of the Facility.
No director. employee or agent of CONTRACTOR or of any subcontractor or vendor of CONTRACTOR shall give or receive any commission, fee. rebate, or gift or entertainment of sign~ficant cost or value in connection with the work, or enter into any buslnels arrangement with any director. employee or lgent of COMPANY or any affiliate other than as a representative of COMPANY or its affiliate. without COMPANY'S prior written agreement. CONTRACTOR shall prornplly not~fy COMPANY of any vldation of this paragraph and any consideration m i v e d as a ~ s u l t of such violauon shall be paid over or credited to COMPANY. Any nprewntatne(s) authomed by COMPANY may audit any and ail records of CONTRACTOR and any such subcontractor or vendoi' in connection with the work and dl transactions related thereto for the sole purpose of determining whether there has been compliance with this paragraph.
If CONTRACTOR'S compensation under this Agreement is determined in whole or in part on a reimbursement of costs bas~s, the costs to be reimbursed shall be only those reawnably necesary to perform the work in an efficient manner in accordance with the time schedule required. COMPANY may from time to Lime and at any time after the date of this Agreement until rwenty-four (24) monlhs after Acceptance of the Facility, make an audit of all records of CONTRACTOR and its subcontracton and vendon In connection with di costs reimbursable under this Agreement Such audit may also cover CONTRACTOR'S procedures and controls with respect to the costs to be reimbiirsed. Upon completion of this audit COMPANY shall pay CONTRACTOR any compensanon due CONTRACTOR hereunder as shown by the audit Any amount by which the total payment by COMPANY to CONTRACTOR exceeds the amount due CONTRACTOR as shown by the audit shall be returned to COMPANY. Items not covered by reimbursement but by such compensation as fvted percentages or fmcd lump sums shall not be a b j e c t to audit under this paragraph.
CONTRACTOR shail assist COMPANY in making the above audits.
CONTRACTOR shall require. and ha l l require at( subconmctors and vendors to require, in all agreanents in connecnon with the work the agrrement of the parties to the provisions of this Section.
HEADINGS: Heading of Sections and other parts of this Agreement are for quick reference only and are not to be constnaed as p a n of this Agreement. In some instances a Section or part contains provisions not covered by the heading thereof; in other instances, a Secnon or part contains provisions that an described in the heading of another Secdon or part.
The Certificate of Nonsegregated Facilities (Form GO-279-2) signed by CONTRACTOR and the Equal Opportunity Clauses ( F o m GO-279-3) arc attached h n e t o and arc a part of this Agreement
The following applies to any penon who engages in the business or acn in the capacity of a contractor within California:
Conhacton are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractor's State License Board. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the registrar of the board whose addres is:
CONTRACTOR'S STATE LICENSE BOARD 1020 N STREET SACRAMENTO, CALIFORMA 95814
The right of either party to require s h c t performance shall not be affected by any prior waiver or c o w of dealing,
CERTIFICATE OF NONSEGREGATED FACII-ITIES
CONTRACTOR certifies that he does not and w ~ l l not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not and will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated iacililies are maintained. CONTRACTOR understands that the phrase "segregated facilities" includes facilities which are in fact segregated on a basis of race, color, creed, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. COhlTRACTOR understands and agrees that maintaining or providing segregated facilities for his employees or permitting his employees to perform their services at any locations, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained is a violariori of the Equal Opportunity Clauses required by Executive Order No. 11 246 of September 24, 1955, and the regulationsof the Secretary of Labor set out in 33 F.R. 7804 (May 28, 1968) . CONTRACTOE
- further agrees t,hat (except where it has obtained identical certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) it will obtain identical certifications from propose:: subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provis~ons of the Equal Opportunity Clauses; that it will retain such certifications in its files, and that it will forward the following notice to such proposed subcontractors (except where the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods):
NO-[ICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFICATIONS OF NONSEGREGATED FACII-ITIES
A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities as required by the May 9, 1967, order on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of I-abor 132 F.R. 7439, May 19, 19673, and as required by the regulations of the Secretary of I-abor set out in 33 F.R. 7804 (May 28, 1968) and as they may be amended, must be submitted prior to the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clauses. The certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period ii.e., quarterly, semi-annually or annually).
BY CONTRACTOR OR CONIPANY
TITLE
ADDRESS DATE
CITY, STATE, & ZIP CODE
Return to:
Attention:
EQUAL OPPORTLJMTY CLAUSES
Unless exempted by Federal law, regulation or order, the following terms and conditions shall apply durlng the ?e:- fo rmnce of thls contract:
A. The provisions of subsections (1) t h r u u b (7) of Section ";31,, Executive Order : '1243 of September 2 1 , i965. as amended by Executive Order 11375 of Octuber 13, 1967, and as subsequently amended, are incorporated herein '2:: reference. (For contracts u i 550,OO ur inore, said subsections ( I ) through (7) are aiso set forth below ~lnd made a par1 of this contract.)
(1) ' K a CUN'IUCTOR will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of r x z . color. religion. sex, or national origin. The CONTRACTOR will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race. color. re!igion. sex, or national origin. Such action shdl inciude, but not be limited to the following: Empioyment. upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination: rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeshp. The CONTRACTOR agrees to post in ccn- spicuous places, available to employees and applicants for empioyment, notices to be provided by the contractme officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
(2) The CONTRACTOR will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR, state that a11 qudified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religon, sex, or national origin.
(3) The CONTRACTOR will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a col!ccrive bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the CONTRACTOR'S commitments under Secrlon 202 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24. 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.
(4) The CONTRACTOR will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965. and of ?he rules, regulations, and relevant orden of the Secretary of Labor.
(5) The CONTRACTOR will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orden of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books. records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
(6) In the event of the CONTRACTOR'S noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of t h s Agreement or with any of such rules, regulat~ons, or orders, this Agreement may be cancelled. terrmnated or suspended iri whole or m part and the CONTRACTOR may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11346 of September 24. 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24. 1965. or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
(7) ' K e CONTRACTOR will include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orden of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 74, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The CONTRACTOR will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, That in the event the CONTRACTOR becomes involved in, or is threatened with. litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the CONTRACTOR may request the United States t o enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.
B. CONTRACTOR agrees that if the amount of this contract is 550.000 or more and he employes 50 or more persons he shall:
(1) F i e with the Office of Federal Contract Compliance or agency designated by it. a complete and accurate report on Standard Form 100 (EEO-I) within 30 days after receiving an award of thls contract (unless such a report has been filed in the last 12 months), and continue to file such reports annually, on or before March 3lst:
(2) Develop and maintain a written affirmative action compliance program for each of its establishments in accordance with the regulations of the Secretary of Labor promulgated under Executive Order 11246. as amended.
GO.279-3 ( C D - 3 - 6 3 ) Prinred in U.S.A.
EXECUTIVE ORDER 11758 EMPLOYMENT OF THE HANDICAPPED
(Paragraphs (a! through if1 of this c h u n are aoplicabla i f this contract
is for S 2,SOO or more)
SOURCE: 1 9 F.R. 20567
(a) The CONTRACTOR wi l l not diwriminata against any employw or applicant for employment b r u u n of physical or mental handicap in regard to any position for which the t m p l o y w or apj l icant for mp loyment :J quai i f id . The CONTRACTOR agrees to take affirmative amlon to amploy. advance in employment and o t h e m w treat qualified handicapped indivrduals wi thout discrimination based upon thew physical or mental handicap i n all emplovmant practica such as :hs following: ernplovment. upgrading, d m o t ~ o n or tranrier, recruitment or recruitment advartlsinq; lay03 or twminat~on, rates of p ry or other forms of compsnmtion. and salactron for training, including apprenticeship.
(b) The CONTRACTOR agrws that. if a handicapped individual files a complaint wi th the CON- TRACTOR that he is not complying wi th the requirements o f the Rehabilitation Ac t of 1973, he wil l ( 1 ) invastiplte the mmplaint and cake appropriate action consinent w i th the raquirements of 20 CFR 741.29 and (21 n u i n n i n o n file for t h r n yu rs . the record regarding the complaint and the acrioru taken.
(c) The CONTRACTOR a g r m that, i f a handicapped individual files a comph im w i th the Oepartment of Labor that he has not complied wi th tho requiraments of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. ( 1 ) he wil l m o p a n t e wi th tha Department in its inwst~gation of the complaint, and ( 2 ) he wil l provide all prn inont information raprd ing his employment practica w i th r a p M t o tha handicappd.
(d l Tho CONTRACTOR agrees to comply wi th the rules and regulatioru of the Secretary of Labar i n 20 CFR Ch V1. Pan 741.
Ie) In the went of the CONTRACTOR'S noncompliance w i th rho requirements of this clauo. the e o n t ~ may bo t n m i r u t d or surpondd in whole or in part.
( f l T h b clamu h a l l be i n d u d d in all sukontracts over $2500.
(Pangraphs (9) through ( j ) of this clauso are applicable i f this Contract is for more than
$2,500 and for performance i n 40 days or morel
(0) The CONTRACTOR aqrem (1) t o establish an affirmative action program, including a ~ r c p r i a t e p r o a d m r a consistent wi th the guidel ina and tho r u l a of the Secretary of Labor, which w ~ l l provide the affirmative action rmprding the employment and advencmment of the handicappd required by P.L. 93-113: (21 t o publish the program i n his amployw's or psrsonnel handbook or otherwisr distribute a copy to all p.rsonn8l: (31 t o r e v i m his program on or before March 31 o f each year and t o make such changes as may be appropriate. and (4) t o designate one of his principal o f f i c l l s to be responsible for the enablishmem and o w n t i o n of the proqam.
(h l Tho CONTRACTOR a g w s to permit the examination by appropriate wntracting agency officials a the A s r i m n t Secretary for Employment Standards or his daignea, of pertinent books, documents, papen and r u o r d s concerning his employment and advancemat of the handicapped.
(i) The CONTRACTOR a g r m to post i n conspicuous placa. available t o employe6 and applicants fo r emp:aymoni, n o t i c a i n a form to bo prescribed b y the Assisrant Socrmtary fzr Employment Standards, p r o v i d d b y th-r contrrcting officer sat ing contramor's obligation under the ;aw t o take affirmative action t o employ md a d n n a i n employment qualifiad handicappd employws and applicants for employment and tho rights and r e m d i a available.
(1) Tho CONTRACTOR wil l noti fy each labor union or rapresontativo of worksrs wi th which he has a w : lu t i ve bargaining agreement or other contract understandinq, that the comractor is bound b y the tarms of Seaion 503 of tho Rehabilitation Act. and is committed to taka affirmative action t o employ and advance i n employrnant physicl l ly and m e n n l l y handicappd individuals.
(Paragraphs (k) and Ill of this C lauo are applicable i f this Contract is for more than
SSOO.OG0 and for performance I n 90 days or more)
(k) Tha CONTRACTOR a0r.a to submit a copy of his affirmative action program to the A n i n a n t bury for Employmmt Standards within 90 days after the award t o him of a contract or subcontract.
(1) 7%. CONTRACTOR agrees t o submit a summary report t o the Assistant Secretary for Employ- m m t Standards by March 31 of aach year during performance of the Comract, and b y March 31 of the year following completion of tho Comract in the form prescribed b y the Anistam Swatary. covering ampioy- mont and complaint exFrienca, aaommodationr made and all steps takan t o d f m u a l e and carry out the eommitmonta ur forth in the affirmative action proqam.
SUB-ORDER CTYAUSE
This clzuse i s intended t o assure t h a t your suppl ie rs understand our requirements a s t o de l ive ry , mater ia l , equipment and t e s t i n g . In accepting this order , you agree t o perform as follows regarding orders you place on your own manufacturing p l an t ( s ) , or sub-orders placed with others f o r the purpose of completing tbis order:
1. A copy of each of our spec i a l purchase order c lauses, spec i f i ca t ions , drawings, de l ivery requirements, and any o ther information from us pe r t i nen t t o proper ly f u l f i l l i n g your ind iv idua l orders you s h a l l forward t o each of your p lan ts o r sub-order nanufacturers a s appropriate i n each case, and these documents s h a l l be made a p a r t of your order on your p lan t o r sub-supplier ' s i n each case. Your pasaphrasing our documents i s not a s a t i s f a c t o r y s u b s t i t u t e f o r this requirement.
2. You w i l l follow each of your sub-orders whether on your own p lan t s or a t s c b - s c p ~ l i e r ' s p lan ts a t f requent i n t e r v a l s a s agsropr ia te and keep us cu r r en t ly informed a t l e a s t twice monthly a s t o progress and required versus scheduled completion da tes of drawings and f ab r i ca t ion , and t o have them rec:-~est o?rr inspect ion (when reqidred by our order on you) 48 hours before inspec tor i s needed f o r each inspect ion s tep.
3. If, during progress of your sub-order(s) , one or more i s ev ident ly going t o delay your de l ivery t o us beyond r e ~ u i r e d da te ' s ) , you s h a l l immediately perform expedi t ing t o r e s to re the schedule and keep us c lose ly advised. Should we advise you we have decided t o expedite an order a l s o , you w i l l make necessary arrangements f o r our representa t ive t o be promptly provided with from one t o f i v e copies of your order ( s ) , including spec i f i ca t ions , drawings, e t c . You s h a l l a l s o arrange f o r our representa t ive t o be welcome t o expedite a t your p l an t s and o f f i c e s and/or those of your sub- supp l i e r ' s a s necessary i n our r ep re sen ta t ive ' s opinion.
PD-302 (500-CD-4-71) Printed i n U.S.A.
ITJSPECTION CLAUSE PD-3'74
The inspec tor designzted. by COMPAEY s h a l l have f r e e
en t ry , a t a l l times while work on t h i s contract i s being performed,
t o all parts of CONTRACTOR'S place of performance which concerns
t he manufacture, inspect ion or t e s t i n g of the mater ia l t o be
aff ixed t o COMPANY'S r e a l property. The CONTRACTOR s h a l l a f ford
the inspec tor , f r e e of c o s t , a l l reasonable f a c i l i t i e s t o s a t i s f y
him t h a t the m a t ~ r i z l i s being f in i shed i n accordance with these
specif icat ions. All t e s t s and inspect ion s h a l l be made a t the
place of manufacturer p r i o r t o shipment of the ma te r i a l t o Se
a f f ixed t o COMPANY'S r e a l property and s h a l l be so conducted a s
not t o i n t e r f e r e unnecessar i ly with the operation of the CONTRAC:
TOR'S premises. This inspect ion s h a l l not r e l i e v e the CONTRACTOR
of complying with the at tached cont rzc t and with the soec i f i ca t ions
and drawings r e f e r r e d t o t he re in , o r of h i s guarantee t h a t the.
ma te r i a l a f f ixed t o CCMPANY'S r e a l property s h a l l perform
s a t i s f a c t o r i l y under conditions of reasonable serv ice .
No change s h a l l be made on t h i s cont rac t regardless i f
such change a l t e r s the cont rac t p r i ce , u n t i l such change or
changes have been submitted t o and approved by the Purchase and
Stores Department.
PD-37% (CD-9-65) Printed i n U.S . A .
l a d
X, TANK LOCATION
A , CONSIDERATIONS
TANK LOCATION IS INFLUENCED BY A NUMBER OF FACTORS
I N C L U D I N G :
ALL OF THE FACTORS INVOLVED ARE INTERRELATED BUT NOT
NECESSARILY COMPATIBLE8 AND THE OVER-ALL O B J E C T I V E MUST
BE TO SELECT THE BEST P O S S I B L E S I T E G I V I N G DUE
RECOGNIT ION TO A L L FACTORS,
FROM AN OPERATIONAL VIEWPOIHT~ TANKAGE MAY BE LOCATED
CLOSE TO OR REMOTE FROM U N I T S WHICH THEY SERVED
GENERALLY U P H I L L FROM PUMPS WHICH TRANSFER FROM TANKS
AND CLOSE TOGETHER FOR READY ACCESS, SHORT SUCTION
L I N E S AND MIN IMUM P I P I N G ,
AT T I M E S STOCK CHARACTERISTICSD Q U A L I T Y CONTROLD OR
OTHER FACTORS REQUIRE LOCATION OF TANKS CLOSE TO
PROCESSING UNITS GENERALLY THESE SHOULD BE LINITED IN SIZE TO THE SMALLEST CAPACITY TO MEET PROCESSING NEEDS
RATHER THAN STORAGE REQUIREMENTS,
IN THE SELECTION OF TANK SITES FROM THE STANDPOINT OF IMMEDIATE NEEDS AND POSSIBLE FUTWRE EXPANSION#
TOPOGRAPHICAL CONSIDERATIONS SHOULD INCLUDE:
1 PREFERRED ELEVATION FOR THE FUNCTION TO BE
PROVIDED,
2 , UT H LI ZAT I ON OF NATURAL OR CONSTRUCTED DRA I MKGE
CHANNELS IN THE PROTECTION OF OTHER PLANT OR
PROPERTIES FROH INADVERTENT OIL SPILLAGE,
4 , SOIL CHARACTER IS TICS ,
FIRE PROTECTION PRINCIPLES ARE OUTLINED IN THE F I ~ E
RESPECT TO OTHER TANKS, OPERATING F A C I L I T I E S , AND
ADJOINING PROPERTIES, APPLICABLE LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
MUST, OF COURSE, BE S A T I S F I E D ,
1. TANKS ARE NOT LOCATED ON LANDS WHICH HAVE GREATER
P O T E N T I A L VALUE AS PLANT OR B U I L D I N G S I T E S ,
2 , TANKS ARE NOT OUT OF HARMONY WITH THE PLANNED
DEVELOPMENT, OR PRIMARY FUNCTION, OF THE OVERALL
AREA a
B , LOCATION AND SPACI l\G
COMPANY STANDARDS FOR TANK SPACING, AS SHOWN I N TABLES 1, 11, 111, AND I V OF T H I S SECTION, ARE THE SAME AS THE
IVFPA-30 CODE (1981 EDITION) SHELL-TO-SHELL SPACHMG
TABLE V IS ALSO, THE SAME AS NFPA-30 EXCEPT FOR FIXED
RQQF CRUDE O I L TANKS OVER 120 FEET I N DIAMETER THAT DO -,
NOT HAVE REMOTE IMPOUNDING AND A L L F I X E D ROOF CRUDE O I L
TANKS OVER 120 FEET I N DIAMETER REGARDLESS OF THE
METHOD OF IMPOUNDING,
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE LOCAT ION OF ABOVEGROUND TANKAGE
WITH RESPECT TO PROPERTY L I N E S AND P U B L I C WAYS ARE
BASED LlPON THE FOLLOYING C R I T E R I A : PRESSURE L I M I T A T I O H
LINDER EMEWGE;iCY VENTING CONDI TIONS, THE TYPE OF L I Q U I D
STORED AND I T S BEHAVIOR UNDER F I R E CONDITIONS, THE TYPE
OF TANK, AND THE TYPE OF F I R E PROTECTION AVAILABLE,
TABLES I, III AND IV INCLUDE DISTANCES THAT ARE
EQUIVALENT TO THOSE STATED IN THE NFPA-30 CODE FOR
ATMOSPHERIC (2,5 PSIG OR LESS) TANKS CONTAINING STABLE
FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS (UP TO 200F FLASH
POINT) . STOCK w I TH FLASH POINTS A T OFF ABOVE 20% ARE
COVERED IN TABLE I I,
IT I S GENERALLY COMPANY PRACTICE TO FOLLOW IFPA-30 CODE
REQLIIREMENTS FOR MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN ABOVEGROUND
STORAGE TAMKS , HOWEVER, FOR LARGE TANKS HAVING
DIAMETERS OVER 120 FEET BUT LESS THAN 150 FEET, AND FOR
F I X E D ROOF CRUDE O I L TANKS EXCEPT THOSE HAVING
DIAMETERS NOT OVER 120 FEET AND HAViNG REMOTE
IMPOUNDING, COMPAIVY SHELL-TO-SHELL SPACING REQUI REHENTS
ARE MORE CONSERVATIVE THAN NFPA-30.
THE FOLLOWING TABLE STATES THE COMPANY STANDARD FOR
MINIMUM SHELL-TO-SHELL SPACING OF ADJACENT ABOVEGROUND
TANKS s
OPERATING FACILITIES ARE NORYALLY SEPARATED FRO:.B
TANKAGE BY PIPEWAYS AND ACCESS ROADS, FOR OPERATING
CONVENIENCE, A CLEAR SPACE OF 100 FT. I S NORMALLY
SUFFICIENT FOR PRODUCT TANKS, LESSER SPACING MAY BE
ADEQUATE FOR SMALL TANKS IN SMALL PLANTS, FIXED ROOF
CRUDE O I L TWPdKS OVER 120 F T , DIAMETER, WHEZE USED,
SHOULD BE SPACED 200 FT, OR MORE DUE TO THE F~ISK OF
BOILOVER,
IMPOUND1 MG AND DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE SHOULD PREFERABLY BE PROVIDED TO A REMOTE
IMPOUNDING AREA ON COMPANY PROPERTY. THE IMPOUNDING
AREA SHOULD BE DESIGV4ED TO HOLD, AT A PIINIHUM, THE
CONTENTS OF THE LARGEST TANK IN THE TANK FIELD, (SEE
FIRE PROTECTION MANUAL, SECTION 310,) PIPEWAYS AND -
ACCESS ROADS SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM DRAINAGE AREAS.
FIXED ROOF TANKS STORING CRUDE OILS ARE SUBJECT TO
BOILOVER AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN BURNING FOR A
CONSIDERABLE LENGTH OF T I M E AND THE AMOUNT OF O I L
EXPELLED DURING A BOILOVER WILL PROBABLY OVERTAX ANY
DRAINAGE SYSTEM,
IT MAY NOT ALWAYS BE POSSIBLE TQ PROVIDE THE DRAINAGE
F A C I L I T I E S DESIRED DUE TO SPACE L I M I T A T I O N S AND D I K E S
SURROUNDING TANKS OW GROUPS OF TANKS MAY BE NECESSARY
TO PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTIES AND CONTAIN ACCIDENTAL
S P I L L S ,
IF D I K E S HIGHER THAN 6-FOQT AVERAGE ARE NEEDED, SEE
NFPA-30 FOP ADDED DESIGN FEATURES.
WHERE DIKED ENCLOSURES MUST BE PROVIDED, THE DIKE
ENCLOSURE SHOIJLD BE CAPABLE OF CONTAINING THE GREATEST
AMOUNT QF L I Q U I D THAT CAN BE RELEASED FRQM THE LARGEST
TANK WITHIN THE DIKE AREA, ASSUMING A FULL TANK, THE
CAPACITY OF THE D I K E D AREA ENCLOSING MORE THAN ONE TANK -
SHALL BE CALCULATED BY DEDUCTING THE VOLUME OF THE
TANKS OTHER THAN THE LARGEST TANK, BELOW THE HEIGHT OF
THE D I K E ,
WHERE TWO OR MORE LARGE TANKS A R E W I T H I N A DIKED A R E A
SOME INTERMEDIATE DRAINAGE SEPARATION SHOULD BE
PROVIDED, CURBS OR DR A I N A G E CHANNELS MAY B E EMPLOYED,
TANK MANUAL TANK LOCATION
TABLE I ABOVEGROUND TANKS FOR STABLE FLAMMABLE AND
* COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS (BELOW 200F FLASH POINT) OTHER THAN CRUDE OIL
Type of Talk Protection
Minimum Distance in Feet from Property Line Which is or can b e Built Upon, Including t h e Opposite Side of a Public Way and Shall Be Not Less Than 5 Feet
Minimum Distance in Feet from Nearest Side of Any Public Way or from Nearest Important Building on t h e Same Property and Shall Be Not Less Than 5 Feet
Roof
+ Vertical with Weak Roof to Shell Seam
Haizon ta l and Vertical with Emergency Relief Venting to
I Limit Pres- sures to 2.5
, p i g
Protection for 1 : z m e s diameter of Exposurest
1/6 times diameter of tank
None
Approved foam orinerting system on tanks not exceeding 150 fee t in diameter * Protection for Exposurest
None
Diameter of tank but 116 times diameter of need not exceed 175 t m k feet
~ ~
Approved inerting system on the tank or approved foam system on vertical tanks
t Protection for exposures shall mean fire protection for structures on property adja- cent . t ~ liquid storage. Fire protect im for such structures shall b e acceptable when located (1) within the jurisdiction of any public fire department or, (2) adjacent to plants having private fire brigades capable of providing cooling water streams on structures on property adjacent t o liquid storage.
1/2 times diameter of tank
Diameter of tank
2 times diameter of tank
Protect im for Exposurest
None
* ++ For tanks over 150 feet in diameter use "Protectim for Exposures" or "None" a s applicable.
1/6 times diameter of tank
1/3 t imes diameter of tank
113 times diameter of b u t n e e d n o t e x c e e d 3 5 0 feet
1 /2 times Table 111
t&k
1/2 times Table III
Table 111
2 t imes Table III
Table 111
Table III
TANK MANUAL TANK LOCATION
TABLE 11 ABOYEC;ROUND'TANKS FOR COMBUSWLE LIQUIDS w m
* . FLASHPOINTS AT OR ABOVE 200F
Capacity Gallons
TABLE m (Reference Minimum Distance f a - Use in Table I)
Minimum Distance in Feet Minimum Distance in Feet from Property Line Whi& from Nearest Side of Any Is or Can B e Built Upon, Public Way ar from Nearest
751 to 12,000 12 ,OO 1 to 30,000 38,001 to 50,000 50,001 to 100,000
100,001 to 508,000
-- TANK MANUAL TANK LOCATION
TABLE IV ABOVEGROUND TANKS FOR CRUDE OIL
* Float ing Roof
* Fixed 113 t imes d i ame te r of Roof
! None
Protec t ion for Exposures t
Protec t ion for exposures shall mean f i r e pro tec t ion fo r s t ruc tures on property ad jacent t o liquid storage. Fire protect ion for such s t ruc tu re s shall b e accep tab le when located (1) within t h e jurisdiction of any public f i re depar tment or, (2) ad jacent t o p lants having private f i re brigades capable of providing cooling wa te r s t r eams on s t ruc tu re s on property ad jacent t o liquid storage.
Diameter of t ank
None
* Liquids with boil over cha rac t e r i s t i c s s to rage in fixed roof t anks over 120 f e e t in dia- me te r may not b e desirable. See Sect ion 320 of t h e Fi re Pro tec t ion Manual.
112 t imes d i ame te r of tank
116 t imes d iameter of tank
116 t imes d i ame te r o f tank
4 t imes d iameter o f t ank but need not exceed 350 f e e t
213 t imes d i ame te r of tank
TANK MANUAL TANK LOCATION
TABLE V M m SPACING (SHELGTO-SHEU) BETWEEN ABOVEGROUND
* TANKS FOR FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
Floating Roof Fixed Roof Tanks
ClassIdcII For all type (Other than
Crude) Class IIIA
1 A, ~ a n k s Over 120 Feet Diameter
/ 1. For tanks having - + - + - 1 . .remote impounding 6 6 6 6 - + -
2. For tanks= having remote
B, Tanks Over 120 Feet Diameter
1. For tanks having remote impounding 6
2. For tanks= having remote impoud ing
Note 1: If the diameter of one tank is less than 1/2 of the diameter of the adjacent tank, the minimum shell-to-shell spacing shall not be less than 1/2 the diameter of t he smaller tank.
Note 2: Cmde oil tanks a t production facilities in isolated locations having capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons (3,000 barrels) need not be separated by more than 3 feet.
Note 3: Tanks used for storing Class III B liquids may be spaced no less than 3 feet apart unless within a diked area or drainage path for a tank storing Class I or I1 liquid, in which case provisions of Table apply.
Note 4: Crude oil storage in fixed roof tanks over 120 feet in diameter may not be desir- able. See Section 320 of the Fire Protection Manual.
Note 5: A floating roof tank is defined on page 4 10-2.
?' For tank spacing with respect to property lines and public ways, see pages 410-3 to 410-5 of this manual.
FOUNDATIONS
THIS SECTION INCLUDES A BACKGROUND ON THE EFFECTS OF SOIL
PROPERTIES ON TANK PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR
TANK FOUNDATIONS,
PURPOSE
THE INTENT OF THIS SECTION IS TO PROMOTE GOOD TANK
FOUNDATION DESIGN BY PROVIDING BACKGROUND INFORMATION ON
SOIL CONDITIONS, DISCUSSING TANK DESIGN EXPERIENCES, AND
RECOMMENDING DESIGNS FOR VARIOUS SITUATIONS.
I MTRODUCT I ON
A BASIC KNOWLEDGE OF SOIL PROPERTIES AND THE EFFECTS ON TANK PERFORMANCE IS ESSENTIAL BEFORE DESIGNING A TANK FOUNDATIOMa
TANK FOUNDATIONS AWE SITE SPECIFIC AND INFLIJENCED BY SOIL
TYPE, SOIL TYPE IS EITHER GOOD, INTERMEDIATE OR POOR, IN GOOD SOILS, A FOUNDATION MAY BE A COMPACTED BERM WITH A
CONCRETE RINGWALL. IN POOR SOILS, HOWEVER, A FOUNDATION MAY REQUIRE PILE SUPPORT,
THE R E L A T I V E HAZARD OF THE STORED SUBSTANCE TO THE
GROUNDWATER SUPPLY AND THE POTENTIAL OF T H I S SUBSTANCE TO
REACH GROUNDWATER MUST BE EVALUATED,
BACKGROUND
TO PROPERLY DESIGN A TANK FOUNDATION AND P I P I N G CONNECTIONS
TO THE TANK# I T I S NECESSARY TO KNOW# NOT ONLY THE LOAD
CARRYING CAPACITY OF THE SUPPORTING SOILS, BUT ALSO THE
SETTLEMENT THAT MAY BE A N T I C I P A T E D UNDER IMPOSED LOADS, $i
TANK SETTLEMENT OF SEVERAL INCHES OR EVEN A FOOT I S NOT
SERIOUS AS LONG A S SETTLEMENT IS UNIFORM, THE TANKS SHELL
CAN TOLEQATE VERY L I T T L E ABRUPT UNEQUAL SETTLEFIENT BUT CAN
TOLERATE A UNIFORM T I L T I N G OF THE TANK WITH ONLY A SL IGHT
INCREASE I N SHELL STRESS, FLOATING ROOFS ARE ESPECIALLY
SENSITIVE TO "OVALLING" RESULTING FROM UNEQUAL SETTLEMENT.
THE FLOATING ROOF HILL BIND, HANG UP, AND REQUIRE RELEVELING
OF THE TANK,
DETAILED SOIL [NVESTIGATIQNS MINIMIZE UNCERTAINTIES IN A
FOUNDATION DESIGN, SOIL INVESTIGAT IONS ARE GENERALLY
CONTRACTED TO OUTSIDE ENGINEERING F I R M S P E C I A L I Z I N G I N
THESE SERVICES,
SOILS TYPES CAN BE GROUPED INTO THREE CATEGORIES:
SI SOILS ARE STRONG ENOUGH T O
SUPPORT THE TANK WITHOUT ADVERSE SETTLEMENT,
TYPE I 1 - INTERHEDIATE Sorbs: SOILS ARE STROMG ENOUGH
TO CARRY TANK LOADS H I T H TOLERABLE SETTLEMENTS BUT TOO
WEAK, WHEN CONFINED, TO SUPPORT THE EDGE WITHOUT
ADVERSE SETTLEHENT,
TYPE 111 - POOF! SOILS: SOILS NOT ABLE TO SUPPORT A
TANK WITHOUT APPRECIABLE SETTLEHENT CAUSING ADVERSE
AFFECTS ON THE TANK 'S INTEG~ITY, POOR SOILS ARE SILTS
AND CLAYS OR HIGHLY OSGANIC SOILS,
I F THE TANK BOTTOM AND SHELL SETTLEWENT I S UNHFORH, THE
TANK STRUCTURE WILL NOT BE AFFECTED,
FIGURE 1 s ~ o ~ s MAX mun PERMISSIBLE DIFFERENTIAL BETWEEN
THE CENTER AND THE SHELL FOR TANK BOTTOMS OF VARYING
DIAMETER AND WITH VARYlMG ORIGINAL BOTTOM PROFILES FROM
COME-UP (SLOPING TO A HIGH BOTTOM CENTER POINT) TO
CONE-DOWN (SLOPING TO A LOW BOTTOH CENTER POINT) FROH
A STRESS STANDPOINT, LARGER DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENTS
CAN BE TOLERATED I F THE BOTTOM I S CONE-UP 2RIGIWALLY,
HOMEVER, PROBLEMS RESULT FRO14 THE FACT THAT SETTLEMENTS
DO MOT VARY UNIFORMLY WITH RADIAL DISTANCE,
FOR INSTANCE:
COME-UP BOTTOM NAY HAVE I T S DRAINAGE PATTERN
DISTURBED TO OUTSIDE WATER DRAWS BY UNEQUAL
SETTLEHENT,
,TOO STEEP A BOTTOM SLOPE HAY RESULT I N CREASES
FORMING I N THE BOTTOM PLATE FRON THE SLACK THAT
DEVELOPS AS SETTLEMENT OCCURS,
.BECAUSE OF UNCERTAINTIES OF THE BOTTOM
CONFIGURATION AT ANY TIME, A VERY CONSIDEIiABLE TANK
VOLUME BELOW WHAT I S BELIEVED TO BE THE HIGH POINT
OF THE BOTTOM MUST BE ALLOCATED TO "DEAD STORAGE, 11
GAGES AND OPERATIONS MUST BE ABOVE SOME
CONSERVATIVELY ESTIMATED BASE,
ITHE BOTTOM PLATE IS HELD AGAINST THE SUPPORTING
FOUNDATION BY THE WEIGHT OF THE L I Q U I D ON THE
PLATE, AS THE L I Q U I D LEVEL I S LOWERED, THE L I Q U I D
PRESSURE BECOMES INADEQUATE TO PROVIDE THE
NECESSARY RESTRAINT AND THE BOTTOM SNAPS UP I N A
SERIES OF MINOR BUCKLES, THIS CAUSES A N I X I N G OF
BOTTOM SEDIHENT AND HATER WITH THE STORED PRODUCT
AND CAUSES A FURTHER LOSS OF OPERATING STORAGE
CAPACITY, ESPECIALLY WHERE PRODUCT STORAGE REQUIRES
C R I T I C A L QUALITY CONTROL,
ONE SOLUTION I S TO USE A CONE-UP BOTTOM AS SHObdN I N
FIGURE 3: CONE-UP TANK BOTTOM - PASCAGOULA REFINERY~
THIS BOTTOM HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY USED AT THE
PASCAGOULA REFINERY WHERE SETTLEMENT I S LARGER
TANK BOTTOMS AND AFFIXED CONE ROOFS CAN BE SAND-JACKED
TO (03 APPROACHING) THE ORIGINAL TANK BOTTOM CONTOUR.
DETAILS OF A RELEVELING PROCEDURE DEVELOPED AT THE
PASCAGOULA REFINERY ARE PROVIDED IN THE ENGINEERING AND
MAINTENANCE BULLETIN NO, 43 AVAILABLE FROM THE
COXPORATE LIBRARY I N SAN FRANCISCO.
IT I S PREFERABLE, OF COURSE, TO LOCATE A TANK ON S O I L S
FIRM ENOUGH TO AVOID EDGE SETTLEMENT, THE KINDS OF
EDGE SETTLEMENT THAT CAN BE EXPERIENCED WITH TANKS ARE:
GENERAL A ~ E A L SUBSIDENCE RESULTS FROM THE LOAD
IMPOSED ON THE UNDERLYING S O I L S BY THE TANK AND I T S
CONTENTS 1
VARIABLE EDGE SETTLEMENT AROUND TANK PERIPHERY DUE
TO DIFFERENCES I N THE SUPPORTING S O I L ,
IRADIAL SHEAR FAILURE OF SOIL BELOW THE TANK SHELL
AND I N THE ADJACENT UNCONFINED S O I L OUTSIDE THE
TANK CAN CAUSE EDGE SETTLEMENT,
DESIGN GUIDELINES
DESIGNS ARE GOVERNED BY THE SITE CONDITIONS, INCLUDING
S O I L TYPE, CORROSION POTENTIAL , AND ENVIRONMENTAL R I S K ,
GUIDELINES TO EVALUATE THESE PARAMETERS FOLLOW AND,
ONCE DEFINED, A FOUNDATION DESIGN CAN BE CHOSEN U S I N G
F I G U R E 2 ALONG W I T H STANDARD FORMS EF-364, EF-421 AND
STANDARD DRAWING GF-S1121,
SITE CONDITIONS
RECOMMENDED FOUNDATION DESIGNS ARE LISTED ACCORDING TO
S O I L TYPE I N FIGURE 2. SOIL DATA I S OBTAINED FROM
E X I S T I N G RECORDS OR BY CONTRACTING AN ENGINEERING F I R M
TO COMPLETE A SOIL IIYVESTIGATION, THESE SOILS
PROPERTIES DEFINE WHAT TYPE OF FOUNDATION I S NECESSARYa
TYPE I - 6001) SOILS: FOUNDATION DESIGNS INCLUDE A
COMPACTED BERM FOUNDATION WITH A CONCRETE RING WALL
OR ASPHALT PAD AS SHOWN ON STANDARD FORM EF-364.
1 , A CONCRETE RING WALL PROVIDES THE GREATEST
ASSUgANCE OF MEETING ELEVATION TOLERANCES
AROUND THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE TANK,
2 , ASPHALT PAVEMENT IS APPLIED TO THE TANK GRADE
TO MEET CONSTRUCTION GRADING TOLERANCES FOR
TANKS STORING STOCK UP TO 2500F. IT CAN
PREVENT WATER FROM MIGRATING UP THROUGH THE
FOUNDATION AND CORRODING THE TANK BOTTOFI,
ALTHOUGH EXPERIENCE SHOWS THAT WATER
EVENTUALLY MIGRATES THROUGH THE PAVEMENT, IT
DOES L I M I T THE FUTURE I N S T A L L A T I O N OF
CATHODIC PROTECTION UNLESS THE PAVEMENT I S
REMOVED, (SEE CORROSION SECTION, )
SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICATION PROCEDURES ARE
COVERED ON STANDARD FROM EF-364, PAVEMENT
SELECTION DEPENDS ON THE A V A I L A B I L I T Y OF A
CENTRAL M I X I N G PLANT AND THE FOLLOWING:
TYPE H I - INTERMEDIATE SOILS: A GOOD FOUNDATION
INCLUDES A STRUCTURAL BERM B U I L T OF F I R M 8 WELL-
COMPACTED8 SELECT S O I L S OF S U F F I C I E N T THICKNESS TO
PROVIDE NECESSARY SURCHARGE ON INTERMEDIATE S O I L AT
THE EDGE OF THE TANK, BERM HEIGHT SHOULD BE
E S T A B L I S H E D BY S O I L I N V E S T I G A T I O N OR FROM OTHER
EXPERIENCE IN THE AREA, THE BERM MUST PROVIDE
ADEQUATE HEIGHT TO KEEP THE TANK FROM S E T T L I N G TO AN
E L E V A T I O N BELOW THE SURROUNDING GRADE, BERM
FOUNDATION DESIGNS CAN INCLUDE:
1 I A REINFORCED CONCRETE R I N G WALL
CONSTRUCTED UNDER THE SHELL ,
2, A C O N F I N I N G R I N G WALL PLACED OUTSIDE THE
SHELL A D ISTANCE OF AT LEAST THE DEPTH
OF THE WALL, THIS WALL MAY BE
REINFORCED CONCRETE OR SHEET P I L I N G ,
TYPE 111 - POOR SOILS
1, POOR SOILS , I F NOT TOO T H I C K ABOVE FIRMER
S U B S O [ L S t MAY BE EXCAVATED AND REPLACED W I T H
COMPACTED B A C K F I L L ,
2 , IF P O O ~ SOILS ARE TOO DEEP TO BE REMOVED,
THEY MAY BE PRECONSOLIDATED TO PERMIT L I M I T -
HEIGHT TANKAGE TO BE ERECTED, THE COST OF
PRECONSOLIDATED TECHNIQUES MAY APPROACH THE
COST OF P I L E SUPPORTED FOUNDATIONS,
3 , AFTER A TANK IS ERECTED, UNDERLYING SOILS CAN
BE CONSOLIDATED THROUGH AN EXTENDED WATER
LOAD PROGRAM,
4 8 IF TANK LOADS AND SOIL CONDITIONS DO NOT
ECONOMICALLY P E R M I T ANY OF THE PREVIOUSLY
MENTIONED ALTERNATIVES, THEN A P I L E SUPPORTED
FOUNDATION MAY BE THE ONLY P R A C T I C A L
ALTERNATIVE,
1 N A D D I T I O N TO THE FOUNDATIONS PREVIOUSLY DISCUSSED,
CONCRETE SLABS ARE OCCASIONALLY USED FOR TANKS L E S S
THAN 20' I N , DIAMETER,
CORROSION
CONTROL OF EXTERNAL CORROSION OF TANK BOTTOi4S SHOULD BE
CONSIDERED IN THE FOUNDIATION DESIGN, OTHERWISE, LEAKS
CAN RESULT IN AS LITTLE AS FIVE YEARS. FROM A
CORROSION STANDPOINT# THERE ARE THREE P O S S I B L E DESIGNS,
L I S T E D I N ORDER OF DECREASING EFFECTIVENESS AGAINST
TANK BOTTOMSIDE CORROSION,
,SAND, GRAVEL, OR EARTH FILL IN CONJUNCTION WITH
CATHODIC PROTECTION
ONLY THE FIRST TWO OPTIONS A ~ E CONSIDERED ACCEPTABLE
FOR TANKS CONTAIN ING STOCKS WHICH ARE E I T H E R VALUABLE
OR MAY CAUSE CONTAMINATION PROBLEMS I N THE EVENT OF A
LEAK (E , G , HYDROCARBONS, MOST CHEMICALS, ETC I 1,
BERM FOUNDATIONS PAVED WITH ASPHALT HAVE BEEN WIDELY
USED FOR O I L STORAGE TANKS I N THE PAST, EXPERIENCE HAS
SHOWN THAT EVENTUALLY WATER PERMEATES THROUGH EVEN THE
BEST ASPHALT AND THAT BOTTOMSIDE CORROSION CONTINUES,
IN A D D I T I O N , SUCH FOUNDATIONS CANNOT BE R E T R O F I T W I T H
CATHODIC PROTECTION BECAUSE THE ASPHALT I S A H I G H
RESISTANCE B A R 2 I E R THAT I N S U L A T E S THE TANK BOTTOM FROM
A CATHODIC PROTECTION CURRENT, THEREFORE, ASPHALT
PAVEMENT AND O I L DRESSING SHOULD GENERALLY BE AVOIDED,
THE TANK BOTTOM LIFE WITH THIS FOUNDATION TYPE HAS
A MEMBRANE PLACED BENEATH A TANK FOR LEAK DETECTION
SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED AS A BARRIER TO CORROSION,
WATER WILL USUALLY LEACH IN BETWEEN THE MEMBRANE AND
THE S T E E L BOTTOM AND CAUSE CORROSION, SO CATHODIC
PROTECTION OR A CONCRETE PAD I S S T I L L REQUIRED, THE
L I F E EXPECTANCY OF A TANK BOTTOM ON A FOUNDATION OF
SANDS AND CATHODIC PROTECTION IS EXPECTED TO BE 30
YEARS OR MORE,
IN THE P A S T * TANKS WERE B U I L T ON ROCK* SAWD OR CORAL
FOUNDATIONS WITHOUT CATHODIC PROTECTION, NATER IS
DRAWN UP B Y C A P I L L A R Y A C T I O N UNDER THE TANK THROUGH
THESE FOUNDATIONS, E S P E C I A L L Y SAND, AND CAUSES SEVERE
TANK BOTTOM CORROSION, THEREFORE* A TANK SHOULD BE
B U I L T ON ONE OF THREE FOUI\IDATIONS L I S T E D 01'4 THE
PREVIOUS PAGE,
A MORE D E T A I L E D D I S C U S S I O N OF THE CAUSES AND CONTROL OF
, TANK BOTTOM CORROSION IS FOUND IN SECTION 242 OF THE
COR~OSION PREVENTION MANUAL,
ENVIRONMENTAL R I S K
TANK FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED TO PROTECT GROUNDWATER IN
ENVIRONMENTALLY S E N S I T I V E AREAS AND WHERE STORED
SUBSTANCES ARE A HAZARD TO THE ENVIRONMENT, DEPENDING
ON THE TANK'S GROUNDWATER CONTAMINATION POTENTIAL,
VARIOUS' DESIGN SCHEMES MAY BE USED AS SHOWN IN STANDARD
DRAWING GF-S1121 THE PARAMETESS AFFECTING THIS DESIGN
CHOICE INCLUDE :
,HOW HAZARDOUS IS THE STORED HATERIAL?
,HOW DEEP I S THE WATER TABLE AND WHAT TYPES OF S O I L
A ~ E BETWEEN THE TANK AND THE WATER TABLE?
lWHAT I S THE Q U A L I T Y OF THE E X I S T I N G WATEP SOURCE
BELOW THE SITE?
DESIGNS SHALL EMPHASIZE STRUCTURAL INTEG!? I T Y , EARLY
WARNING, AND CONTAINMENT TO ASSURE PROMPT RESPONSE TO A
LEAK 1
THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF A TANK CAN BE MAINTAINED BY
P R O V I D I N G A GOOD FOUNDATION AND A NON-CORROSIVE
ENVIRONMENT, TANK BOTTOMS CAN BE PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION BY US I NG CATHODIC PROTECTION AND/OR COATINGS
BOTH INTERNALLY AND EXTERNALLY SEE THE CORROSION
. PREVENTION MANUAL SECTION 423 AND THE COATINGS MANUAL
FOR FURTHER DISCUSSIONS OM CATHODIC PROTECTION OR
COAT I NGS ,
EARLY WARNING THROUGH V I S U A L DETECTION I S PREFERRED,
INSTRUMENT DETECTION IS ACCEPTABLE WHERE VISUAL
DETECTION I S NOT F E A S I B L E , DETECTION I S PROVIDED BY
ROUTING LEAKS FROM BETWEEN THE TANK BOTTOM AND AM
IMPERVIOUS LINER TO THE PERIMETER OF THE TANK (SEE GF-
S11211,
PARTIAL IMPERVIOUS COMTAI NMENT SERVES TO PREVENT
UNDERSIDE LEAKS FROM PERCOLATING I N T O THE S O I L ,
GENERALLY IN THE FORM OF A MEMBRANE LINER UNDER THE
TANK TH I S CONTA I NMEIVT I NSURES THAT STOCK WILL NOT
REACH GROUNDWATER, A P A R T I A L CONTAINMENT, WHERE A
PERCENTAGE OF THE STOCK I S CONTAINED, I S S U F F I C I E N T TO
HOLD L E A K S U N T I L DETECTED,
STANDARD DRAW I NG GF-Sl121 SHOWS D E T A I L S OF SECONDARY
CONTAINMENT AND LEAK DETECTION SYSTEMS FOR VARIOUS
FOUMDATIOH DESIGN SCHEMES,
APPURTENANCES
STANDARD DRAW 1 NGS 6B-S78%6 AND 6c-978677 SHOW TYP I CAL
D E T A I L S OF CATCH B A S I N S AND BOTTOM, OUTLET STRUCTURES
WHICH MUST BE CONSIDERED AS PART OF THE TANK FOUf4DATION
D E S I G N , IN AREAS SUBJECT TO EARTHQUAKE, EVERY BOTTOM
APPURTENANCE SHOULD BE PROTECTED B Y A CATCH BASINl OR
CONCRETE BOX PEW STANDARD DRAWING GC-Q1075, TH I s w ILL
PERMIT MOVEMENT OF THE TANK R E L A T I V E TO THE EARTH
WITHOUT SHEARING OFF A BOTTOM CONNECTION,
ADDITIONAL I NFORMABION
API-650 APPENDIX B PROVIDES A "RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR A P I VERTICAL
CYLINDRICAL OIL-STORAGE BANKS, N BH IS RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE DOES NOT CONFORM IN ALL ASPECTS TO OUR
P R A C T I C E S AND SHOULD BE USED AS A GUIDE ONLY,
TANK MANUAL LOCATION, FOUNDATIONS AND CONNECTING LINES
10 2 0 3 0 40 50 6 0 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT (INCHES)
(CENTER SETTLEMENT MINUS EDGE SETTLEMENT)
1. These curves are based on an analysis of stresses in a flexible circular steel membrane resting on a yielding foundation and on settlement data for tanks at Pascagoula, Miss. ranging from 69 feet t o 156 feet in diameter. Curves are based on the assumption that the differential settlement decreases in proportion to the cube of the distance from the center toward the edge. Maximum tangential compression at the shell-bottom joint is limited to 18,000 psi resulting in a safety factor against failure of at least 1.67. The curves are a plot of the equation:
A s + d s 2 + o . 4 6 i - - - D 4
in which: A = Maximum Permissible Differential Settlement (in.) D = Tank Diameter (Ft.) 5 = Initial Bottom Slope (in./Ft.) - Positive when initially coned up.
2. Tank bottoms initiallyconed up will buckle when a moderate amount of differential settlement has occurred. Such buckling is harmless providing initial slope is not excessive. Maximum recommended upward slope for tankssubject t o settlement is 112 in./ft.
3 . See paragraph on "Maximum Permissible Tank Bottom Settlement" this section for other considerations where large settlement is anticipated.
FIGURE 1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE TANK BOTTOM SETI'LEMENT
TANK MANUAL LOCATION, FOUNDATIONS AND CONNECTING LINES
OR SAND-CLAY-SILT MIXTURES) ORGANIC SOILS)
NOTICEABLE SETTLEMENT 0 LARGE SETTLEMENT LITTLE SETTLEMENT FAIR DRAINAGE POOR DRAINAGE
PILE SUPPORTED M A T
FOUNDATION
CORROSION PREVENTION- LOAD PROGRAM REFERENCE: EF-421 FOUNDATION
OESIGN REMOVE POOR SOIL
CONCRETE SPACER SECONDARY
0 LEAK DETECTION PIPING AT LEAK DETECTION-GROOVES CONTAINMENT &
TANK PERIMETER CUT IN CONCRETE
FIGURE 2 TANK FOUNDATION DESIGN GUIDE
TANK MANUAL LOCATION, FOUNDATIONS AND CONNECTING LINES
Parabolic * Parabolic *
Tank bottom plates can be placed in an exaggerated cone-up configuration t o compensate for differential settlement. The tank bottom layout shown above was specific for site conditions at the Pascagoula Refinery. This curve is the maximum recommended; steeper slopes may cause the bottom plate t o crease.
Thisdesign can be applied t o other sites where differential settlement is anticipated. The parabolic portion of the tank bottom layout is defined by considering soil conditions, tank diameter and tank height. Consult with a soils specialist or the Corporation Engineering Department's Civil and Structural Division for assistance.
FIGURE 3 CONE-UP TANK BOTTOM - PASCAGOULA REFINERY
A I B I C I D
Typl'cal W;ny WON
See no+= C-3
Top o f concre#e s h / / hare smooth f i h i ~ b and urea uoder t'onk shoN be coo/ad wifh Chcvron
' '-see note C-2
SECT. A
I C O N S T R U C T I O N N O T E S 1 C l . ) I O T O l T l O U A L L COIICRETE TO G I V E A S T R E l l G l l l 0 1 3 0 0 0 L 8 S . P t l
SUUPIIE u t c n III 18 o * r s .
CARE S H A L L I f T A M N TO A C l l l E V E F U L L O E S l U l COIIPACTIOII Of S O I L I E H E A T H THC C W C R E T E MI.
C l . WllEH THE COHCRETE 8 0 1 I S I H S T A L t E D W I T H R C ~ I N C R ~ T E R l l l G WALL. THE RIIIC YNL IEIHFORCIIIG S T L E ~ SHALL BE 8 E n r /UID I I ~ D Ill 11) THE 8 O I R E I I I F O R C I W G STEEL. THE BARS SI IALL BE LAPPED 14 D I A H E T t R S O f T l l E L A R G E 5 1 8111.
Cb. TME BOTTOH SUMP 11157 8 E P O S I T I O I I E D BEFORE P L A C I I I G T l l t T W K SUPPORT B E M S . S i t S T N I D A R O O R A Y I I I G C L - D I O 7 4 .
r - - - - - - - - . - - - - - -- -
REFERENCE D R A W I N G S 1 Sfondurd i b c k Boffom Sump GC-Of074
STANDARD COIJCRETE BOX FOR TANK BOTTOM SUMPS
~
-- - - - - -. . - - 1 - .. . . . .-A .. oATEI~ . ) . l A P P n o v t o
lw ... n t p l -. .. -. i . . . -. ... . 7 GC -- Q 107 5 - I OIHG 1)) P I
, . , . , , a , I 16 . i n i t I I'
~
,.,",.S ," ,, . . . . . . . . - . . - . . . \ i r n O i ~ n - i i R i w i i r ~
X I I, CONNECTING LINES
A, PURPOSE AND SCOPE
THIS SECTION DEFINES THE NEED FOR FLEXIBILITY AND
O U T L I N E S METHODS FOR P R O V I D I N G I T I N CONNECTING L I N E S
WITHOUT THE USE OF S P E C I A L J O I N T S I S EMPHASIZED AND
PREFERRED,
B , REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEXIBILITY
PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVIDES FOR RELATIVE MOTION BETWEEN
TANKS AND L I M E S CAUSED B Y :
21 THERMAL EXPANSION DUE TO SOLAR HEAT. HEATED
PRODUCT OR STEAMING-OUT DURING CLEANING,
IN S E I S M I C AREAS. WHERE P I P I N G AND CONNECTIONS HAVE
BEEN DESIGNED FOR SETTLEMENT 0 4 THERMAL EXPANSION, NO
A D D I T I O N A L PROTECTION AGAINST EARTHQUAKE MOTION I S
NECESSARY,
METHODS FOR PROVIDING FLEXIBILITY
D , P I P I N G BENDS
ADEQUATE PIPING FLEXIBILITY A T TANKS USUALLY CAN BE
PROVIDED BY A CAREFULLY PLANNED P I P I N G LAYOUT WITHOUT
FLEXIBLE JOINTS, TABLE I t ATTACHED, SNOWS A TYPICAL
LAYOUT OF P I P I N G THAT WILL PROVIDE ADEQUATE
F L E X I B I L I T Y .
FOR SPECIAL DESIGN PROBLEMS, REFER TO CORPORATION
ENGINEERING DESIGN PRACTICES L-134-9 AND 10, "DESIGN OF
PIPING FOR FLEXIBILITY, I1
E l VALVES AND FITTINGS
THE FOLLOWING CONSIDERATIOWS AFFECT A FLEXIBILITY CHECK
ON ANY P I P I N G SYSTEM.
FLANGED VALVES - FLANGED STEEL VALVES NORMALLY ARE
PROVIDED AT TANKS, ~NFORTUNATELY, THE ALLOWABLE
BENDING MOMENT FOR A FLANGE HAS NOT BEEN ACCURATELY
DEFINED, PARTICULARLY THE L I M I T S W I T H I N WHICH THE
FLANGE MAS MOT BEEN ACCURATELY DEFINED, PARTICULARLY
THE L I M I T S W I T H I N WHICH THE FLANGE WlLL BE REASONABLY
TIGHT, HOWEVER, THE ATTACHED TABLE 2 INCLUDES WHAT ARE
CONSIDERED TO BE CONSERVATIVE ALLOWABLE BENDING MOMENTS
FOR FLANGES AND FOR OTHER P I P E F I T T I N G S ,
FLANGE BOLTS - ASTM 8-193, G ~ A D E B-7, (SAE 4140) ALLOY
. BOLTS ARE RECOIFSMENQED FOR MAKING UP FLANGES AT THE TANK
AND FOR A L L STEEL F I T T I N G S ADJACENT TO THE TANKS THAT
ARE EXPECTED TO CARRYING BENDING MOMENT,
FLANGE GASKETS - CORRECT GASKET INSTALLATION AT FLANGE
CONNECTIONS I S ESPECIALLY IMPORTANT WHERE THE FLANGE I S
SUBJECT TO BENDING LOADS,
WELD NECK FLANGES - THESE FLANGES ARE PREFERRED OVER
SLIP-ON FLANGES I N F L E X I B L E P I P I N G I N S T A L L A T I O N S SINCE
WELD NECK FLANGES HAVE GREATER BENDING STRENGTH,
REDUCED SIZE VALVES - REDUCED SIZE VALVES CAN BE USED
I N A P I P I N G SYSTEM I F THE BENDING MOMENTS ON THE SYSTEM
AT THE VALVES ARE W I T H I N P E R M I S S I B L E L I M I T S OF THE -.
VALVE FLANGES USED, VOID USING REDUCED S I Z E VALVES I N
10 I N , AND SMALLER L I N E S I Z E S ,
ELBOW AND TEE FITTINGS - VHEN DESIGNING LINES FOR
F L E X I B I L I T Y , USE FORGED STEEL F I T T I N G S INSTEAD OF F I E L D
FABRICATED TEES OR MITERED ELBOWS, PARTICULARLY I N
LARGER P I P E S I Z E S , -
PIPE SUPPORTS - SUPPORTS FOR PIPING WITHIN THE FIRST h
BEND FROH A TANK SHOULD BE ADJUSTABLE I N HEIGHT '86
ALLOW FOR SETTLEPIENT, I F SETTLEMENT APPEARS TO B E A
P O S S I B I L I T Y ,
F, FLEXIBLE JOINTS
WHERE IT IS IMPRACTICAL OR UNECONOMICAL TO PWOVIQE
F L E X I B I L I T Y TO P I P I N G LAYOUT, I T NAY BE NECESSARY TO
USE SOME TYPE OF F L E X I B L E J O I N T S OR F L E X I B L E HOSE,
BALL JOINTS - UNIVERSAL B A L L J O I N T S ( E ~ G , . BARCO) ARE
MANUFACTURED I N S I Z E S UP TO 12 I N m THEY HAVE GREATER
RESISTANCE TO F I R E THAN OTHER F L E X I B L E TYPE J O I N T S ,
ROTATIONAL OR LAP JOINT FLANGES - VAN STONE FLANGES AWE
NOT CONSTRUCTED TO R E S I S T T14RUSB8 BUT ARE ADAPTED 10
MEET SETTLEHENB MOVEMENT BY ROTATION,
A L A P J O I N T FLANGE U S I N G GALVANIZED SHEETS E I T H E R
WRAPPED W I T H TEFLON TAPE OR SPRAYEL W I T H A TEFLON
COATING (SEE DRAWING 6E-135177) HAS BEEN A P P L I E D
SUCCESSFULLY IN PASCAGOULA REF PNERY TANK FIELD PIPING,
GASKET COUPLINGS - GASKET COUPLINGS ( E ~ G . , DRESSER AND
VICTAULIC) PROVIDE A METHOD FOR JOINING PIPE TOGETHER
WITHOUT WELDING* THESE JOINTS HAVE FAILED UNDER F I R E
EXPOSURE AND HAVE DUHPED APPRECIABLE AMOUNTS OF FUEL,
RESULTING I N SPREADING THE F I R E AND SOMETIIj iES COPaPLEf E
LOSS OF TANK CONTENTS,
FOR T H I S QEASON, A V O I D T H E I R USE FOR L I N E S ADJACENT TO
TANKS,
BELLOWS EXPAMSIOP~ JOINTS - BELLOWS EXPANS ION JOINTS CAN
BE MADE I N A L L S I Z E S AND HAVE SOME ADVANTAGE OVER THE
GASKET TYPE I N THAT NO PACKING I S REQUIRED,
G , FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE
AT LEAST ONE OIL COFIPANY HAS CONDUCTED LIMITED FIELD
F I R E TESTS ON SMALL DIAMETER F L E X I B L E METAL HOSE,
METAL HOSE SELECTIONS OFFER THE FOLLOWING ADVANTAGES
OVER THE F L E X I B L E TYPE J O I N T :
1) METAL HOSE ABS@WBS END LOADING AND DOES NOT
REQUIRE S P E C I A L T I E RODS AND ANCHORS NECESSARY FOR
F L E X I B L E J O I N T S ,
2 ) A S I N G L E k lETAL HOSE CAN ABSORB THREE-DIMENSIONAL
MOVEMENT, ON THE OTHER HAND, BELLOWS AND F L E X I B L E
J O I N T S CANNOT HANDLE L A T E R A L DISPLACEMENT UNLESS
USED I N S E R I E S W I T H A STRAIGHT SECTION OF P IPE
BETWEEN W P A I R OF THE J O I N T S ,
3) METAL HOSE COSTS LESS THAN A COMPARABLE BELLOWS OR
B A L L J O I N T F L E X I B I L I T Y SYSTEM,
HI FLEXIBLE RUBBER HOSE
WHERE LARGE R E L A T I V E MOVEMENTS OF TANKS AND L I N E S ARE
A N T I C I P A T E D , REINFOQCED AND ASBESTOS WRAPPED RUBBER
(CARGO) HOSE CAN P R O V I ~ E D NEEDED FLEXIBILITY.
03 m a " rpcyro
Y '97 - . 00- .5
=CYgg < < < < < < 4 - < < < 2.. : - I - & Q)
0
; ' I 3U I I
0 5 A W - LL
I - - Q I a - 9 . . Q d C
-CI* L 0 A I- - 0 B
a . . a m a 0 L L o II n a & a
Q a L - - C 'a
a = Q > 2 ; 2 . ; - a X Y w 9 g Z
0 - 0 a m - a m - m * C Y ( Y ~ h t m m m - = r m u , m =r
I 0 O L U a 1 a - z 0 1 L - a - 0
Q - ' c r O C O
a n < < < < < < < * < 5 2 s : 9
X X L CII 4 4 Q C - c - - 3 5 4 3
0 0
2 2 s - 0 - o m 0 0 -
- - - . . Y Y " . ? " . Y ?h. 0 _,,----,,,,, - : z r Q
- 0 5 , < z =
Q E a 2, s a f d 2 *h(D r c a a - c y m m * - - - - - - -,(Y h(- a; g m
- n o - - D ' C r
0 * < a 0 Q x = - - A I- & - 2 & a o
I- & = 0 0
- 2 s g - s +
I
01 o e a g O o O O o 0 = = = = + Q = C 0 * * m h ( h ( - - ' n orL - a * -5s
- a -
W g = a , z z = 2 2 % g z a - z h( m x
CCT 1967 (Mar 1962 ~eissued) 430-5
-- --
7
0 0 0
O h 0 m - m
0 0 0
- 0 - m m m
0 0 0
- h ( m m m m
0 0
.
* m m m
Z E c , = 0 1 a a - n o 0 - - A > a w c c o
n o a E e - a a c r n ~ 2 2 g z " X - a n c a a m
m m - 5 . . a? C C Z ' n L - c l - L
0 - a z: Q a z o = c l L c l u 0 C Q C + Q L O 1 L z 0
3 5 2 0 ,O" n o - C .- - m a .- 4 2 c 2 2 O - 5 n u ,= .- m n 0 'n 5 .L a ; - 0 - rn
3 0 a
T A N K D A T A 8 0 0 K
TABLE 2
ALLOWABLE BEND l NG MOMENTS
FOR P I P E AND F ITT INGS
I P I P E 1 , M O M E N T -8". K ~ P I N C H E S
NOTES
I. Pipe assumed to be A-83, A-53A with a1 lowabl e stress of 16,QOQ psi normal
or W,000 psi bending with line cold and at low pressure.
SIZE
NOM.
2. Allowable bending stress equal to 40,008 psi. Appropriate concentration factors have been used in accordance with Part 5, Page 96 of ASA B 31.3 - 1959 Ref inary. Pi ping Code.
3. Allowable bending on flange calculated from 1959 ASME Boiler Code, Section 8, Appendix II. 1/16 inch asbestos gasket used.
THICK
INCHES
4. Allowable bending in cast iron valve = 6 0 ( ~ +3)= where D = pipe O.D. in i nches.
WELD l NG WELDING FIELD FABR. STEEL CAST I RON
PIPE ( I ) 1 ELBOW (2) 1 TEE (2) 1 TEE (2) FLANGE (3) FLAHOE ( 4 ) 1
OCT 1967 ( ~ a r 1562 Reissced)
u/+h h e k ~e / f / emen i ;
/f musf no? 3e used
I rvhrre cyc//c moflon WI/ / joke p h c e .
Ir '
i o c o f / o n A
NOT.: defo,/ /> io be used on/v .I' when r ~ f u / / m
i go j o / n f /on o e 1s eapecied i o occur i ocoimn 8 ' 1 /n one d/rect/o/t, such
!
/ v P / C A L / N S ~ A L L A T / O N /LOR L A P J O I N J RAN d S 3 /NJANK JIELD /P/A/G
I 1 1 1 1
EIB. DEPT. T STANDARD OIL COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA
~QUDOFEM~~HEEB EnelnnRlne DEtlrRrvrnr
r / ,
'lrM FRAmtsco 1,
SCALE DA T D R A ~ CH DR.APP ENG
OPRB. DEPT.
X I I I , TANK MA1 NTENANCE
A, SCOPE
THIS SECTION SUMHARIZES MAINTENANCE PRACTICES OF
VARIOUS OPERATING ORGANIZATIONS AND IS INTENDED TO BE
USED AS A GUIDE, LOCAL CONDITIONS AND EXPERIENCE INFLUENCE THE PROCEDURES USED IN MAINTENANCE WORK,
PROCEDURES FOR CLEANING PETROLEUM STORAGE TANKS VARY DEPENDING ON LIKELIHOOD FOR ACCIDENT AND FIRE, AND
OTHER FACTORS, DIFFERENT COMPANY ORGANIZATIONS HAVE PREPARED GUIDING PRACTICES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR
VENTILATING AND CLEANIdG TANKS, SOME OF WHICH ARE
LISTED BELOW,
4 , MARKETING DEPARTMENT, CHEVRON U .S ,A,, OPERATIONS
STANDARD, SECTION I X , PART D, "TANK CLEANING
INSTRUCTIONS, I/
#HEN SHELL DOOR SHEETS OR ROOF WINDOWS ARE OUT IN
TANKS FOR LARGE EQUIPMENT ACCESS, ESTABLISHED SAFETY
PROCEDURES SHOULD BE FOLLOWED FOR HOT WORK, Q U A L I F I E D *-
WELDING PROCEDURES USED FOR THE MATE8IAL INVOLVED AND
CORNERS AT THE REPLACEMENT PLATES ROUNDED TO A RADIUS
EQUAL TO 5 TO 10 TIMES THE PLATE THICKNESS TO REDUCE
STRESS CONCENTRATIONS,
C , SHELL
TANKS CONTAINING CRUDES AND REFINED OILS HEAVY ENOUGH
TO M A I N T A I N A PROTECTIVE F I L M SELDOM SHOW APPRECIABLE
S H E L L CORROSIOM BELOW THE TOP O I L WORKING HEIGHT8
EXCEPT ON THE BOTTOM COURSE, LIGHT REFINED OIL AND
PETROCHEMICAL TANKS# I N CONTRAST8 MAY SUFFER FWOH
GENERAL CORROSION OVER THE E N T I R E I N T E R I O R SURFACES.
NHEN AFTER RIMTERHAL I N S P E C T I O N 8 EXCESSIVE CORROSIOM
I S SUSPECTED8 GAUGINGS OF SHELL THICKNESS SHOULD B E
TAKEN TO DETERMINE THE EFFECT OF CORROSION ON THE
SHELL ,
1, "TANK LIFE AND OPERATING LIMITS~" WRITTEN FOR
THE IBM 360/65 SYSTEM AND AVAILABLE THROUGH THE
CORPORATION ENGINEER I NG DEPARTHENT COMPUTER .-
STAFF, AND
2, "TKSTR," WRITTEN FOR THE COP~PANY VP/CSS SYSTEH
AND AVA I LABLE THROUGH W , O I I l PIPELINE
DEPARTMENT,
AND RETIRING TANKS, IT ALLOWS HIGHER CONDEMNING
'STRESSES FOR MOST WELDED TANKS BUILT FROM 1949 ON DUE
TO THE INCORPORATION OF IMPROVED MATERIALS, BETTER
F A B R I C A T I O N DETAILS, INCREASED WELD INSPECTION, AND
BETTER WELDING, FOR DETAILS REFER TO THE TANK
MANUAL,
INTERVAL BETWEEN INSPECTIONS DEPENDS LARGELY UPON THE
PRODUCT HANDLED AND THE CORROSION HISTORY OF THE TANK
AND MAY VARY FROM ONE OR TWO YEARS TO TEN OR HORE
YEARS. WHERE A NUMBER OF TANKS ARE IN IDENTICAL
SERVICE, RANDOM INSPECTIONS MAY BE MADE OF SINGLE
TANKS AT APPROPRIATE INTERVALS TO ESTABLISH THE
CORROSION PATTERN OF THE GROUP PROVIDED THERE I S -.
EVIDENCE THAT THE TANKS ARE NOT APPROACHING THE END
OF THEIR SAFE OPERATING L I F E ,
AFTER A TANK HAS BEEN CLEANED, EACH COURSE OF THE
SHELL SHOULD BE INSPECTED AT LEAST AT QUARTER P O I N T S #
MORE I F BADLY C O R ~ O D E D , CORROSION SOMET IMES VARIES
BETWEEN SHADY AND SUNNY S I D E S ,
NOH-DESTRUCT IVE TEST METHODS ARE BECOMING MORE
R E F I N E D AND ACCURATE AND ARE G A I N I N G WIDESPREAD USE.
THESE METHODS INCLUDE ULTRASONICS, V I SUAL INSPECTION,
EDDY CURRENT DEVICES, AND RADIOGRAPHY# AND ARE
DESCRIBED IN SECTION 215 OF THE CORROSION PREVENTION
MANUAL,
THE METHOD ALMOST UNIVERSALLY USED TO GAGE THE METAL
THICKNESS IS ULTRASONICS, HOWEVER, WHEN THE
CORROSIVE C O N D I T I O N OF THE S H E L L I S VERY SEVERE, A
MEANINGFUL ULTRASONIC READING I S D I F F I C U L T TO O B T A I N
AND A I N T E R N A L TANK I N S P E C T I O N I S NECESSARY.
WITH THE INCREASED USE OF ULTRASONICS TO DETERMINE _
WALL THICKNESSES I N E X I S T I N G TANKS, PLATE L A M I N A T I O N S
AND CLUSTERED I N C L U S I O N S ARE B E I N G DETECTED W I T H SOME
FREQUENCY,
UPON DETECT ION OF QUEST IONABLE AREAS WITH ULTRASONIC
INSTRUMENTS, THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE I S RECOMMENDED:
2, WHEN THE TANK CAM BE ENTERED, THE SUSPECT AREA
SHOULD BE MAPPED FROM THE I N S I D E AND V I S U A L L Y
INSPECTED,
-3, IF CONCERN EXISTS AFTER STEP 2, OR AFTER STEP 1
AND IT IS NOT CONVENIENT TO TAKE STEP 2,
O B T A I N I N G MORE EXPER I ENCED CONSLILTAT I O N I S
RECOMMENDED a
FOR A RIVETED TANK WITH A FEW OR MANY YEARS OF
SATISFACTORY SERVICE6 I F THE I N D I C A T I O N S CAN B E
REASONABLY PROVEN TO BE L A M I N A T I O N S GENERALLY
P A R A L L E L TO THE PLANE OF THE PLATE, ANY CORRECTIVE
A C T I O N OR DERATIWG I S NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS:
A , THERE WAS AN UNUSUALLY HIGH RISK ASSOCIATED WITH
THE LOCATION,
C , THE TANK WAS EXPERIENCING HYDROGEN BLISTERING OR
WAS I N AN A C I D OR SOUR WATER SERVICE WHERE
HYDROGEN BLISTERS WOULD BE EXPECTED,
1. API GUIDE FOR INSPECTION OF REFINERY EQUIPMENT,
CHAPTER X I I I ATMOSPHERIC AND LOW PRESSURE
STOWAGE TANKS,
4 . PIPE LINE DEPARTMENT, WESTERN OPERATIONS, I N C , r STANDARD No, 5,231,6, "TANK INSPECTION, P I
D, BOTTOMS
~NABILITY TO INSPECT TANK BOTTOMS I N SERVICE MAKES I T
ALMOST I M P O S S I B L E TO PREDICT THE AMOUIVT AND NATURE OF
MAINTENANCE WORK REQUIRED, BOTH INTERNAL AND
EXTERNAL CORROSION OF TANK BOTTOMS USUALLY RESULT I H
P I T T I N G RATHER THAN GENERAL SURFACE CORROSION,
SINCE THE PRIMARY FUNCTION OF A TANK BOTTOM IS TO
R E T A I N TANK CONTENTS, THE ECONOMIC C R I T E R I A THAT
O R D I N A R I L Y GOVERN FOR UNIFORM CORROSION DO NOT APPLY
FOR BOTTOM PITTING, FOR EXAMPLE, A TANK ROOF MAY
STILL BE QUITE SERVICEABLE EVEN WHEN 50% OF THE
O R I G I N A L METAL HAS BEEN LOST BY CORROSION BECAUSE THE
METAL LOSS I S EVENLY D I S T R I B U T E D THROUGHOUT AND NO
L O C A L I Z E D P I T T I N G OR HOLES HAVE OCCURRED I N THE
COVERING, IN CONTRAST, A TANK BOTTOM WHICH HAS LOST
L I T T L E AS 5% OF I T S O R I G I N A L METAL MAY B E USELESS AND
REQUIRE EXTENSIVE R E P A I R OR REPLACEMENT,
-.
FOR YOUR INFORMATION, ATTACHED TO THIS SECTION IS A
COPY OF API PETROLEUM SAFETY DATA SHEET PDS-2207,
PREPARING TANK BOTTOMS FOR HOT WORK,
TANK BOTTOMS, EXCEPT IN THE VICINITY OF T H E I ~ -
ATTACHMENT TO THE SHELL, ARE ALMOST UNSTRESSED DURING
NORMAL OPERATIONS OF THE TANK, THIS DISCUSSION IS
CONFINED TO TANKS HAVING AN I N I T I A L 1/4-INCH S T E E L
BOTTOM AND MAY NOT NECESSARILY BE A P P L I C A B L E 60
THINNER BOTTOMS USED I N BOLTED AND GALVANIZED TANKS,
LOSS RECORDS, FIRST VISUAL EVIDENCE GENERALLY
CONSISTS OF LEAKAGE WHICH SHOWS UP OW THE TANK GRADE,
SOMETIMES ACTIVE LEAKS MAY BE CONTROLLED TEMPBRAR ILY
B Y P L A C I N G CLAY, D I 4 T t MUD OR S I M I L A R M A T E R I A L
THROUGH THE RGOF I N THE GENERAL AREA I N D I C A T E D B Y THE
L E A K # OR B Y M A I N T A I N I N G A WATER BOTTOM,
TANK BOTTOMS SHOULD BE CLEANED ONLY TO THE EXTENT
NECESSARY FOR INSPECTION, HAMMER TESTING BY AN -.
EXPERIENCED INSPECTOR I S AN A I D I N LOCATING P I T S AND
T H I N SPOTS AT BOTH TOP AND UNDERSIDE OF THE BOTTOM
PLATE, ALTHOUGH UNDOUBTEDLY BETTER RESULTS ARE
OBTAINED WHEN USING ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT,
SNALL LEAKS OFTEN ARE DIFFICULT TO LOCATE^ ONE
METHOD I S TO USE A VACUUM BOX WITH A SOLUTION FOR THE -
DETECTION OF AIR BUBBLES, ANOTHER METHOD USED
SUCCESSFULLY FOR RELATIVELY SMALL TANKS I S TO APPLY
A I R PRESSURE UNDER THE TANK BOTTOM AFTER CAULKIMG
AROUND THE PERIPHERY OF THE TANK BETWEEN THE
BOTTOMPLATE AND THE TANK'S FOUNDATION, WITH A SMALL
AMOUNT OF WATER I N S I D E , LEAKS ARE LOCATED E A S I L Y AS
THE A I R BUBBLES THROUGH,
WHEN A BOTTOM REPAIR IS INDICATED AS A RESULT OF
INTERNAL CORROSION. I T MAY BE PERTINENT TO KNOW AT
THE SAME T IME WHETHER THEliE I S ANY EXTERNAL
CORROSION, HOWEVER, IN THIS CASE - INSTEAD OF HAMMER
TESTING - I T I S RECOMMENDED TO CUT HOLES TO INSPECT
THE UNDERSIDE, WHEREBY I T I S DESIRABLE THAT THE
OPENIHGS BE LARGE ENOUGH TO ACCOMMODATE PLACEMENT OF
A FOOT JACK UNDER THE BOTTOM, THIS WILL ALLOW THE
BOTTOM TO BE RAISED AND INSPECTED UNDERNEATH WITH A
FLASHLIGHT FOR SOME DISTANCE,
THE USE OF ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT WOULD INDICATE MORE
ACCURATELY WHERE AND TO WHAT EXTENT REPAIRS ARE
REQU I RED
BEFORE BOTTOM R E P A I R I S UNDERTAKEN U S I N G P L A S T I C , -
CONCRETE, OW OTHER COATINGS, OVER OLD BOTTOMS,
STRUCTURAL SOUNDNESS AND L I Q U I D TIGHTNESS OF THE
SHELL-TO-BOTTOM CONNECTION SHOULD BE DETERMINED BY
CAREFUL I N S P E C T I O N ,
GALVANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE MILL SCALE AND BASE STEEL
ACCELERATES CORROSION OF THE UPPER SURFACE, THIS IS
CHARACTERIZED BY N ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ " OF THE WELDS OR AREAS OF
PLATES WHERE THE MILL SCALE HAS COME LOOSE, HHERE
T H I S C O N D I T I O N OCCURS, GALVANIC CORROSION MAY BE
ARRESTED B Y SANDBLASTING TO REMOVE THE M I L L SCALE,
THE PRESENT AVAILABILITY OF A WIDE VARIETY OF
ACCEPTABLE P L A S T I C COATINGS THAT CAN BE A P P L I E D AT
LOW COST HAS MADE THE USE OF WELDING TO R E P A I R
DEFECTS LESS ECONOMICALLY ATTRACTIVE THAN HERETOFORE.
-.
WHERE THE REPAIR OF DEFECTS BY WELDING HAS BEEN
DETERMINED TO BE THE PROPER R E P A I R METHOD THE
FOLLOWING C R I T E R I A FOR MAKING THE R E P A I R ARE
SUGGESTED:
A , SPOT WELD PITS HALF WAY OR MORE THROUGH THE
PLATE I F THE P I T I S NOT GREATER THAN 1 I N C H -
I N DIAMETER AND SURROUNDED B Y SUBSTANTIALLY
F U L L THICKNESS M A T E R I A L ,
B , PATCH PITTED AREAS 09 LARGER THAN 1 INCH
DIAMETER WITH PIECES OF 1/4 INCH PLATE FULL
F I L L E T WELDED A L L AROUND,
2, FOR REPAIRING DEFECTS DUE TO UNDERSIDE
CORROSION:
A , PLUG HOLES MHICH ARE WEEPING STOCK BACK
I N T O THE TANK FROM UNDER THE BOTTOM,
8, REPAIR HOLES B Y WELDING ON LARGE PATCHES,
NEVER SPOT WELD SUCH HOLES,
C , SEVERAL HOLES IN THE SAME VICINITY INDICATE
A BADLY CORRODED AREA. COVER THE ENTIRE
AREA W I T H A LARGE PATCH RATHER THAN A
NUMBER OF SMALLER PATCHESl - ..
D , IN WELDING OM PATCHES, WELDERS SHOULD C A L L
ATTENTION TO A L L PLACES WHICH BURN THROUGH
ON ACCOUNT OF THIN PLATE, THE PATCH IS NOT
LARGE ENOUGH AND SHOULD BE EXTENDED,
WHEN CORROSION AND/OR PITTING OF THE TANK BOTTOH
I S SEVERE OR WIDESPREAD ENOUGH TO MAKE R E P A I R S
BY WELDING UNECONOMICAL THERE ARE A V A R I E T Y OF
OTHER HETHODS FOR EFFECTING A MAJOR REPAIR, THE
THREE P R I N C I P A L METHODS ARE: [ N S T A L L A NEW STEEL
BOTTBr4, L I N E THE BOTTOM W I T H A F IBERGLASS
REINFORCED P L A S T I C COATING AND, APPLY AN
UNREINFORCED P L A S T I C COATING,
FIG, 500-1 PRESENTS THE COMPARATIVE COST OF
THREE METHODS MENTIONED ABOVE AND WAS COMPILED
FROM 1965-1972 COMPANY-WIDE EXPERIENCE.
GENERALLY THE REPLACEMENT BOTTOMS HAVE BEEN LAID
OVER AN O I L - S A N D PAD COVERING THE OLD BOTTOM;
SKETCH PLATES ARE S L I D THROUGH A SLOT CUT I N THE
SHELL, I F T H I S I S DONE IN THE PROPER SEQUENCE, -*
J A C K I N G OF THE TANK SHELL I S UNNECESSARY,
BOTH CUTBACK ASPHALT AND HEAVY FUEL OIL HAVE
BEEN us:a FOR OILING THE SAND PAD, CARE MUST BE
TAKEN A T A L L T I M E S TO B E SURE THE TANK I S SAFE
FOR WELD1 NG ,
THE NEW BOTTOM IS CONTINUOUSLY WELDED TO THE
SHELL. U S I N G GENEROUS F I L L E T WELDS ON THE T O P I
INTERMITTENT FILLET WELDS FOR STRENGTH ARE MADE
BETWEEN THE NEW BOTTOM AND THE LOWER PART OF THE
OLD SHELL (SEE SKETCH NO, 11,
SUCH A REPLACEMENT BOTTOM CANNOT BE CATHODICALLY
PROTECTED, BECAUSE THE OLD BOTTOM WILL S H I E L D
THE NEW BOTTOM FROM THE PROTECTIVE CURRENT,
MEW STEEL (HENCE THE BOTTOM) WILL NORMALLY BE
ANODIC TO OLD STEEL (SHELL), IF THE TANK
CONTAINS A BOTTOM LAYER OF CORROSIVE WATER, T H I S
MEANS THE NEW BOTTOM MAY BE I N C L i N E D TO CORRODE
FASTER THAN THE PREVIOUS ONE, UNDERSIDE
CORROSION OF NEW BOTTOMS HAS NOT USUALLY BEEN A
PUOBLEH, PROBABLY BECAUSE OF THE HIGH
R E S I S T I V I T Y OF THE OIL -SAND LAYER,
1, API RP-12H "RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR
INSTALLATION OF NEW BOTTOMS IN OLD STORAGE -
TANKS"
IN MOST INSTANCES, IT IS SIGNIFICANTLY LESS
COSTLY THAN A NEW STEEL BOTTOM, CO~PANY EXPERIENCE AND THE AVAILABILITY OF MANY
COMPETENT APPLICATION CONTRACTORS MAKE THIS A
PROVEN AND SATISFACTORY REPAIR METHOD,
APPENDIX B OUTLINES IN DETAILS THE EQUIPMENT*
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES THAT HAVE BEEN FOUND BY
WESTERN QPERATHBP~S TO PRODUCE A SATISFACTORY JOB
WHEN UTILIZING POLYESTER RESINS FOR TANK
REPAIRS. THE MATERIALS DIVISION OF THE
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT MAY BE CONTACTED IF -,
QUESTIONS ARISE OR IF FURTHER INFORMATION IS
NEEDED,
A 1/8-INCH OR THICKER LAYER OF REINFORCED
ISBPOLYESTER OF EPOXY R E S I N L A M I N A T E M A T E R I A L
HAS THE STRUCTURAL C A P A B I L I T Y TO SPAN SMALL
HOLES OR TO DEFLECT TO GET SUPPORT FROM THE TANK
SUBBASE AT LARGER DIAMETER HOLES, 1~ I S
D I F F I C U L T TO I N S T A L L SOUND L A M I N A T E OVER A LARGE
HOLE a
THIS REPAIR METHOD CAN BE CONSIDERED WHERE THE
BOTTOH I S T I G H T AND COREOSIOIU OR P I T T I N G HAS
OCCURRED P R I M A R I L Y ON THE STOCK S I D E OF THE TANK
BOTTOM, MOST REINFORCED COATINGS USED TO
PROTECT TANK BOBTOQlS ARE PROPRIETARY EPOXIES OR
COAL TAR EPOXIES.
THESE COATINGS ARE NOT INTENDED TO PROVIDE
MECHANICAL STRENGTH, THEY ARE GENERALLY THIN
(10-20 MILS) AS COPIPAARED TO 1/8" - 1/4"
THICKNESS OF THE REINFORCED COATINGS, THE .
TEMPERATURE L I M I T A T I O N S AND CONDIT IONS G I V E N
ABOVE FOR REINFORCED COATINGS ALSO APPLY TO
UMREINFORCED COATING: HOWEVER, THE EPOXIES
GENERALLY HAVE HIGHER TEMPERATURE LIMITS,
METAL-BEARING COATINGS, SUCH AS DIMETCOTE #3 ( A
ZINC-SILICATE TYPE COATING), ARE APPLIED BY
SPRAY GUN OVER A SURFACE WHICH HAS BEEN
THOROUGHLY SANDBLASTED, DIMETCOTE #3 HAS BEEN
VERY EFFECTIVE FOR REDUCING CORROSION AS AN
INNER COATING FOR TANKERS AND TANKS HANDLING
PETROCHEMICALS,
SATISFACTORY RESULTS HAVE BEEN OBTAINED BY
F I L I N G WITH CONCRETE AS FOLLOWS:
B, DRILL HOLES IN BLOWN-UP AREAS AND FILL
C A V I T I E S UNDER THE TANK BOTTOM WITH GROUT,
I F REQUIRED,
C , APPLY ROOF PUTTY AROUND THE LOWER PORTION
OF THE SHELL - SEE DRAWING GE-134179 - TO
PROVIDE SPACE FOR SEAL, -.
D, PLACE 4 INCHES OF CONCRETE OVER THE ENTIRE
BOTTOM, U S I N G THE FOLLOWING MIX , AND APPLY
STEEL TROWEL F I N I S H :
7 SACKS
1888 L S S ,
WATER 33 GALS.
RELEGATED BY THE ADVENT OF P L A S T I C COATINGS TO A
FEW S P E C I A L S I T U A T I O N S ,
"GEL" MUD Fr LLS
OFTEN IT IS NECESSARY FOR A LEAKY TANK TO REMAIN
I N SERVICE FOR A CONSIDERABLE T I M E BEFORE I T CAN
BE EMPTIED FOR REPAIRS, THIS MATERIAL MAY BE
E A S I L Y M I X E D A N D I N J E C T E D BY U S I N G A STANDARD
F nwE FOAM GENERATOR (SEE DRAWING GE-1351891,
CATHODIC PWOTECTIBN CAM SOMETIMES BE A P P L I E D TO
PREVENT UNDERSIDE BOTTOM CORROSION OF E X I S T I N G
TANKS. HOWEVER, IF THERE IS PAVEMENT, CATHODIC
PROTECTION MAY BE I N E F F E C T I V E ,
\ 3
AN IMPERMEABLE PAVEMENT WILL PREVENT THE FLOW OF
CATHODIC PROTECTION CURRENT TO THE BOTTOM STEEL,
CATHODIC PROTECTION WILL BE EFFECTIVE WHEXE -
THERE ARE PERMEABLE AREAS OR BREAKS I N THE
PAVEHENT AND WILL PREVENT CORROSION DUE TO
MOISTURE PENETRATING THROUGH THE PAVEMENT AT
SUCH L O C A B I ONS , HOWEVER, CORROSION DUE TO
MOISTURE MIGRATING UNDER THE TANK FROM PERMEABLE
TO IHPERMEABLE AREAS CANNOT BE E L I M I N A T E D , FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REFER TO SECTION 423 OF THE
C o w ~ o s ~ o ~ PROTECTION MANUAL, OR TO THE
CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT,
CORROSION IN VAPOR SPACES DEPEND ON THE TYPE OF VAPBZ
AND MAY BE R A P I D I F APPRECIABLE AMOUNT OF HYDROGEPi
S U L F I D E I S PRESENT,
F, FOUNDATION PAD
SETTLEMENT OF THE TANK PAD DUE TO COMPRESSION,
PARTICULARLY ON PENETRATION MACADAM OR PLANT-MIX TYPE
PAVEMENTS, MAKES A GROOVE AT THE EDGE OF THE TANK
SHELL, CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO ELIMINATE THIS GROOVE
BY LOWERING THE SHOULDER AROUND THE TANK AND PROPERLY
D R A I N I N G OFF THE WATER,
G , PROTECTIVE COATINGS
IN THE PAST, FEW ECONOMICAL COATINGS HAVE BEEN F O U ~ D
. WHICH WILL PROTECT TANK SHELLS FROM I N T E R I O R
CORROSION, IN N,C,D, EXTENSIVE USE OF HIGH SOLID
IS EFFECTIVE BUT EXPENSIVE. AN ECONO~IC AMLYSIS MAY
BE NEEDED I N ORDER TO J U S T I F Y I T S USE,
IN E X I S T I N G TANKAGE, WHEW P E R I O D I C I N S P E C T I O N HAS
I N D I C A T E D THAT CORROSION HAS REACHED L I M I T S WHICH
WOULD SOON NECESSITATE REDUCTION IN TANK F I L L I N G
HEIGHTS TO KEEP W I T H I N ALLOWABLE STRESSES, SOME -.
OPERATING ORGANIZATIONS HAVE CHECKED FURTHER
CORROSION Loss BY GUNITING THE INTERIOR OF THE TANK
SWELL, GUNITE LININGS EXTEND THE LIFE OF TANK SHELL
INDEFINITELY (AS FAR A S CORROSION IS CONCERNED) AND
CAN BE PLACED AT A COST OF ABOUT ONE-THIRD THAT OF A
NEW TANK SHELL.
PLASTIC COAT I NGS AND P A T C ~ ~ il NG
SOME GF THE MORE RECENT PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR TANK
I N T E R I O R S WHICH HAVE BEEN USED SUCCESSFULLY, INCLUDE
REINFORCED P L A S T I C S AND METAL-BEARING COATINGSa
PLASTIC COATINGS REINFORCED WITH GLASS FIBERS AWE NOT
A P P L I E D W I T H A GUN AT A COST C O M P E T I T I V E W I T H THE
COST OF GUN ITE LINING, METAL-BEARING COATINGS SUCH
AS DIMETCOTE ARE EFFECTIVE AND HAVE PROVED ECONOMICAL
FOR COATING CARGO TANKS ON TANKERS HANDLING
PETROCHEMICALS AND GASOLINE,
3 . A P I BULLETIN NO, 1607. "A REPORT ON THE USE OF
PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT
REPAIRS TO STEEL STORAGE TANKS, P I
TANKS SHOULD BE PAINTED PR IHARILY FOR PRESERVATION
AND PERHAPS EVAPORATION SAVINGS, SPECIFIC
RECOMMENDATIOFdS FOR TANK P A I N T I N G SHOULD BE BASED OY
KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CONDITIONS AND PRESENT POLICY.
H, APRONS AND GUTTERS
APRONS AND GUTTERS CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH .
DRAW I NG GC-Q78672 (SEE SECT ION X I 3 SHOULD REQUIRE
MINIMUM MAINTENANCE
SELECTION OF A GOOD APRON DRESSING IS PARTICULARLY
IMPORTANT FROM THE MAINTENANCE POINT OF VIEW. A GOOD
DRESSING WILL PROVIDE A SURFACE THAT WILL REHAIN I N
PLACE AND WITHSTAND THE ERODING EFFECTS OF WIND AND
RAIN.
-STOPPING TANK BOTTOM LEAKS WITH "GEL" COMPOUNDS
TANK MANUAL TANK MAMTENmCE
RGtASS REINFORCED POLYESTER RESIN
I l l 1 1 1 1 ! / I I l l / I l l / I I , I I I I I I l l 1 i i ! l / i l l l l l ~ I I / j i i 1 1 1 1 i l l i l 1 ! 1 j 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 I l l i 1 1 1 1 1 1 : ! I ; I ! / / / / I i l l , I ; / I ! I ! I ! ] I ) ) i l l / ; ( I t i ! : I l l ! I j j : : ; I 8 1 1
I l j l t i l l I l i l i l i l I I 1 1 I I 1 1 1 \ , / I I ! I j i I ! ! : - 1 ' 1 1 I l l - l ! l l I l ! ! ! I I I I I I l l ! ~ I l l ! I l l 1 / I I ! ! ~ I ~ ~ , I I ~ I-
1 1 I I i i T - I i I I l 1 - 1 1 ' 1 1 ; l l l i 1 1 , ! I l l l ' , , l l I l l l ! I : I i l l , , , , I i l i i ' , , I I : , ; , I
TANK DIAMETER - FEET
COMPARATIVE COST OF MAJOR TANK BOTTOM REPAIRS
1. CURVES ARE BASED ON RECENT (1965 - 1972) COMPANY JOBS ADJUSTED TO MARCH 1973.
2. COST OF CLEANING AND MAKING TANK SAFE FOR WORK 1s NOT INCLUDED.
3. COST FOR A SPECIFIC JOB MAY VARY CONSIDERABLY FROM CURVES DUE TO AVAILABILITY OF COMPETENT LABOR, EQUIPMENT, LOCATION AND WEATHER CONDITIONS.
FIGURE 500-1
TANK MANUAL ThVK MAINTENAVCE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TAUK G W T I N G
Typical Prodecures and Specifications for Guniting h i d e a tank shell are as follows:
Sandblasting
Sandblast the entire surface to be W t e d so that it is free from m t and scale. For floating roof tanks, support the roof with the seal removed, where possible, on the roof legs in their high position.
Reinforcing
Attach to all portions of the shell and the bottom which m to be ,ounited, a 2-inch by 2-inch, 12- by 12-gage welded gabmized wixe mesh Wla mesh shdl be spaced 314 inch to 718-inch from the shell and supported with 311dkch diameter, 611dinch Vee form, steel wire, welded to the shell a d that part of the bottom of the tank as shown on Sketch NO. 3.
Application of Gunite
Apply two cdats of gunite to the inside surface of the shell and that portion of the bottom as indicated on Sketch No. 3.
Apply the first coat, 1-inch thick, of undisturbed , h t e to cover the wire mesh.
Not less than 24 hours after the application of the first coat, apply a second coat of ,gmite, rod, and f d h with a wooden float. Final thickness of the f i i h e d work shall not be less than 1-112 inch. Surfaces shald be true and even and shall not deviate more than 114-inch in 1 &inch when checked with an 18-inch long radius board in the horizontal plane, and shall be free from crazing or other defects. Final coverage of all mesh and attachment wires shall not be less than 518-inch.
Gunite Materials Mix
Ckment - Pure Portland cement, free from lumps and hardened particles, shall be used.
Sad - Sand shall be clean, hard, dense, sharp and free from organic or deleterious matter. Sand for gunite shald be graded within the limits tabulated below:
Sieve 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 10Q
Percent Passing Sieve by Weight
1 QQ 98-1 00 70-95 6G85 45-45 15-35 0-5
TANK MANUAL TANK MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX B
POLYESTER RESIN FOR TANK REPAIRS
GENERAL
The resins referred to in this guide are themwetting rigid polyester resins produced from Isophtalic acid or bisphenol-fumaric, and mixed with styrene. When catalyzed, the resins will polymerize to a clear hard, strong material.
NOTE: Imuroper use of polyester resin can involve inhalation hazards, skin and eye hazards. and danger of fire. It is necessary to observe certain precautionary measures to insure safe usage.
EQUIPMENT
Guns - A Single nozzle with catalyst injector. These are designed to spray promoted resin and to inject
catalyst. either into the nozzle (internal mix) or into the air stream (extermal mix).
B. Twonozzle type. These guns are designed to be used with separate supply lines to each nozzle to suppiy resin mixed with catalyst to one nozzle and resin mixed with promoter to the other. The two streams of resin mix in the air in front of the gun.
Choppers - A device to chop fiber glass roving into short lengths for mixture of glass and resin. This is an air driven attachment to the spray gun and is designed to chop and blow the roving into the resin mixture as it is applied.
Sandblasting Equipment - Coventional sandblasting equipment to clean to bare metal the parts to be coated.
Rubber Gloves - Rubber or polyethylene doves are recommended while handling liquid styrene, catlysts and promoters.
Rollers - A ARSCO Co. Long nap, sheepwool, wooden core rollers are used for rolling out chopped roving
and resin and for wetting out mat and resin (4" and 9" width).
B. VENUS Co. serrated aiuminum rollers are used for compressing and removing air from the wet laminate. These are available in 3, 7 and 9" widths and 1" and 2" diameters.
C. A solid steel roler or steel pipe with grooves cut into the surface also makes an effective roller.
D. A cylinder of galvanized 114" hardware cloth attached to a regular roller frame and handle is very efficient to roll out chopped glass laminate.
TANK M A N U A L T.ANK :MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX C
CLEANING FUEL OIL AND CRUDE TANKS WITH
VARIABLE ANGLE MIXER
GENERAL
Variable angle or swivel mixers, have k e n used for d e m i n g heavy oil and crude tanks. The flow pat terns c rea ted by these mixers significantly reduce oily wasre d iswsai problems by keeping c he s e d i m e n ~ s in suspension w i ~ h 11% s ~ c r e d fluid or w i ~ h - 7 a ijush duid. T 'ky &re then removed by pumping :he rnixture out of he ~ m k . i nis method when compared t o the cooventionai manuai c i eming rnexhoa m a y be i a s t e r m d more economica l
TRADITIONAL CLEANING PRACTICE
Cleaning tanks has been a difficult operation. The past methods a re expensive, unple3sant and messy aif airs. Methods vary from plant so plant. 4 brief outline of a typical traditional procedure is as follows:
The tank is heated t o return a portion of t h e bot toms t o t h e solution and then pumped t o another tank. After using an eductor in the tank, rhe tank is hosed down with f i re hoses. A hot/cold water circulation system is installed and t h e tank is filled with water and heated. The oil is then skimmed off t h e t op and then t h e tank is emptied. The le f tover sludge is then hosed or vacuumed out and used for a landfill.
The t ime fo r this procedure ranges up t o about 4 weeks and 12-man days, depending . - on the s ize of the t ank and t h e kind of s tored crude.
TANK MANUAL TANK MAINTEYANCE
Figure I
Reproduced f rom l ensen I n ~ e r n a ~ i o n a l , IPIC'S. Series 608 Mixers Brochure
T A N K bIANU.4L TANK L I X I N T Z S X N C E
CLEANING WITH ,A 'JilRIAaLE ANGLE MIXER
Advantages
Using a variable angle mixer in 3 d e a n i n g procedure has cur down the expense and t ime of cleaning ranks. A variable a g l e mixer has a ba l l -~ype stuffing Sox thar d l o w s angular movement and it f i t s into The sheil manholes.
Figure 1 shows the Vari-Anglet jensen Mixer, which has 60' angular adjustment. The flow pat terns established by the normal side entering mixer allow sediment accumula- tions in dead spots (Figure 2). The variabie angle mixer can d i rec t flow Fat terns ro atmost mv a-ea of :he rank and e!iminates most dead spors. Tile acvznrases 31 rnis procedure are:
Valuabie od is recovered from oily soiids and is easily trsnporteci :o eke reiic- ing units. Tank capaci ty is increased because solid waste is not accumuiaring in the tank. Tank downtime is reduced. Very LitTle solid wastes must be disposed of. Overail cleaning COSTS a r e reduced (El Segundo reduced cos?s from $iZ9ivl eo $43M, refer t o VARIABLE ANGLE MIXER TESTING I N REFINERIES - El Segundo - page 500-4n). Cleaning operation is essentially d l done from outside the tank. Exposure of people to t he t m k ' s atmosphere can be minimized or eliminated. Sludge (mainly suspended wax) l e f t in tank can be moved to another rank and processed. Recovered oil may pay for the d e a n u p costs, such as: mixer COST, labor cssrs, etc. The costs for variable angle and fixed m g l e mixers xe very competitive.
FIXED SIDE ENTERING iLfIXER VARIABLE AIUGLE MIXER
Figure 2
T.ANK MANUAL T A N K M.AINTENANCE
Procedures
T k variable angle mixer is an economical and easier way t o c i e m a large ~ a n k i n fuei and crude oil service. Fo r m a l l tanks his may nor be the b e s ~ solution. The mixers f i t the existing tank manways and a r e easy t o i m t d l . S e v e r d Company rei ineries run their cfude tank mixers d m o s t continuously so a boteom sludge never buiids up.
T k mixers zre used in various tanks t o help clean and/or r e d a i m oil from ehe solid wastes.
The basic procedure is as follows:
!. The comwsi t ion o i the se i imenr Is derermineti. T'rus anaiysis is ?he basis for s e i ecung t h e soivent for dearung.
2. The solvent is added t o the t ank t o a t leasr 6 f e e t a h v e the ,mixer, a d :,his is ~ k e minimum level of liquid during operat ion of t h e mixer. This avoids u v i e a t i o n of t he fluid while mi-uing.
3. T k mixers a r e run from 5 t o 15 days in pssitions ranging from 30' right t o 3Q" I . Manufacturess recommend t h a t t h e posieion k c h m g e d every 2 4 heuss (Company use bas frequently been every 8 hours).
4. The spent solvent is pumped out of t h e tank, abld may be refined abld used a s f uei. More t han one cleaning cyc l e may be required t o thoroughly clean a rank.
5. If t h e tank is not sat isfactori ly cleaned, then hor wa te r flooding or vacuuming ehe tank may be necessary. The leftover sludge is used for a landfill.
Figure 3 shows typical mixer arrangements fo r different s ize raaks, but a r iangemenrs vary wi th type of tank bot tom, maintenance access and routing of conduit line. Cone-down tanks should have t h e m i x e n uniformly distributed around rhe tanks. Previous experience suggests t o s tandardize on a 50-np. mixer which has the capac i ty t o clean a tank up t o 196 f ~ . diameter . For tanks 150 ft . d iameter and larger , consider using two or more mixers as required (refer t o VARIABLE ANGLE MIXEZ TESTING IN REFINERIES - El Segundo, page 500-44). For cleaning of smaller tablks (about 50 ft. diameter), such a s F C C fract ionat ion bottom rundown tanks, C R C suggests using their pa ten ted "Chevron C lean Tank" process using variable angle mixers. Small tanks would require a mixer of a h u t 25 hp., depending on the s tored fluid. Mixers used for both cleaning abld blending service usually require more horsepower than required %or only cleaning. Mixer size and numbers should be verified by analysis of t h e sludge t o be removed and consultation with t h e manufacturer .
T A N K M A N U A L TANK MAINTENANCE
SuR~on Linm +
/
/
, ,--\ I
I -- -- I
/
Sun~on L i n m + ' ,/:\ /-', ~.\\
>.. - - 23- \ 1 , ,
Susrion Linm + . ,/--.-.,
;c
. . - - .~ :'y
\--- J
1-5 MIXERS
Note: A t present (1978), the only U.5. manufacturer of variable m$e mixer is Jensen Mixer.
Figure 3
VAR1,qBLE .ANGLE MIXER TESTING 1N RFFiNEliIES
The following dara and information from reiinerdes cover the results of their use o i variable ang!e mixers in several t a k s .
Richmond Refinerv
General
In May 1975, Richmond Refinery Maintenance people purchased a Jensen Vari-Ang!e Mixer and 50-hp. motor as a tank cleaning tool. Its f i rs t use in 241 Tank was success- ful, and i t has already been moved to a second tank.
!n i ts operat ion as a cur rer tank for more than f ive years' t ime, Tank 241 had recciveb line flushes of asphalt and fuel oii in addition TO a l t e r stock. Richmond e s ~ i m a t e s t ha t &our 85% of the oii in t he oily sludge in t h e tank was recovered and sold ss fuel. The cancent ra ted solids remaining were removed by vacuum truck. And 30 hours of in-tank vacuum truck e f fo r t was neczssary t o finish clean up of the Loose soiids.
This was t he f i rs t use at Richmcnd Refinery of a vari-angle mixer to d e a n a refinery :ank of bot tom sludge. This was done by adding hot FCC-mixer cu t t e r and turning on t h e Jensen mixer. Two filling-mixing-draining cycles were used.
The advantages of this procedure were:
1. Recovered valuable oil - 2,000 barrels worth $20,000. 2. Reduced cleaning costs. 3. Reduced t h e amount of oil to landspreading by 90%.
Cleaning of 24L Tank. Richmond Refinerv
Scope
Service - Has received line flushes of asphalt m d fuel oil in addition to curter . It has not been cleaned for over 5 years. Because of leakage, i t hsd t o be cleaned before repairing.
Sludge in Tank - .4 2- t o 3-foot high mound of solidified, yet soft , asphal t ic material was visible in the center of t he tank. Around this mound was 8 t o 12 inches of oil, asphal t ic material , and solids. Automat ic gauge reading 9 in. at s ta r t . Overall e s t ima te was abour 2,300 barrels of oily sludge in bot tom of t h e tank.
Sample Analysis - A sample taken near the manway was tes ted in the laboratory for t he following:
1. Samples analyzed for ash content. 2. Samples mixed with various cu t t e r s t o s ee what cu t t e r would work best. 3. Samples tes ted to see e f f ec t of tempera ture on fluidiTy and separat ion of oil
solids. Data indicated 105' needed.
TANK M A N U A L TANK MAINTENA.NCE
Attachment of Mixer 70 !ilanwav
The Jensen Yixer and related necessary gear were purchased for about $15,000 (1 975). This i nduded mixer, SO-hp. motor, e lectr ical gear, adapters, spare ?ropeller, e t c The Mixer c a m e with a 20-inch mounting flange whrch was then a t tached t o an adapter p la te f i t t ing the existing 24-inch manway. Separate adapter plates will be required for other s ize manways. Yo t i e rods a r e required.
No problems were noted In t h e subsequent operat ion of t h e Jensen Mixer, and no loss of fluid through the swivel-type joint was observed.
Firs? Vixinq C v d e
1. "FCC Hot Carter" added-!eve1 a t 11 ft. 10 in and 99'-'F.
2. Additional hat cutrer added during mixing s o level rose t o 20 f t . at b09°F.
3. Mixers operated for 67 hours. Mixer angle changed every 8 hrs. from right, center , lef t , center , erc (Changing t h e mixer angle only every 2 4 hrs. is recom- mended.)
4. Mixing stopped; cutTer t o F/O blending.
After F i rs t Cycle-Sludge in Tank - A 10-b5 in. high mound of loose solids was visible. A rough es t im3te indicated about 50% reduction in oilv solids. The sides of t h e t a n k appeGed d e a n and f r e e of any oil hangup. Sample frdm pile in t a n k showed sludge t o b e loose and t h a t it contained oil and pieces of scale, some as large as 1-in. square by bl8-in. thick.
Second Mixing C y d e
Mixing lasted about nine days. FCC hot cu t te r was again added. Mixer angle was changed once per day.
After Second Cycle - Sludge in Tank Again Reduced - The tank was inspected by f ive people, induding Mr. English of t h e Richmond Refinery, and representatives of lensen Mixers. Many a r e a s o f d e a n floor plate were found.
Estimated Effect of Cleaning C v d e s - An es t ima te of t h e results of the cleaning by mlxer IS as follows:
Firs t Mix (3 days)
Second Mix ( 9 days)
50% reduction in volume
30%-40% additional reduction
80'590% reduction of tank bot toms by mixing routines (use 85%)
TANK MANUAL TANK MAINTEYANCE
Removal of Solids from T m k bv C o n t r a C o r TJsine Vacuum Truck
Vacuum truck recovered about six loads of 2, 500 gallons eac!. Ti-,, vacuum rruck was described a s Super-Sucker unit. Total cost of the cont rac tor was $(r,800. He used h s own mcuum truck ar,d a foreman, one operator , and t w o l a k r e r s . The $4,8QQ induded t ranspaf la t ion t o and f rom Richmond Refinery.
T'R sludge was s o f t and readily removed by t h e vacuum truck.
Only 30 hours w e r e needed t o remove t h e oil sludge remaining. This debris was dumped on t h e landspreading a r e a i n t he Richmond Refinery.
Oil Recovered in C u t t e r Stock
About t O O O barrels o i 011 were recovered for w e i n fuel blends.
El Segundo Refinery
El Segundo has had succes s fd test ing and usage in several tanks with t he se mixers. T k y use 50 hp. for d e a n i n g service and 60 hp. for combined d e a n i n g and blending se rv im in rheir crude oil tanks. They found t k cos t difference minimal between fixed and variable angle mixers. Problems noted were only t h e s h a f t l e n g h of t h e mixers in ce r t a in tanks. Locally opera ted ac t iva tors were installed t o switch angles of t h e mixers (about $500 each). They ran a test on two 227 ft . diameter , 60-f;. tugh tanks using one 150-hp. mixer in each. Tank #998 with a f ixed angle mixer cost $120,000 t o d e a n . Tank /I999 with a variable angle mixer cos t $43,000 t o d e a n . Each mixer ran 100 hours and Tank /I999 i nduded a hot water circl-llation system in t o t d cost.
El Segundo is current ly using variable angle mixers i n u u d e oil tanks as follows:
Diameter of Mixer Number of M ixers Service 230 f t. 60 hp. 3 Blending and Cleaning 200 f t . 60 hp. 2 Blending and Cleaning 200 f t. 60 hp. 1 (only one manway) Blending and Cleaning 200 f t. 50 hp. 2 Cleaning only
O t h e r Refineries
Pascagoula Refinery has noted succes s fd t e s ~ i n g in d e m i n g two tanks. One was a 200,000 bbL crude tank and i t was d e a n e d in about one week, using 20-man days of labor (previously t h i s took 4 weeks and 100-man days). No mater ia l was taken t o t h e land farm, and t h e tank was essentially d e a n . Also, a 90-ft. d iameter tank was d e a n e d using two cu t t e r s tocks and a 60-hp. Jensen Vari-Angle Mixer. Initially, there was about 112-ft. of fract ionator bot toms and FCC ca ta lys t fines in t h e tank bottom.
5outh Africa's government crude oil t ank fa rm (SFF) and Caltex's Cape Town Refinery repofled successfully d e a n i n g tank using swivel mixers during t h e 1975 Chevron Process Meeting session on Air/ Water Problems. Cape Town SFF personnel have used a Plenty-type 32PlSVE 6,000 side-entry swivel mixer with 30-inch propeller
TANK MANUAL TANK MAINTENANCE
and 60-np. motor in d e m i n g is-it . d i m e t e r tmks. A ~ y p i a l appliczition was in a tank which has 4 iee: o i Oarius Crude siudge. Twenty-two f e e t o i iignt c rude was added, and the t znk mixed cantinuously and emptied a f t e r acproximareiy 14 days. The t a n k bottom was reported very d e a n .
- - &. . - .-
- 2-
. -=
.
* - .>- 9
-
22
.
2s
.h
.-
5" -
'9 "
* = - ..a
--
- . -- -
"-
. --
--
-a
-
a-
m
">
. "
- ..u
> .,. -
a-
-- ---- -- a
x-
.
..u
OLD k g d 7 T . d ~
EMG. DCCT.
--------------*
-----------a-
m - - - - - - - - - . - - - -
------
GO-4SOC ( O W - CD - 8-45 i
', -
Il
l
2 ':7. c
-,,.og
l;rl
a. S
L,'
- ,, -c -, 7
* S
NO
ISlA
3Y
IENQ. DEPT. I I
(2) /%e woier - ye/ m / x shou/d con fo/o o p p r o x m ~ , y e < v
G 7.; Ge/ by cu e ~ g n f .
FOP * /no r /ecrks, us/nq one sock ~oiGe/~sr 500 f o 800 d b / s . OF ' y a n k ~ o p o c / f y . . moy A o v e
3 44 d succ e SJ .for major / e ~ k s (3 barn) one sock per /50 f o ZOO b6/!5. o f ionk c y , ~ ~ c / r )
"=?Y suffice , r "4 A/um/oum ,A /p e; T# C; ,+o i ~ n k boffom;p/oce os near / O /eok . ,
yenerofor; .5/n9/'e h o w e r ; w/fn e" or/f /cs funk bo f fom. /n boftom o f hopper.
1 I
GO. 4 5 0 E ( 8 M s C D . 2 . 6 2 )
PETROLELOM SAFETY DATA Compiled 8v Committee on Safety and Fire Protection
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE 1801 K STREET, N. W. WASHINGTON, 0. C. 20006
PSD 3207
June 1974
PREPARING TANK BOTTOMS FOR HOT WORK
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE SPECIFiC PRECAUTIONS
The purpose of this data sheet is to outline safety precautions for preventing accidental fires md/or explosions while making hot-work repairs to the bottoms of tanks.
For the purpose of this data sheet, the term "'hot work" is defined 3s any operation that will or can produce a spark or flame hot enough to cause the ignition of flammable liquids or vapors.
Tanks that have contained flammable liquids must be considered unsafe for hot work, regardless of age and type of construction, until safety inspection proves otherwise.
Special techniques are required in the per- formance of hot work on tank bottoms to prevent ignition of flammable liquids or vapors that may be
i entrapped under the tank.
Although each tank bottom repair job must receive careful individual consideration, the safety procedures described herein provide various methods for preparing tank bottoms for hot work. These procedures will be applicable to most situa- tions.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The tank must be safely isolated, cleaned and ventilated in accordance with applicable provisions of API RP 2015: Recommended Practice For Cleaning Petroleum Storage Tankr Prior To Entry and Preparing Tank Bottom For Hot Work Opera- tions.
Visual inspections of the hot-work area will be necessary. The conditions and safety precautions under which hot work is to be performed must be clearly stated. The person or persons responsible for authorizing the hot work should designate the precautions to be followed.
Adequate first aid fire-fighting equipment should be available and ready for instant use. Workmen should be instructed in the proper use of this equipment.
I. Work permits for tank entry and/or hot work must be properly signed and issued before work is started.
2 . An air mover should be in operacion at all times during entry and hot work.
3. Lines to and from the tank that have been blanked off, disconnected or otherwise isolated should not be disturbed or dismantled during entry and/or hot work.
4. Metal surfaces of tanks previously used in leaded products service should be cleaned of all deposits at least 30 cm (12 in) on all sides of heat contact. area prior to performing hot work in accordance with the provisions of API RP 2015. If the area described in the preceeding sentence is not cleaned down to bare metal, all personnel in the tank must wear air-supphed respiratory equipment while hot work is being performed.
5. Grounding leads from the welding machine should be attached directly to the tank on which hot work is to be performed.
6. Cylinders of compressed gas used for cutting operations should be securely fastened in an upright positions and kept outside the tank at a safe distance away from the open manholes in accordance with ANSI Z 49. I , Safety In Welding and Cutting. Cutting torches and hoses must be shut off at the cylinder valves and kept outside the tank when not in use.
4. The area inside and outside the tank should be kept clear of combustible material.
INSPECTION PROCEDURES
When hot-work repairs are contemplated, an inspection of the tank bottom must be made, regardless of suspected condition.
Appropriately sized small openings are some- times madein the tank bottom by cold cutting or by drilling holes in each area where hot work is to
be performed to facilitate visible inspections and combustible-gas tesrs. Care musr be t a ~ e n when making such openings to avoid a source of ignition for any flammable vapors which may be released from the underside of the tank bottom. A coolant should be applied to the cutting edge of such tools to reduce the heat of friction. The use of open type electric drilling machines is not recom- mended.
The results of combustible-gas and/or toxic material tests taken from beneath the tank bottom and examination or analysis of samples of soil under the tank will determine if a potential hazard from flammable liquids or vapors andlor toxic vapors exists and the correct work procedures to follow. When inert gases are used, the atmosphere in which the work is being performed should be monitored for oxygen deficiency.
SAFE WORK PROCEDURES
MAJOR REPAIRS
When repair jobs involving most of the rank bottom are planned, it may be desirable to displace the flammable liquids andlor vapor Sene2tll rile tan^ by water-flooding.
1. Drill and tap holes for 13 mm (95 m) plpe dc
high points in the tank bottom suffic~ently spaced to assure proper inspection and dispersement of water.
2. Install pipe nipples to be used as vents, check points and water inlets. Height of nipples should exceed the earthen dike mentioned next.
3. Construcr an earthen dike around the outer shell of the tank higher than the highest lloor plate in the tank.
4. Fill the space underneath the tank with water. Continue the flow of water as required to maintain a constant high water level within the dike.
The work procedures adopted will be deter- 5. Watch for leakage inside the tank ant1 tun- mined by the the tank the porarily plug leaks as necessary to keep the tank type and extent of the hot-work repairs to be bottom dry.. performed and inspection results.
6 . Remove nipples, plug holes with tapered pin Inasmuch as tank bottoms are proven free of or other device and back-weld as required after -
flammable liquids and/or vapors, the safe work repairs a e completed. procedures described in the following apply only to those situations where flammable liquids or vapors are proven present. PERIMETER REPAIRS
MINOR REPAIRS
This type of hot work usually involves the welding of corrosion pits, patches or other repair jobs localized to small areas. The following proce- dure may also be required when welding supports or braces if the bottom is not in good condition.
1. Drill and tap a hole for 13 mm (35 in) pipe adjacent to the repair area.
2. Connect a supply of carbon dioxide (CO, ) or other inert gas to the 13mm tap by using metal tubing. Some device, such as a manometer o r flow meter, should be used to prevent overpressuring of tank bottom.
3. Maintain a flow of inert gas to ensure that, before work has begun and during the course of work, the atmosphere under the tank bottom in the area of welding will not support combustion of any flammable vapor that may be present.
4. Remove tubing, plug hole with tapered pin or other device and back-weld promptly, as required.
Repairs around the periphery of a tank bottom may be made safely after the following prepara- tions:
1. Excavate under the edge of the tank. Such excavations should extend a minimum of 30 cm (12 in) beyond the point of any hot-work area and must be large enough for a man to work in with safety and comfort.
2. Seal off all openings between the tloor plates and the tank foundation by packing with mud or some other suitable material. Such packing should be checked from time to time to assure that the seal remains intact.
3. Use a combustible-gas indicator to check excavations and seals between floor plates and foundation.
4. A portable air blower may be ~1st.d tor ventilation purposes.
P4
Note: Excavations should be carefully rcfillcd to prevent possible failure to tank foundations.
SECTIONAL REPAIRS for srnall jobs, dry ice has been placed on tilt: sand before installing bottom patching plates.
When making sectional repairs to tank bottoms, the foilowing methods may be used: DOUBLE-BOTTOM INSTALLATION
I . Cold-cut the tank bottom to be replaced, When constructing a double bottom in a :ank. using a hand- or air-operated tool, m d remove. A the following procedures may be used: coolant should be applied continuously to the cutting edge of such 'tools to reduce the heat of 1. Place approximately 10 cm (4 in) of sand or friction. other sealing material over the existing floor. There
2. Remove earth from under the section to be may be occasions where the depth of the sealing
replaced. Fill with tamped sand and seal the material can be less than 10 cm.
pirimeter of the patch Lea with mud or some 2. Install a new bottom by welding. other suitable noncorrosive material. Note: Hot work can be safely performed on
3. Use a combustible-gas indicator to be sure an tank foundations that are saturited with oils if effective seal has been made. combustible vapors are not present and there is no
imminent danger of oil penetrating the sand barrier 4. When large sections o l the bottom must be
replaced and it is questionable that the seal will and contacting the new bottom being welded on.
remain effective, it -may be wise to maintain an The foregoing procedures are not intended to inert atmosphere under the patch area when hot cover ail the different types of tank bottom work is being done during installation of a new hot-work repairs that may be encountered. They section. This may be accomplished by using vapor- do, however, describe a variety of situations where ized C 0 2 or other inert gas. Under some conditions these basic principles of safety can be applied.
Order No. 852 22070
The data and methods described in this publication may be used by anyone desiring to do so, but the American Petroleum Institute shall not be held responsible or liable inany way either for loss or damage resulting therefrom or for the violntion of any Federal, state or municipal regulation with which they may conflict.
X I V , HOTTAPPING OFTANKS I N SERVICE
OCCASIONALLY THERE MAY BE ADVANTAGES OR A NEED TO
I N S T A L L A NEW NOZZLE OR OTHER APPURTENANCE I N A TANK
SHELL WITHOUT TAKING THE TANK OUT OF SERVICE, USING
PROPER PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS, T H I S CAN BE
ACCOMPLISHED BY HOT TAPPING, (AN ALTERNATIVE WHICH
SHOULD NOT BE OVERLOOKED I S THE P O S S I B I L I T Y OF
I N S T A L L I N G THE REQUIRED NEW NOZZLE ON A MANHOLE
COVER),
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
HOT TAPPING IS A USEFUL TOOL BUT ITS USE INVOLVES
HAZARDS WHICH MUST BE RECOGNIZED AND WEIGHTED WITH
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS TO THE PROBLEM, WELDING
REQUIRES THAT THE AREA BE COMPLETELY GAS FREE AND THE
JW READINGS BE TAKEN CONTINOUSLY DURING THE WELDING
PROCESS TO ASSURE NO VAPOR ACCUMULATION,
C, EQUIPMENT
THERE ARE SEVERAL MAKES OF HOT TAP MACHINES WHICH CAN
BE PURCHASED OR RENTED, AND ALTHOUGH DEVELOPED
P R I M A R I L Y FOR USE ON P I P E L INES, THEY ARE ALSO
SUITABLE FOR USE ON TANK SHELLS,
D m INSPECTION
BEFORE A HOT TAP IS MADE, EXAHINE THE TANK SHELL AT
THE LOCATION OF THE HOT TAP FOR ANY POSSIBLE
D E F I C I E N C I E S AND REVIEW RECENT RECORDS OF INTERIOR
INSPECTION OF THE TANK,
E , '' STANDARDS
LOCATIONS OF THE NEW NOZZLE WITH RESPECT TO NEARBY
NOZZLES SHOULD BE I N ACCORDANCE WITH LOCATION
REQUIREMENTS OF AP'I-650 AND KEPT REASONABLY CLEAR OF
EXISTING SEAMS, PIPE FLANGES, REINFORCING PLATE AND
DETAILS SHALL CONFORM TO API-658 NOZZLE DETAILS, THE
IIVTERIOR BACKUP WELD FOR THE SINGLE NOZZLE SECTION
CANNOT BE MADE WITH THE TANK I N SERVICE, ,
F, PROCEDURE
SMALL CONIYECTIBMS UP TO 2 INCHES - USE THE STANDARD
WELDING BOSS PER DRAWING GB-4-31368, FOLLOW
I N S T A L L A T I O N INSTRUCTIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWING,
PIPE CONNECTIONS OVER 2 INCHES - NOZZLES LARGER THAN
2 INCHES I N DIAMETER REQUIRE A REINFORCING P L A T E ,
INSTALL NOZZLE AND REINFORCING PLATE IN ACCORDANCE
WITH DETAILS SHOWN IN SECTION 510 OF THE TANK MANUAL*
FIGURES A AND B ,
G, FIRE PROTECTION
TO REDUCE SHELL PATE STRESS DURING WELDING OF THE
NOZZLE AND REINFORCING P L A T E TO THE S H E L L * WORK
SHOULD BE DONE AT LOW O I L HEIGHT, A FEW F E E T ABOVE
THE WELDING, HOWEVER, THE LIQUID LEVEL SHOULD NOT BE
BELOW THE L E V E L WHERE WELDING WORK I S B E I N G DONE I A
L I Q U I D I N T E R I O R BACKING I S NECESSARY TO KEEP THE
S H E L L COOL AND TO PREVENT P O S S I S L E HOT SURFACE
I G N I T I O N OF THE TANK VAPOR SPACE,
' , ENGINEERING PROCEDURS NO. 38 PASCAGOULA REFINERY
PAGE: I OF 5 DATE: JUNE 9, 1982
PURPOSE A$D SCOPE
1.1 The purpose of this Ei;gineering Procedure is to describe the Design Engineer's respansibil ities when a hot tap must be performed .
1.2 This Procedure is interlded primarily for hot tapping lines and vessels in service. If a tank is to b2 :lot tapped, refer to the Tank Manual, Section 51 0, for additional requirements.
1.3 If an EN0 is prepared for hot work other than a hot tap on a line in service, the Designs Engineer must follow this Procedure where applicable.
DEFINITIONS
"Hot tap" - A hot tap i s any connection to a line or vessel in service requiring hot wcrk and the use of a hot tap machine. The hot tap procedure ciinsists of welding the stub to the line or vessel, instal 1 in3 a valve, hydrotesting the stub and valve, installing the not tap machine, cutting the coupon, and removing the hot tap machine, A hot tap does not only mean "use 'of a hot tap machine!'. Both the hot work and the coupon cutting are critical operations in a hot tap. The hot work could cause a fire or explosion, while a lost coupon could damage downstream equipment.
2.2 "In servi:ceU - A line or vess21 is considered to be in service unles; the cquipmcnt hzs been:
a) Depressured b) Isolated with blinds (double blocks and bleeds are not
acceptzble except as out: i ned in Refinery Instruction No. 107, Para. 3)
c) Cleaned until free o f t~ydrocarbcns or other hazardous materials
d) Sniffed for combustibles w-ith a J-W tester e) Approved for hot work by Fire and Safety.
If any - orie of -the above ccnditicns is not met, a Hot Tap Data Sheet is required in addition to the Hot Work permit ("green permit ! ') .
2.3 "Hot Work" - Hot work is any operation that will or can produce enough heat or a spark o r flame hot cnougli to cause ignition of f 1 ammable 1 iquids or v~3psrs.
ENGINEERING PROCEDURE NO. 38 PASCAGOULA REFINERY
HOT TAPS
PAGE: 2 O F 5 GATE: JtiriE 9, 1982
3.0 METALLURGY
3.1 Minimum base metal thick~e5s for a hot tzp on carbon steel, as recornmended by >,?I Fubl i c a t i c r ; 2201, is 1 / 4 " . Thinner walls or alloys cay be hot tz;ped dejend:ng on t h 3 circui~stances.
3.2 Hot tapping should 2c;t t j ~ p:rforneij on equipr~~ent requiring stress -* relief, since natersals cafinot be s t ~ e s s relieved while
pressuriz2d. Exs~:;lles: chrome noly, same grzdes of stain1 ess steel, nquipment which will be in caustic service over 1400F, and equipment which wi 1 1 h a i ; d ? e amines at certain temperatures and concentrations.
3.3 Hot tapping shcu:d - net LC perforzed on equjpcnnt that contains:
a) cacs t l c or hydrogen b) flammable vapor/air or oxygen mixtures ~ i t h i n the flammable or
explosive ranse c) chemicals, such as acids and chlorides, which are likely to
dec~mpose and become hazardous due to the heat of welding d) unsaturated hydrccarbans , unlrss evidence precludes the
possi bi 1 i ty of expicsive decomposition (such as ethylene under specific temper&ture, pressurz arid oxy,;cn mixture conditions)
e) air, except in extre~ely rare cases when the line cannot be thoroughly clfaiierl 2nd has been purgzd with inert gas, water, or steam.
4.0 EQUIPMENT
4.1 Central Tool Room has a hot ta;, machine fcr each of these branch sizes:
%" to 2" - two piece, manually operated TDW Model T-101 1" to 6" - on? piece, pneumatically operated TDW Model
3 60 3" to 12" - one piece, pneumatically operated TEN Model
660
4.2 Hot tap valve must be a full port valve to allow installation of the hot tap machine. On lzrge valves, check the seat ring clearance. Some seat ring lugs may protrud? into hot tap cutter area and could be grouild off when a maximum sjze cut is made.
4.3 On horizontal hot taps where shavings nay interfere with valve seating, provide an udder i r ~ th? bottom of the hot tap stub to trap shavings. Also, install a small valve on the seat of the hot tap valve to blow out any shavjngs that zccmulate in the seat.
a ENGINEERING P R O C E D U R E NO. 38 PASCAGOULA R E F I N E R Y
P A G E : 3 OF 5 DATE: JUNE 9, 1982
HOT TAPS
LIMITATIONS
5.1 Pressure and temperature of the equipment t c be hot tapped sha l l not exceed the l imi ta t ions of the hot t a p machines as fol lows:
1440 psig @ 10OGF 1300 ps i5 @ SOOoF 1100 es ig @ 300OF 1090 ps i9 @ 400oF
300 psig F SQOOF 830 p s i s @ 6000F
. . 700 ps i3 @ 70COF
5.2 All b ~ a n c h connections a re t o 02 w e l i ~ d a"L9Go t o the main l i n e or vesse l .
5.3 Branch connections cf ji" t o 14" m2y be hot tapped in to l i n e s the same s i z e . o r l a r g e r .
5.4 Branch connections of c\Jer 1%" should 02 a t l e a s t one s i z e smaller than the main 1 ine or vesse l . Extreme care must be taken t h a t the p i l o t d r i l l i s centered in the branch connection. Consider using a p i l o t d r i l l guide per Board of Engjneers Zccornmended Pract ice 28, Figure 1 .
5.5 Do not weld c lose r than 78 inches from a f lange c r threaded connection, or 3 inches a welded seam.
5.6 The length of the hot tzp stlab with valve qust not exceed the reach of the hot t ap machine. Tables o-F inaxirnr~m s tub lengths f o r each machifie a r e available a t the Central Tool goom.
6.0 HYDROTEST AVD PRESSURE TEST REqUI4EMENTS
6.1 Hot tap valve must be hydrotested along with the s tub.
6.2 Hydrotest with water i f the oijerating ternperature i s beiow 2000F. From 293oF t o 400oF, use GSP-19 o i l . Up t o 5900F, use GST-90 o i l . If the operat ing temperature i s sbove 5930F, use a high temperature s i l i c o n e o i l ( G E SF-87 or equ iva len t ) .
6.3 Hydrotest pressure wi l l be detei-mined by the Design Engineer using Hot Tap Hydrotest Pressure Calcula t ion, Attachment I . Test pressure wi l l not necessar i ly be the normal hydrotest pressure associated with the flazcje r a t i n g .
6.4 If a re inforc ing pad i s required , leak t e s t the pad welds through - . , the $" dialneter weep hoie. Either hydrotest a t 25 psig with water
o r o i l per Paragraph 6.2, or t e s t w i t h a i r a t 5 psig. See Piping Speci f ica t ion f o r b r a ~ c h cmnect ion reinforcement requirements.
, a ENGINEERING PROCEDGRE NO. 38 PASCAGOULA REFINERY
PAGE: 4 OF 5 DATE: JUNE 9, 1982
PREPARATION
7.1 Prior to hot tapping, the Cesiyn Engineer shall:
Deterr:tine that the i'iietal luryy a;id syste~n conten-Ls wi 1 1 permit welding. Obtain UT gages of wall thicknesses at the hot tap location from Inspection. Calculate the maxirnum hydrotest pressure per Attachment I. If the equipment to be hot tapp2d is a pipe, specify the minimum flow to be maintained to dissipate heat. Suggested minimum velocity for liquids and gases is 1.3 fps. If the equipment to be hot tapped is a vessel or tank, determine what the level of liquid above the hot tap location will be. A minirnum of three feet of liquid above the hot tap is required. Develop a method of iilsrlring that specified flow is maintained during the hot tap (i .e., flow meter, visual, etc.). Specify hot tap valve packing per Valve Packing Schedule, Attachment 11. Develop Hot Tap Data Sheet, Attachment 111. Compile Engineering Work Order, H G ~ Tap Data Sheet, and any other necessary information. Obtain approval of the EKO and attachments from the Lead Engineer, Supervising Engineer, Manager Gesigns Engineering, Maintenance Manager, and Area Superintendent. I s s ~ e EN0 and attzchments.
8.0 STOPPLE PLUGGING - 8.1 Stopple plugging is an unusual procedure which requires the
approval of the Area Superintendent and Manager Designs Engineering. This Hot T3p Procedure must be followed whenever stoppling is to be done.
8.2 bihen an entire sech-ion of line or a vessel must be isolated for repairs or additions wi'thaut interrupting service, Stopple Plugging Machines are used. A pair o-f hot taps is made both upstream and downstream of the section to be isolated and a bypass installed between the outer two. A Stopple Plugging Machine i s instal led through each of the inner two hot taps. When the plugs are secured, the section is available fcr work.
8.3 Stop?le Plugging Machines are available through the T. D. Williamson Covpany in 2" to 40" sizes. The standard machine handles pressures to 960 psi @ 130°F. High temperature machines handle up to 690 psi P 650cF. A i3W technician directs the installatior: cf the plug; and vonitors work whi1.e they are in the 1 ine.
' ENGINEERING PKOCEGURE E0. 38 PASCAGOULA REFINERY
PAGE: 5 OF 5 DATE: JUNE 9, 1982
\
HOT TAPS
8.4 Necessary in-lornati~n for proper Stopple equipment selection includes :
a) temperature b ) pressure c) line size d) wall thickness (UT gage) e) length of tino Sto;;le F:ug will be in line
service metal lurgy anticipated changes in conditions while plugs are in line.
8.5 The 'Design Engineer must specify the gaskets to be used with the Stopple Plugging mzchices, in acccrdance with the Piping Classification of the main lin?. Use only new gaskets.
8.6 The Design Ecgineer, Main'ienafice Foreman arid Shift Supervisor shall - thoroughly r-eview the entire work procedure with the TDW technician prior to k~ork start.
DATE
ATTACHMENTS: I Hot Tap Hydrotest Presstire Calculation with Example A I1 Valve Packing Schedule I11 Hot Tap Oata Sheet
REFERENCES: Recommended Practice No. 28, "3ot Tapping Pipe Lines" Tank Manual, Sgcticn 510 API Publicati~n 2201, "Proc2dures for Welding or Hot
Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables"
EAE/rse - 9/83 'L ENGR . Pk.3C32
DERIVED FROM THE ASME 63ILER F8N3 FRESSURE VESSEL C O G $ , SECTION VIII, PARAGRAPli UG-28, 1980 EDITION WITH ADDENDUMS.
1. EJN - 2 . EQU IPMEKT MATERIAL
3 . EQUIPMENT TEMPERATJRE AT HYDROTEST TIME O F
4. MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH PSI (From t ab l e s in Code)
IN (M in . UP gage)
( I f < 10, refer t a Ccdpi)
From F i g . 5-uG0-28.0.)
(f-rom F i g . 5-UCS-28.X. Exact figure d e p s t d s on mzter ia l . )
psi
8. Maximum calcula ted hydrotest pressurz, PC = 1 . 5 P a = ps i . Paximum f l a n g e r a t i ng hydrctest prEssure, Pf = P S I . Operating pressure, Po = psi .
- No - then hydrotest pres; ire F h t i s the l e s s e r of PC and Pf - Yes - then i s PC + Po < Ff?
- No - then hydrotzst pressure F h t = Pf - Yes - then h y d r o t e s t pressu7e P h t = PC + Po
10. HYDROTEST PaESSljRE, Pht = PSI.
I EAE/rse - 9/83 E N G R P R O C I 2
\ DERIVED FROM THE ASME BOILER AN3 PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, SECTION VIII, PARAGRAPH UG-28, 1980 EDITION WITH AC3E:.iDUi:S.
3 . EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURE AT HYDROTEST TIXE 2.59 O F
4. MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH 3-3, GO3 PSI (From tables in Code)
i n . UT ga.ge) TA-17-'5-- I N
2'?-.oq r< 10, r*ef<r t o Code)
m 1 ~ i ) - 2 8 . 0 . ) 17,500
(Frm Fig. 5-UCS-2E.X. Exact f igure dcpcnds on miterial .)
T7& psi
8. Maximum calculated hydrotest pressure, PC = 1 . 5 Pa = 1890 psi. Maximum flange rat ing hydrotest pressure, Pf = 4= psi . Operating pressure, Po = bO psi.
9. Is PC < Po?
- - t h ~ ~ hydrotest presiu:e P h t i s the lesser of PC and Pf - es - t&s PC + Po < P f ?
- then hydrotest pressure P h e = Pf - Yes - then hydretest pressure Fht = PC + Po
q-Zit' 10. HYDROTEST FREZSL'XE, P f l t = __ PSI.
ACIDS & XYLENES S u l f u r i c
ENGIHEERIHG PQ5CZZLIIRE ;iO. 38 - Ai-XCl+lEET 11 , -7-- -. -----
VALVE PACKXKG SCHE2ULE ---
RECgMMENDED PACK I NG
CHEM-PAC - 2009 John Crane C-1045
CAUSTIC John Crane C-1045
GASES Air Ammonia Butane & Propane Freon
LPG
H E A V Y OILS TO 4500F
H E A V Y OILS A B O V E 4500F
LIGHT OILS TO 7000F
STEAM j, To 4500F
Above 4500F
WATER Fresh S a l t Condensate
HC + H z o v e r 300°F
CHEMICAL M E A Mercaptans Arnines C h l o r i n e DY e I n h i b i t o r
John Crane 6 AM John Crane 6 AM Jchn Crane 6 AM John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM John Crane 187-1
John Crane 6 AM John Crane 6 AM John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane 6 AM
John Crane C-1045 John Crane C-1045 John Crane C-1045 John Crane C-1045 John Crane C-1045 John Crane C-1045
EAE/6-82
L ENGR PROC f ~ 2 / c a
ENGZP4EERTYG PROCEDU2E MO. 30 - AT;F~CH??ENT 111
HCT TRP DATA SHEET
EWO NO.
L I N E NUMBER, SPEC., S I Z E HOT T A P STUS S I Z E
S E R V I C E
P L A N T OR L O C A T I O N
R E Q U I R E D FLGM RATE I N L I N E ( G F M ) ( 3 P D ) (SCFI-I)
PRESSURE IN LINE (PSIG)
I F VESSEL OR TANK, REJUIREC L I q U T n L E V E L ( F T )
TEMPERATURE OF PROGUCT IN L I N E OR TANK ( O F )
V A L V E P A C K I N G ->,--
SPECIAL CONDITIONS ( H Z ~ , ETC. ) - -
O N E - L I N E DIAGRAM O F PROPOSED COPiI IECTIGN - SHOGI NEARBY R E C O G N I Z A B L E FEATURES.
12. DRAWINGS OR SPOOL SHEETS St-1OWIb!G EXACT L O C A T I O N ( I F NONE, ATTACH SKETCH)
1 3 . M I N . WALL T H I C K N E S S A T HOT T A P LOCATION, PER U T GAGE ( I N )
1 4 . VALVE AND STUB HYDROTEST PRESSURE ( P S I G ) - 15. H Y D R O T E S T M E D I A
1 6 . PRESSLIRE T E S T REINFORCEMENT PAD: ( a ) NO PAD ( b ) T E S T WELDS THROUGH 1 / 4 " D I A . WEEP HOLE
EAE/ 9/ 8 3 ENGR PROC" / rse
ENGINEER DATE
XV , DETERMI NATION OF INSPECTION INTERVALS
SCOPE A n -
THE FOLLOWING SECTION SETS FORTH PRINCIPLES FOR
GUIDANCE I N DETERMINATION OF I N S P E C T I O N INTERVALS FOR
CONVENTIONAL ATMOSPHERIC STORAGE TANKS AND LOW
PRESSURE (UNDER 15 PSIG) TANKS* SUCH AS SPHERIODS,
TANK INSPECTION INTERVALS ARE ESTABLISHED TO
F A C I L I T A T E THE PLANNING OF TANK MAINTENANCE FOR
ADEQUATE SAFETY AND MAXIMUM OPERATING U T I L I Z A T I O N AT
MINIMUM EXPENSE, FACTORS TO BE DETERMINED DURING
I N S P E C T I O N ARE: ( 8 ) P H Y S I C A L C O N D I T I O N OF THE TANK:
($3) RATE OF CORROSION: AND (c ) CAUSES OF ANY
DETERIORATION WHICH MAY HAVE OCCURRED, I F P O S S I B L E .
C, DEFINITIONS
1, NINIMUN ALLOWABLE SHELL THICKNESS IS THAT
REQUIRED TO SAFELY OPERATE A TANK AT F U L L
H E I G H T ,
2 , CORROSION ALLOWANCE IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
THE E X I S T I N G THICKNESS AND THE MIN IMUM ALLOWABLE
THICKNESS,
3 , REMAINING LIFE IS THE CORROSION ALLOWANCE
D I V I D E D BY THE ANTICIPATED CORROSION RATE,
D , INSPECTIONS
COMPLETE INSPECTION INCLUDES ALL INTERNAL ARD
EXTERNAL ELEMENTS, SUCH AS SWING CABLE, ROOF
SUPPORTS, A L L APPURTENANCES, VALVES, ETC,, AMQ
REQUIRES THAT THE TANK BE OUT OF SERVICE, GAGE
MEASUREMENT OF SHELL, ROOF AND BOTTOM THICKNESS I S
USUALLY ADVISABLE,
E , I MSPECTI O l INTERVAL
INTERVAL BETWEEN I WSPECTION DEPENDS LARGELY UPON THE
PRODUCT HANDLED AND THE CORROSION HISTORY OF THE
TANK, AND MAY VARY FROM ONE YEAR TO TEN OR MORE
YEARS. THE FOLLOWING ARE SUGGESTED NAXINUM INTERVALS
BETWEEN INTERNAL INSPECTIONS FOR AVERAGE CONDITIONS:
1, IF THE REMAINING L I F E I S OVER 1s YEARS, INSPECT
AT HALF THE WEHAINING L I F E ,
2 , I F THE REHAINING L I F E I S BETWEEN 5 AND 10 YEARS, .
INSPECT I N 5 YEARS.
3 . IF THE REMAINING L I F E I S 5 YEARS OR UNDER*
INSPECT AT THE END OF REMAINING L I F E .
F, OTHER FACTORS
THE ENGINEER SHOULD EVALUATE THE PERTINERT
CIRCUMSTANCES* T A K I N G I N T O CONSIDERATION: ( A ) THE
NECESSITY TO ASSURE OPERATING CONTINUITY; ( B )
MONETARY VALUE OF S P E C I A L STOCKS; (c) R E L I A B I L I T Y OF
- DATA ON SHELL THICKNESS AND CORWOS IOM
CHARACTERISTICS; AND (D) CHARACTERIST ICS OF ANY
PROTECTIVE COATINGS USED,
6 , CORROSION
ANTIC I PATED CORROSION RATES SHALL BE REASONABLE RATES
FOR EACH SHELL COURSE PREDICTED ON PAST S H E L L GAGINGS
OR ACTUAL CORROSION RATES I N THE SAME OR S I M I L A R
SERVICES AND TANK LOCATION, TAKE ADVANTAGE OF EVERY
OPPORTUNITY TO 1M"IPROE THE R E L I A B I L I T Y OF CORROSION
FORECASTS,
CORRECTIVE WORK
PLANNING SHOULD BE COFlPLETED WELL I N ADVANCE FOR
CO!?ROSION ARRESTING MEASURES SUCH AS G U M I T I N G , A
TANK SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM SERVICE BEFORE ANY
SECTION REACHES MIN IMUM THICKNESS TO A V O I D A D D I T I O N A L
EXPENSE FOR STEEL RENEWALS,
I , REPORTS -
REPORTS RECOMMENDING REPAI ws SHOULD INCLUDE THE
LBCATIQN~ EXTENT, AND REASONS FOR ANY REPAIRS
RECOMMENDED,
SAMPLES OF TYPICAL REPORT FORM MAY BE FOUND I N THE
, API GUIDE FOR INSPECTION OF R E F I N E R Y E Q U I P M ENT~
CHAPTER XI I I, "INSPECTION OF ATMOSPHERIC AND LOW- PRESSURE STORAGE TANKS, N
Inspection program cuts tank-fai ure risk John R. Fraylick
9: Stanclard O i l Co. Cleveland, Ohio
'Sohio Pipe Line Co. has succe~sfuily reduced the risk of low-tempelature brittle failures of oil-storage tanks
'.through a system of inspection and prompt repair.
The company concluded lhat ~ t s
Based on a paper presented to the Energy-sources " Technology Conierence and E x h ~ b ~ t ~ o n (ASME),
-'. Fcb 23-27, New Orleans
program was necessary because, within i ts operating geography, many tanks were built between 1940 and 1960 with steel of relatively low-im- pact quality.
Finding and removing low-impact steel from the tanks were clearly im- practical. Therefore, Sohio focused on eliminating the other two contributors to brittle iai!ure: high, localized stress- es; and cracks, notches, and other crack starters.
History. In February and March 1952, two oil-storage tanks failed dur-
ing hydrostatic tests in Fawley, En- gland.' As a result of these failures and a third one in Canada, a study group within the American Petroleurn Institute's (API) divisicn of refining was appointed lo review thc oil-stor- age-tank Fail~ire problem for the oil industry. Results of this survey were reported in a paper' submitted at the di\ilsion's meeting, May 11, 1954.'
The report conclucied that although any failure i s serious, the overall prob- lem was not. The repor! did point, however, to the need for improve-
Brittle failure of a pressure storage tank, Cleveland, Dec. 5, 1957. Arrow shows failure locat~on (Fig 1 )
5 TECHNO1 6 6 Y Jalv ? 1 lr18h Otl & GA\ Journ~l j5
ment in design to eliminate stress con- centration factors, for use of sound welding practices, and for carrying out thorough inspection during con- struction.
Because Sohio had experienced brittle cracking of several process ves- sels, Ihe problem was viewed with greater concern within the company than elsewhere in the industry. Tliere- fore, during 1956, studies were initiat- ed better to understand the problem. This was an ideal time for such a study because a new refinery was being constructed, and a broad source of materials samples was available for testing.
Charpy impact tests have been commonly used to measure the de- gree of susceptibility to brittle failure (the lower the Charpy value, the more brittle the material). The acceptance test for steel is a minimum 15-ft-lb Charpy V-notch impact at the lowest operating temperature for the
Sohio tested more than 200 samples from new construction and from old equipment which had experienced brittle failures. A progress report of this study was reported to the API clivision of refining May 13, 1 9 ~ 8 . ~
The conclusions from this study, at least i1~1 regard to oil-storage tanks, were that only half Sohio's oil-storage tanks could be considered safe from failure at 50" F. and virtually none could be considered safe at O0 F. In the geography in which Sohio was operating, these conclusions caused a high level of concern.
Sohio experience. During the time this study was taking place, Sohio experienced a brittle failure in a pres- sure storage tank (Fig. This spher- oid was being filled with water before being returned to service after a major repair.
The operator misplaced the decimal when converting gauge pressure to feet of water which resulted in over- filling the vessel. The 3-in. vent on top could not handle the water entering through the 16-in. fi l l opening. The pressure exceeded what the vessel, could handle and a brittle failure split across four plates at the equator.
This failure ran out into ductile ma- terial on either side of the brittle split. Water rushed out the large opening creating a vacuum in the top of the vessel and it collapsed. The vessel was scrapped.
Whether ductile material would have resulted in a smaller, more local- ized failure, one which could have avoided pulling in of the top, is argu- able. Many people within the compa- ny, however, believed it would have. P\lthough this was not a flat-bottom- tank failure, this episode intensified interest in brittle failures.
1 Tank shell, roof location after 1972 failure * 1
Sohio's efforts were focused on se- lection of better mateiials for new oil- storage tanks. Therefore, as API Stan- dard 12C, now API Standard 650 was revised to provide better, notch-tough (i.e., brittle-resistant) materials, the concern with the problem dimin- i ~ h e d . ~
Flat bottom-tank failures. ln early 1972, an event took p!ace which not only redirected attention to the sub- ject of brittle failure but also caused a refocus of concern for brittle failures on existing rather than new equip- ment.
This event was a total, catastrophic brittle failure of a 66,000-bbl, 100-11 diameter by 48-11 high floating-roof tank."
This tank split from the bottom to the top and completely around at the shell-to-bottom joint. The shell was thrown more than 100 ft in a direction opposite the vertical split and onto the tank dike (Fig. 2).
The roof floated downward toward the split ending about 40 ft from the center of the original tank. O i l carried a distance of 400 to 600 it. The shell, riding a wave of oil, hit a power pole.
A 3 X 5-ft segment of a 0.70-in. thick shell plate was broken off by the power pole. This 3 x 5-ft segment and the lower five (of six) plates in the vertical split showed the typical chev- ron or herringbone patter on the sur- face of the failure which literally pointed to the origin of failure.'
The origin for this failure was a crack in a \veld at the junction of 5-in. high patching plates added to repair
icternal corrosion. The shell was "cladded" with these patch plates for the full circumference ot the tank (Fig. 3).
The hell-to-bottom ioint failed at the fillet weid connecting the cladding plates and rep!acement tank-floor plates. The \velds on this cladding proviciecl numerous sources for cracks which could penetrate into the tank shell in this highly stressed area of the tank.
No fil-e or injuries occurred and 98% of the oil was recovered.
About 10 years later, a 100,000-bbl crude-oil tank failed in Moose jaw, Canada.9 This failure had many paral- lels with Sohio's earlier failure: The fracture went vertically from near the bottom to the top; the shell split com- pletely loose from the bottom; and the entire shell was thrown with consider- able force in the opposite direction.
This failure originated at a manway nozzle weld in the weld between the nozzle and the reinforcing pad (Fig. 4). Incomplete penetration of the weld was reported and fine cracking was also observed in the welds which were attributed to wrong selection of electrodes.
The investigators also postulated that the normally high stresses in the nozzle weld might have been supple- mented by the thermal stresses caused by temperature differentials between the air and crude oil and/or ground and crude oi l induced by a rapid drop in atmospheric temperature.
Oi l spread over a substantial area and caught fire which resulted in
56 Oil R CasJnurnal,July 21, 1986 TECHNOLOGY
XVI , PRODUCTION TANKS
A, I NTRODUCTION
THIS SECTION PROVIDES GUIDANCE IN THE DESIGN,
CONSTRUCTION, AND MAINTENANCE OF VERTICAL TANKS FOR
ATMOSPHERIC STORAGE OF CRUDE OIL IN OIL FIELD
PRODUCTION OPERATIONS,
B, "CODES AND STANDARDS
API STANDARDS
1 , API STANDARD 12A: SPECIFICATION FOR OIL STORAGE TANKS WITH RIVETED SHELLS (240 - 225,000 BBLS)
3 API STANDARD B2D: SPECIFICATION FOR LARGE WELDED PRODUCTION TANKS (500 - 3,000 BBLS) --
5 . API STANDARD 12F: SPECIFICATION FOR SMALL WELDED -
PRODUCTION TANKS (90 - 440 BBLS)
6 , A P I STANDARD 650: WELDED STEEL TANKS FOR OIL
STORAGE.
. MOST VERTICAL STORAGE TANKS PURCHASED BY THE COMPANY
ARE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A P I STANDARD 650 AND
A COPY OF THIS IS INCLUDED IN THE TANK MANUAL,
COPIES OF THE OTHER A P I STANDARDS MAY BE OBTAINED
DIRECTLY FROM THE API, 1801 K STREET N n W a
WASHINGTON, DmCm, 20006, API STANDARDS 12A AND 12E
HAVE L I T T L E APPLICWYIOM I N PRESENT DAY PRODUCING
OPERATIONS, EXISTING RIVETED TANKS ARE RAPIDLY BEING
RETIRED AND WOODEN TANKS AFiE WOW PROHIBITED BY OSHA
FOR ABOVE-GROUND STORAGE OF CRUDE O I L ,
OSHA REGULATIONS
PRODUCTION TANKS IN THE UNITED STATES MUST COMPLY
WITH THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS -.
(OSHA) OF THE U n S n DEPARTMENT OF LABOR,
THE PLANNING PHASE SHOULD ALSO INVESTIGATE STATE OR
LOCAL REGULATIONS THAT MAY BE APPLICABLE. THESE WILL -
GENERALLY RELATE TO F I R E PROTECTION AND POLLUTION
CONTROL , WITH RESPECT TO F I RE PROTECT ION, THE MFPA
30 N F ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ AND COHBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS C O B E ~ IS THE
MOST WIDELY RECOGNIZED AUTHORITY,
C, DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
MOST OF THE DESIGN FACTORS DISCUSSED HEREIN AND I H
THE TANK MANUAL APPLY TO PRODUCTION TANKS AND THIS
SECTION PROVIDES A CROSS REFERENCE TO PERTINENT
INFORMATION CONTAINED ELSEWHERE IN THE MANUAL, THE
INFORHATION REPRESENTS OVERALL GOOD PRACTICE BASED ON
COMPANY EXPERIENCE AND, I N SOME CASES, SUPPLEMENTS OR
M O D I F I E S THE REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH I N THE A P I
STANDARDS,
--
REFER TO SECTION 11, GENERAL DESIGN AND SECTION I,
SELECTION OF TANKS FOR A GENERAL DISCUSSION OF THE
B A S I C ELEMENTS THAT MUST BE CONSIDERED, SECTION II
COVERS SUCH ITEMS AS: SERVICE AND USE, TANK
DIMENSIONS, SITE CONDITIONS AND BOTTOM D E S I G ~ ~ ,
SECTION I COVERS FACTORS RELATED TO SELECTION SUCH AS
C A P A C I T Y REQUIREMENTS, OPERATING NEEDS, ECONOMY AND -
THE B A S I C ELEMENTS THAT MUST B E CONSIDERED IN
SELECTING THE TYPE OF ROOF,
'REFER TO THAT PART OF SECTION IP ENTITLED, "BRITTLE
FRACTURE AND QUALITY OF STEEL" AND TO RECOMMEIVDED
PRACTICE NO, 20 FOR M A T E R I A L REQUIREMENTS THAT SHOULD
B E CONSIDERED TO PROTECT AGAINST B R I T T L E FRACTURE,
THIS FACTOR WILL MOT GENERALLY BE A PROBLEM FOR BANKS
SMALLER THAN ABOUT 40,000 BBLS UNLESS THE DESIGN
METAL TEMPERATURE I S BELOW - 10F,
T A ~ K SHELLS MAY BE SUBJECT TO BUCKLING UNDER WIND
PRESSURE, SECTION I 1 AND THE REFERENCE RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE NO, 11 PROVIDES A BASIS FOR ASSURING THAT
THE PROPOSED TANK HAS ADEQUATE RESISTANCE TO SWELL
BUCKLIIVG, TANKS THAT HAVE A HEIGHT TO DIAMETER RATIO -
EXCEEDING 1 TO 1 ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO B E I N G OVERTURNED
BY H I G H WINDS WHEN EMPTY OR NEARLY EMPTY. IIV THESE
INSTANCES SOME MEANS OF P R O V I D I N G P O S I T I V E ANCHORAGE,
SUCH AS ANCHOR BOLTS, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED,
REFER TO SECTION I I AND THE REFERENCED RECOF~MENDED
PRACTICE NO, 11 FOR INFORMATION ON THE NEED IN A
PARTICULAR L O C A L I T Y TO CONSIDER S E I S M I C FORCES AND,
I F SO, THE DESIGN C R I T E R I A FOR PROVIDING ADEQUATE
RESISTANCE TO SHELL BUCKLING,
REFER TO SECTION X FOR A DISCUSSION OF THE FACTORS TO
BE CONSIDERED IN LOCATING TANKS, ASIDE FROM
OPERATING REQUIf lEMENTS AND TOPOGRAPHICAL REQUIREMENT
THE PRIMARY CONSIDERATION I S F I R E PROTECTION,
SECTIOR X INCLUDES THE IFPA 30 REQUIREMENTS REGARDING
TANK SPACING AND DISTANCE FROM PROPERTY L I N E S AND
OTHER OPERATING FACILITIES. BOLTED TANKS ARE LESS
RESISTANCE TO DAHAGE FROM A SURROUNDlNG F I R E THAN A
WELDED OR R IVETED TANK, TH I s CHARACTER I ST IC SHOULD
BE CONSIDERED I N THE LOCATION AND USE OF BOLTED
TANKS,
REFER TO SECTION X I FOR PRACTICES AND PRINCIPLES TO
BE FOLLOWED I N DESIGNING AS ADEQUATE TANK FOUNDATIGW, -
NOTE PARTICULARLY THE TWO METHODS THAT CAN BE USED TO
PROTECT THE UNDERSIDE OF THE TANK BOTTOM FROM
CORROSION: A FOUNDATION TOP DRESSING OR CATHODIC
PROTECTION, AND THE NEED TO MAKE T H I S SELECTION
BEFORE CONSTRUCTION I S STARTED,
THE VARIOUS A P I STANDARDS ADEQUATELY COVER MOST OF
THE APPURTENANCES USED ON PRODUCTION TANKS, SECTIONS
I 1 1 - V I I I PRESENTS COMPANY PRACTICES AND SPECIAL
DESIGNS FOR THESE AND OTHE2 APPURTENANCES, THE
DESIGN OF LADDERS AND STAIRWAYS ARE ALSO SUBJECT TO
OSHA REGULWT IONS, COMPANY STANDARD DRAW I NGS FOR THE
APPURTENANCES COMPLY W I T H OSHA REGULATIONS,
D , MA1 NTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
SECT ION X I % I SUMHAW I ZES MAINTENANCE PRACTICES OF
VARIOUS OPERATING ORGANIZATIONS AND I S INTENDED TO BE -.
USED AS A GUIDE FOR A L L TYPE OF TANKAGE INCLUDING
PRODUCTION TANKS,
